A Foodcentric Life

  • Best Summer Recipes
  • Meet Chef Sally
  • Recipe Index
  • Subscribe
menu icon
go to homepage
  • Best Summer Recipes
  • Meet Chef Sally
  • Recipe Index
  • Subscribe
    • Facebook
    • Instagram
    • LinkedIn
    • Pinterest
  • search icon
    Homepage link
    • Best Summer Recipes
    • Meet Chef Sally
    • Recipe Index
    • Subscribe
    • Facebook
    • Instagram
    • LinkedIn
    • Pinterest
  • ×
    Home » Recipes

    Easy Instant Pot Chicken Broth

    02/08/2021 by Sally Cameron 12 Comments

    Instant pot chicken broth

    Instant Pot chicken broth is the magic shortcut every home cook needs. Thanks to pressure cooking, you get the same rich, golden flavor as traditional bone broth - in just 3 hours instead of 20. It's more flavorful, and far healthier than anything in a box or can. Once you try this method, you may never go back to the stovetop version. Make batches and freeze it! That's what I do.

    Golden Instant Pot Chicken Broth in a glass container with the pressure cooker behind it.

    I started pressure cooking homemade chicken broth out of necessity, but now it's my go-to because the results are incredible. The Instant Pot extracts deep flavor and rich nutrients quickly, without the long simmer or tending traditional chicken broth requires. It's hands-off, fuss-free, and produces a clean, golden broth every time.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Instant Pot Chicken Broth Recipe Snapshot

    • Faster than traditional broth - Ready in a few hours instead of simmering for hours.
    • Rich flavor from pressure cooking - Deep, golden broth with concentrated taste.
    • Versatile use - Perfect for sipping or adding to recipes that call for chicken broth.
    • Lower histamine option - Shorter cooking time makes it gentler for sensitive eaters.
    • Better than store-bought - You control the ingredients, superior taste and nutrition.

    Ingredients You'll Need

    Ingredients for chicken broth on the counter in prep bowls.
    • Chicken - Use meaty, bone-in pieces such as whole legs and thighs. A whole chicken works too. Broth needs bones for body and flavor. Ask the butcher to cut it up, buy a pre-cut bird, or cut it yourself (a great skill to learn!). Whenever possible, choose organic.
    • Onion - White, yellow, brown, or sweet onions all work for building a savory base.
    • Carrot - Part of the classic French flavor base mirepoix (onion, carrot, celery). Adds natural sweetness and depth.
    • Celery - Balances flavors and adds subtle herbal notes.
    • Leek (optional) - Adds gentle, layered flavor if you have one on hand.
    • Garlic (optional) - Boosts flavor and supports the immune system.
    • Herbs - Fresh thyme, parsley, and a bay leaf (fresh or dried).
    • Filtered water - Always use clean, filtered water for the best-tasting broth.
    • Black peppercorns - Add for mild spice and depth, but skip if you're histamine-sensitive.

    Please see the recipe card for measurements.

    Chef's Tip: NO SALT. You should never salt broth. Save the salt for the finished dish. It is more controllable that way and people have differing levels of salt sensitivity or the need for a lower sodium diet.

    Substitution and Variations

    • Garlic - Skip it entirely if you're allergic or sensitive.
    • Leek - Use the dark green tops for broth; save the light white part for sautés and other cooking.
    • Thyme - Fresh sprigs give the best flavor, but dried thyme works if that's all you have.
    • Extra richness - Add a few chicken feet for a more gelatinous, collagen-rich broth. (It may feel unusual, but it's a classic chef's trick worth trying).

    Chef's Note: is it stock or broth? Today the terms are used interchangeably, but technically stock is made from the bones of the chicken and broth is made from meaty pieces and vegetables. Bones make homemade chicken broth gelatinous (like jello) because bones release collagen as they cook.

    How to Make Chicken Broth in an Instant Pot

    There are two chicken options: Use chicken parts such as whole legs or thighs, or use a whole chicken. If you're cutting up a whole chicken start at step 1. You need a heavy chef's knife. Special heavy scissors called poultry shears are also very helpful, and not expensive to buy.

    If you have chicken pieces, start at step 2 "broth instructions". Another good addition for the pot is the leftover backs from making spatchcock chicken.

    If Using a Whole Chicken (How to Cut Up a Chicken)

    Place the chicken rounded side (top) up on a stable cutting board.

    Steps cutting up a whole chicken on a cutting board with a chefs knife.
    Step 1: Cut between the leg and body on the side of the chicken, then just above the leg joint, freeing the leg and thigh.
    Cutting up a raw whole chicken for broth, with broth vegetables on the side.
    Step 2: Cut the chicken in half through the breastbone starting on top. If it's hard with your knife try poultry shears. Next turn the body over and cut along both sides of the backbone to split the chicken in half.
    Pieces of a whole cut up chicken ready to use to make broth, with celery, carrots, onion, and herbs.
    Step 3: Cut apart the legs and thighs at the joint, cut the chicken breast into two pieces crosswise, and cut the body in half crosswise. Remove as much skin as possible.

    Broth Instructions

    Strip as much skin off of the chicken as possible. That makes room for more meat and bones.

    View into an Instant Pot for making chicken broth with chicken, vegetables, and herbs.

    Add all of the ingredients to the pot then add the water. Don't fill the inner pot beyond the PC max fill line marked on the inside. Lock on the lid and turn the vent to lock. Press the Soup/Broth button and set the timer for 2 hours. It should be set to high pressure.

    When the time is up, hit the cancel button and allow the pressure to release naturally for 20-30 minutes. After that, turn the vent button and let any remaining pressure release. Overall time with the pressure build and then the release is 3 hours in total.

    Straining and Chilling the Broth

    A pot of golden finished chicken broth cooling in a sink full of ice and water.

    Strain the broth of spent chicken, bones and vegetables through a sieve or fine colander. Clean out the pot and add the broth back in, then place it in a sink full of ice and water to quickly chill (ice bath). Stir occasionally to assist the release of heat. After an hour (or less) your broth should be cold.

    For refrigerator safety. let the chicken broth cool to 70°F before putting it in the refrigerator to further chill.

    Chef's note: When I make long-simmered bone broth, I use a little apple cider vinegar to help release the collagen from the bones. For a pressure cooker vinegar is not needed as the higher temperature in pressure cookers converts collagen to gelatin quickly for nice rich broth. Added a few chicken feet or backs insures the gelatinous texture.

    Refrigerate Broth Overnight

    A pot of chicken broth with chilled fat layer on top, ready for defatting.

    Cover the pot and place it in the refrigerator overnight. In the morning skim the solidified fat from the surface, portion, label and freeze.

    One additional tip, sometimes I strain the broth one more time through a fine sieve (or cheesecloth) to remove any vegetable bits, but this is optional. You can use a small, mini fine strainer and do it as you portion into your containers for freezing.

    How to Freeze Chicken Broth

    I freeze in 1-cup and 3-cup portions for sipping and soups, or in mini portions (½ cup size) for deglazing pans to make quick sauces. Use mason jars, a freezer bag or other airtight container.

    If using a freezer bags, be sure the broth is totally chilled, seal the bags well and lay them flat in your freezer on a small rimmed sheet pan to freeze solid. Then you can remove the sheet pan.

    The reason this is not my favorite freezing method is the bags can get nicked and leak, plus it's plastic. Use glass or try these large silicone molds called Souper Cubes. Love them! Be sure to label and date your containers.

    Pressure Cooker vs Slow Cooker

    For homemade chicken broth, I recommend a pressure cooker (like the Instant Pot) over a slow cooker. Pressure cooking happens in a sealed chamber with steam and pressure, which extracts maximum flavor and nutrients from the chicken and vegetables in a fraction of the time.

    Slow cooker - While convenient, most models only make smaller batches, and the flavor isn't quite as concentrated. I prefer making larger amounts in the Instant Pot so I can freeze the extra.

    Instant Pot or electric pressure cooker - I use a 6-quart Instant Pot Duo Plus. Any brand works, and if you have a larger pot, scale up ingredients to make a bigger batch (cooking time may increase slightly).

    Stovetop pressure cooker - Works just as well if that's what you have.

    Four Ways to Thaw and Reheat Chicken Broth

    • Refrigerator overnight - Transfer frozen broth to the fridge and let it thaw slowly. Reheat gently in a small saucepan over low heat.
    • Microwave + stovetop - Loosen the broth in the microwave, then finish thawing and heating in a pan on the stove.
    • Cold water bath - Place the frozen container in a larger bowl of cold water, changing the water every 30 minutes until thawed enough to transfer to a pan.
    • Silicone cube method - If frozen in cubes, pop one out and melt it directly in a saucepan over low heat, covered.

    Tip: if you use a freezer bag, be sure to place the bag in a large bowl to in case the bag has a hole and leaks.

    Finished broth in a glass container for freezing, with fresh vegetables alongside.

    Recipe FAQs

    How long does it take to make chicken broth in the Instant Pot?

    When making chicken broth in an Instant Pot, it takes approximately 3 hours in total. It takes about 30 minutes to come up to pressure, then 2 hours to cook, then approximately 30 minutes for the pressure to drop before straining and chilling. Can I make a quick chicken broth for a shorter cooking time? Yes, I've made it with a cook time of 90 minutes versus 2 hours still with good results.

    What pressure setting should I use for making chicken broth?

    Use the high pressure setting on an Instant pot when making chicken broth.

    How should I store the Instant Pot chicken broth, and how long will it last?

    Instant Pot chicken broth lasts 3-4 days in the refrigerator or 2-3 months in the freezer in appropriate containers, labeled and dated.

    More Broth and Soup Recipes

    For more broth recipes, try my long-simmered chicken bone broth, roasted turkey broth, and quick vegetable broth. Find chicken soup recipes here.

    • Rich brown roasted turkey broth in glass jars on a kitchen counter.
      Turkey Broth Recipe
    • Golden homemade broth on a counter with onions, carrots, celery, and parsley.
      Low Sodium Vegetable Broth
    • Golden chicken bone broth in glass jars with carrots, celery, and parsley, cooling on the counter.
      Chicken Bone Broth (Homemade)
    • A finished pot of chicken vegetable soup ready to eat on a table.
      Chicken Vegetable Soup Recipe

    ⭐️Did You Make This Recipe?

    If you make Instant Pot chicken broth, please add your comment. I appreciate your feedback and enjoy hearing from you. If you loved it, please give it a 5-star rating! They really help other readers.

    📖 Recipe

    Instant Pot Chicken Broth | afoodcentriclife.com

    Easy Instant Pot Chicken Broth

    Sally Cameron
    Delicious, nourishing, golden chicken broth, saves time with an Instant Pot. Faster cooking time is great for people sensitive to histamine.
    5 from 3 votes
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 10 minutes mins
    Cook Time 2 hours hrs
    Pressure time up and down 3 minutes mins
    Total Time 2 hours hrs 13 minutes mins
    Course Beverage, Broth
    Cuisine American
    Servings 9 yield 9 cups
    Calories 35 kcal

    Equipment

    • 6 quart or larger Instant Pot or electric pressure cooker

    Ingredients
      

    • 4 pounds bone-in skinless chicken thighs and legs skinned as much as possible, see note below
    • ½ onion chopped
    • 2 carrots chopped
    • 1 large rib celery chopped
    • ½ medium leek, rinsed of sand chopped, optional
    • 3 garlic cloves peeled and smashed
    • 2-3 fresh thyme springs
    • 1 bay leaf
    • 2 quarts filtered water 8 cups

    Would you like to save this recipe?

    Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

    Instructions
     

    Prep the chicken

    • If using a whole chicken cut it into pieces and remove extra fat and as much skin as possible. For help see the photos in the post. If using pieces, also trim off extra fat and skin. Place the chicken in the pot, then add the onions, carrot, celery, leek, garlic, thyme, bay leaf and water.

    Pressure cook

    • Fill the pot up to the line that reads "PC max ⅔" with fresh filtered water, about 2 quarts. Lock on the lid and turn the vent to lock. Press the Soup/Broth button and set the timer for 2 hours. After 2 hours press the cancel button and allow the pressure to release naturally for 20-30 minutes. After that turn the vent button and let any additional pressure release.

    Strain broth

    • Strain the spent chicken, bones and vegetables thorugh a sieve or fine colander into another container. Wash the pot, then add the broth back to the pot for chilling.

    Chill broth

    • Fill a sink half full of ice and cold water for an ice bath. Place the pot in the ice bath and chill for about 1 hour, or until the broth is below 70°F. Cover and place the pot in the refrigerator overnight. In the morning, skim the surface of solidified fat, then portion, label, and freeze.

    Notes

    Chicken feet - Adding a few chicken feet to the pot creates a more gelatinous broth, more collagen. If you've  never bought organic chicken feet it might seem creepy, but they are a good thing when it comes to broth!
    Chicken note - Don't use boneless, skinless chicken breasts or thighs. The point is meaty pieces with bones.
    Nutrition note - Nutrition info is for strained chicken broth only. Values may vary depending on simmering time and how much chicken/skin you use.
     

    Nutrition

    Serving: 1cupCalories: 35kcalProtein: 5gFat: 1gSaturated Fat: 1gPolyunsaturated Fat: 1gMonounsaturated Fat: 2gTrans Fat: 0.02gFiber: 1gSugar: 1gVitamin C: 3mgCalcium: 29mgIron: 1mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    Easy White Chicken Chili

    11/10/2016 by Sally Cameron 2 Comments

    white chicken chili

    When your family is hungry and time is short, make this hearty white chicken chili. Done in 30 minutes, use pantry staples like canned white beans, canned chilies, chicken broth, onions, herbs and spices. Add leftover or rotisserie chicken to keep it easy and get your family fed.

    white chicken chili | AFoodCentricLife.com

    Getting home a bit later than planned I was greeted with "I'm hungry". Not hello. Not hi. Nope. Sad faces and I'm hungry. I had to do something quick and reached for leftover chicken as my lifeline.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    I'd been testing this white chicken chili recipe and knew I had all the ingredients. It came together in about 25-30 minutes. Healthy and hearty, it can help you face the "what's for dinner" dilemma.

    white chicken chili | AFoodCentricLife.com
    Pot of white beans.

    Ingredients for White Chicken Chili

    • Leftover chicken or rotisserie chicken from the store
    • Chopped onion and garlic
    • Chicken broth
    • White beans - Cannellini or Great Northern beans, rinsed and drained
    • Canned diced green chilies (mild or hot, your call), 4 ounces
    • Herbs and spices
    • Cheese to garnish (optional if you don't do dairy)
    • 1 avocado, pitted and diced (another optional garnish)

    Prep Ahead Tips for Chili

    Shave a few minutes off the cooking time if you chop your chicken ahead, rinse and drain the beans, even measure out your spices and chop the cilantro. Prep the night ahead or in the morning if you have time.

    You can make this white chicken chili a few days ahead of time, then heat it back up when you are ready to eat. It holds for 3 days in the fridge.

    How to Cook White Chicken Chili

    • Chop the onion and cook in oil until softened
    • Add garlic and chilies for a minute
    • Add spices, cook another minute or two
    • Stir in beans
    • Pour in chicken and broth, stir
    • Sprinkle in cilantro and heat through

    Great garnishes include diced avocado, chopped scallions, or grate a little cheese over the top. Our current favorite is raw sharp white cheddar from Organic Valley.

    Options

    If you need to stretch the quantity, add more broth and turn it into a soup. If you have fresh poblano chilies available, chop one into small dice and sauté with the chopped onion. Another nice add is a couple of fresh chopped tomatillos. Make it simple or add a few options to make it your own.

    White Chicken Chili | AFoodCentricLife.com

    📖 Recipe

    White Chicken Chili | AFoodCentricLife.com

    Fast & Easy White Chicken Chili

    Sally Cameron
    Fast, easy, hearty and healthy, this white chicken chili comes together quickly. Top with diced avocado, or white cheddar or Jack cheese as an option. Make it ahead, reheats very well.
    5 from 1 vote
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 15 minutes mins
    Cook Time 17 minutes mins
    Total Time 32 minutes mins
    Course Dinner, Entree, lunch
    Cuisine American
    Servings 4
    Calories 338 kcal

    Ingredients
      

    • 1 tablespoon oil olive, coconut, avocado
    • 1 small onion 1 ¼ cups or an 8 ounce onion, chopped
    • 3 garlic cloves finely chopped
    • 1 small can chopped green chilies 4 ounces
    • 2 teaspoons ground cumin
    • 2 teaspoons ancho chili powder
    • 1 ½ teaspoons dried oregano
    • 1 teaspoon ground coriander
    • 2 15- ounce cans cannellini beans rinsed and drained
    • 2 cups cooked chopped chicken leftover or rotisserie
    • 2 cup chicken broth preferably homemade
    • ¼ cup chopped cilantro or Italian parsley
    • 4 ounces grated white cheddar or Jack cheese optional

    Would you like to save this recipe?

    Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

    Instructions
     

    • In a medium pot (4-5 quarts) over medium low heat, heat the oil. Add chopped onion. Cook onion until softened, about 3-5 minutes. Stir in the garlic and cook 1 minute. Add the chilies, cumin, ancho, oregano and coriander and cook another minute.
    • Add the beans, broth and chicken and heat through, stirring occasionally. Adjust the thickness with more broth if desired. Stir in the cilantro and serve topped with garnishes as desired,

    Nutrition

    Calories: 338kcalCarbohydrates: 26gProtein: 22gFat: 18gSaturated Fat: 7gPolyunsaturated Fat: 2gMonounsaturated Fat: 7gTrans Fat: 0.04gCholesterol: 49mgSodium: 557mgPotassium: 282mgFiber: 8gSugar: 2gVitamin A: 712IUVitamin C: 5mgCalcium: 320mgIron: 4mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    Old Fashioned Sand Tarts Cookie Recipe

    12/21/2012 by Sally Cameron 7 Comments

    sand tart cookies

    Baking old fashioned sand tart cookies has been a family Christmas tradition for decades. Baking these thin Pennsylvania Dutch sugar cookies brings back great memories of baking with my mom. If you love baking cookies during the holiday season, add this crispy cookie recipe to your favorite cookie recipe box. They're a sweet and crispy cookie for the holidays, cut into shapes and decorated with colored sugar sprinkles.

    Sand tart cookies on a plate near cookie cutters.

    Sand tarts sometimes go by different names like Pennsylvania Dutch sand tarts. These rolled and cut cookies were always a part of our holiday cookie platters. One addition we made was fresh orange zest for wonderful citrusy flavor.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why You'll Like This Recipe

    • It's an old fashioned classic sugar cookie.
    • A great cookie to gather friends and family and make together.
    • Simple ingredients.
    • I'll have a gluten-free version out soon.

    Recipe Ingredients

    While baking with partially hydrogenated shortening (Crisco), white flour and white sugar was standard in the 1940′s, I've adapted my mom's recipe to make it a little more modern.

    I use butter instead of shortening, natural sugar instead or regular white sugar, and doubled the orange zest. In addition to organic ingredients, choose naturally colored sugar sprinkles if you prefer.

    • Flour: Regular all purpose white flour.
    • Baking powder: Buy aluminum free and check the expiration date.
    • Butter: I've swapped unsalted butter for partially hydrogenated shortening (Crisco) often used in 1950's and 1960's baking. If possible, buy an 85% fat butter, sometimes called European butter. Standard American butter is 80% fat.
    • Sugar: White sugar or natural cane sugar. Superfine sugar is good too.
    • Eggs: Large eggs for the dough and to use as an egg wash.
    • Oranges: While not traditional, we added plenty of fresh orange zest for a terrific citrus flavor. it was our family twist.
    • Colored sugar sprinkles: Colored sprinkles make Christmas cookies more festive. If you buy the naturally colored sugar sprinkles the colors are not as bright but they are still beautiful.

    For measurements please see the recipe card.

    Chef's note: I'm working on a gluten-free version of sand tart cookies and will add notes as soon as possible, I testing with King Arthur Measure for Measure.

    Tools for Baking Cookies

    To make these cookies you will need:

    • A rimmed baking sheet or cookie sheet (I use rimmed ones).
    • Rolling pin.
    • Wax paper or parchment paper (I use parchment).
    • A hand mixer.
    • A sifter or fine sieve.
    • A medium sized, simple shaped metal cookie cutters (better than plastic).
    • Pastry brush.
    • Metal spatula (a pancake turner-type spatula).

    How to Make Sand Tarts

    Start by placing dry ingredients into a sifter or fine sieve and shake onto a piece of parchment paper or wax paper. This refines the flours.

    Next, cream butter and sugar together. Technically, creaming means to beat the sugar and butter together with a hand electric mixer or standing mixer until its light, fluffy, and pale yellow in color. It will have a sandy texture.

    Once the sugar and butter are creamed, slowly add a beaten egg and fine orange zest. Tool tip: use a microplane zester for fine orange zest.

    Add the flour mixture in gradually on low speed and mix until dough is smooth. Split the dough into two portions, flatten into disks, wrap well in plastic wrap and refrigerate for 2 hours or overnight. Chilling the dough helps to educe the spread of cookies made with all butter.

    When you want to bake, remove the dough from the refrigerator and allow it to stand for 1 hour before rolling it out. Heat the oven and get your tools ready while you are waiting. You want the dough soft but chilled to roll well.

    Follow the steps below to roll, cut, decorate and bake the cookies. 

    Rolling and cutting cookie dough.

    How to Roll Out Cookie Dough

    Rolled cookies or cut cookies are more work than a drop cookie, but worth it. My mom taught me to roll out cookie dough on a floured pastry cloth.

    Today, I roll the dough between sheets of wax paper or parchment paper. It's easier, less messy, and uses no extra flour (which can toughen cookies). And if the dough gets too warm and soft just put it back in the refrigerator to firm up for a few minutes.

    Colored Sugar Sprinkles

    Colored sugar for decorating cookies is called sanding sugar. Most sugars at the market are made with synthetic foods dyes, chemicals or artificial ingredients and often have preservatives. What else can you use? Naturally colored sprinkles.

    Naturally colored sugar sprinkles may not be as bright as colors of traditional decorative sugars, but they are a better choice (if available). These sugars use colorants from natural sources like fruits and vegetables.

    See what's available at your local market or find options online if you want to go with natural colors. Here's one source of naturally colored sugars with good colors. Find them on Amazon. I used the orange sugar for this batch but red and green are great for Christmas, blue for Hanukkah, or pink and red for Valentines Day cookies.

    A other option is using cinnamon sugar instead of, or along with, the colored sanding sugar.

    Cookie Success Tips

    • Butter must be at room temperature for proper creaming.
    • Thorough chilling of the dough is key to success with a rolled cookie.
    • To keep cookie cutters from sticking, dip the edges in a little flour then shake off the excess before cutting.
    • Cut the cookie close together to minimize waste, then form and re-roll leftover dough.
    • Brush the cut cookies on the baking sheet with beaten egg yolk (egg wash) to get the colored sugar sprinkles to stick.
    Cut out cookies on a baking sheet.

    Cookie Cutter Tips

    Anything with a fancy edge will lose some of its shape as the cookies spread while baking. Don't worry if that happens. Baking on parchment lessens the spread a bit. Simple stars and hearts work well, but I've done angels and other shapes like Christmas trees, rounds, candy canes and snowmen.

    Make Dough Ahead

    Make the cookie dough a day or two ahead as it keeps well wrapped in the refrigerator wrapped in plastic wrap. Allow the dough to stand at room temperature 1 hour before rolling. If the dough softens as you're cutting the cookies and it seems difficult, place the dough in the refrigerator or 10 minutes and they will cut more easily.

    Storing Cookie

    Cookies will keep in an airtight container on the counter for a week, but trust me they won't last that long. They are irresistible.

    A pile of sand tart cookies closeup with sugar sprinkles.

    History and Tradition

    My mom's heritage is from the Amish and Mennonite population of Lancaster County, PA. Our family favorite Christmas cookie recipe is adapted from the 1940's Woman's Home Companion Cookbook. My historic, tattered treasure holds the original recipe for the sand tart cookie.

    Gather up your kids, family, friends or neighbors and start a baking tradition of your own. Enjoy the joy of being together in the kitchen and creating memories that will last forever. Happy baking and Merry Christmas from my kitchen to yours!

    Baked sand tart cookies cooling on a rack and in a gift box.

    📖 Recipe

    Old Fashioned Sand Tart Cookies Recipe

    Sally Cameron
    Adapted from the 1940's Woman's Home Companion Cook Book, this cookie is our favorite family baking tradition at Christmas. It's thin, crisp and scented with lots of fresh orange zest. Make the dough a day or two ahead. The yield of cookies depends on the size of the cookie cutter used. Cookies keep on the counter in an airtight container for a week (but they won't last that long, trust me). Makes about 3 dozen cookies.
    5 from 1 vote
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 30 minutes mins
    Cook Time 30 minutes mins
    Chill time for dough 2 hours hrs
    Total Time 3 hours hrs
    Course Cookies
    Cuisine American
    Servings 18 Yield approximately 3 dozen
    Calories 133 kcal

    Equipment

    • Parchment or waxed paper
    • Fine sieve or sifter
    • Baking sheets
    • Hand mixer
    • Rolling pin
    • Pastry brush
    • Wire cooling rack
    • Metal spatula

    Ingredients
      

    Cookie Dough

    • 1 ¾ cup all purpose unbleached white flour
    • 1 teaspoon baking powder aluminum free
    • ½ cup unsalted butter at room temperature 1 stick
    • 1 cup sugar
    • 2-3 teaspoons fresh orange zest 1 large orange
    • 1 large egg well beaten
    • ½ teaspoon salt

    Cookie Topping

    • 1 large egg for egg wash
    • 1 tablespoon water for egg wash
    • colored sugar sprinkles to decorate

    Would you like to save this recipe?

    Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

    Instructions
     

    • Place a sheet of wax paper or parchment on a flat surface. Place a sifter or fine sieve in the center. Measure the flour and baking powder into the sifter and sift through.
    • In a medium bowl using a hand mixer, cream together the butter and sugar on medium speed until sandy and fluffy in texture. Slowly add the egg and orange zest and blend in. Add in the flour and blend on lowest speed (or mix by hand) until dough is smooth. The dough will be stiff at first, then soften.
      Split the dough into two portions. Form each piece into a flattened disk shape. Wrap dough disks well and refrigerate about 2 hours or overnight. 
      When ready to bake, remove dough from the refrigerator and allow to stand about 30-60 minutes at room temperature. You want the dough to be soft enough to roll but still chilled.
    • Pre-heat the oven to 325°F. To roll out your cookies, place each dough disk between two sheets of wax paper or parchment, then roll with a rolling pin until about ⅛″ thick. Start in the center and roll out to the edges in all directions. Place the rolled dough in the paper back in the refrigerator for 10 minutes. Remove from the refrigerator and cut out shapes with cookie cutters. Place the cookies on a baking sheet lined with parchment. You can bake cookies directly on a sprayed and wiped cookie sheet. They may spread a bit more.
    • Whisk together the extra egg with 1 tablespoon of water to make an egg wash. This makes your decorations stick. Using a pastry brush, brush the cookies lightly with egg wash and sprinkle with sugars. Bake at 325 degrees approximately 8-10 minutes or until lightly golden brown at the edges. Timing will depend on your ovens. Allow cookies to cool for a minute then remove with a metal spatula to a cooling rack. Cool completely and place in an airtight container.

    Notes

    Adapted from the 1940's Women's Home Companion Cookbook, of which I still have my mom's tattered copy. It's a treasure!
    For naturally color sugar sprinkles, check out this Amazon link for lots of nice colors. 

    Nutrition

    Serving: 2cookiesCalories: 133kcalCarbohydrates: 20gProtein: 2gFat: 6gSaturated Fat: 3gPolyunsaturated Fat: 0.4gMonounsaturated Fat: 2gTrans Fat: 0.2gCholesterol: 34mgSodium: 32mgPotassium: 39mgFiber: 1gSugar: 11gVitamin A: 189IUVitamin C: 0.5mgCalcium: 21mgIron: 1mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    Sour Cream Pork Chops Recipe

    10/14/2022 by Sally Cameron 6 Comments

    Close up of creamy pork chops with sauce.

    No more dry as cardboard pork chops with this sour cream pork chops recipe for juicy, tender chops. For a flavorful dinner tonight, make chops that the whole family will enjoy. It might just become your next family favorite. The sauce is smooth and creamy with caramelized onions, garlic and herbs and the secret ingredient switch? Using French-style sour cream called creme fraiche instead of sour cream. Read on to find out why.

    Sour crem pork chops in cast iron skillet.

    Why use creme fraiche instead of sour cream? Because of the higher fat content. Creme fraiche has twice the fat of traditional sour cream. Unlike sour cream, it won't curdle in sauces or soups and brings richness to simple recipes. Look for it near the sour cream in the refrigerated dairy section. It makes a terrific sour cream sauce or gravy.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why You'll Love Sour Cream Pork Chops

    • The rich and creamy sauce.
    • Great dinner recipe.
    • Made with easy to find boneless pork chops.
    • Make it in 30 minutes for a fast dinner.

    Ingredients You'll Need

    sour cream pork chops ingredients with labels.
    • Boneless pork chops: Many people don't like dealing with bones, so I went with a boneless cut of pork chops for this recipe. Bones generally give flavor and moisture to meat, but you'll find with the cooking method of this recipe (called braising), you get the best pork chops that are moist not dry.
    • Onion: Brown, yellow, or sweet all caramelize well adding great flavor. Don't use red onion because of the color; you will have pink sauce!
    • Thyme leaves: I prefer fresh but dry works too if fresh is not available. Use ⅓ of the amount of fresh is the rule.
    • Fats: Use both extra virgin olive oil and unsalted butter for the best flavor. Always buy unsalted butter so you control the salt in the dish.
    • Broth: Low sodium chicken broth or beef broth. Check the freezer section at the store for good options versus canned or boxed and read labels for salt and ingredients.
    • Wine: Dry white wine is my go-to but a little dry sherry is nice too. Don't buy a big bottle to cook with; get the airline sized bottles. Works great!
    • Dairy: Creme fraiche (French-style sour cream) gives you a smooth, rich sauce. Do not sub regular sour cream as it will curdle. Creme fraiche has double the fat content.
    • Mustard: Dijon mustard give the best flavor. If you like it spicy, try a spicy mustard.

    See recipe card for all ingredients and quantities, salt and black pepper.

    If you enjoy pork, try this roast pork tenderloin with a creamy Dijon mustard sauce.

    Chef's tip: Buying pork chops. Buy boneless pork chops that are 1-inch to 1 ½-inch thick. If they are super thick (2-inches or more) slice them in half yourself or have the butcher do it for you. You can cook the really thick chops, it will just take a little longer, and for most appetites, a 6-8 ounce chop is plenty.

    Substitutions and Variations

    If you'd like to change this up a bit, here are a few variations:

    • Herbs - Instead of thyme, try fresh oregano, marjoram, parsley or sage. Herbs differ in the strength of taste so maybe start with a bit less and taste, then add more if desired.
    • Sherry - Swap dry sherry for the dry white wine (or do half and half)
    • Mushrooms - Add a few thinly sliced mushrooms to the sauce before adding the chops.
    • Brining recipe - If you want to brine your pork chops for extra mpisture and flavor, use my pork brine recipe.

    How to Make Sour Cream Pork Chops

    Get the pork chops out of the refrigerator 45-60 minutes ahead to get the chill off for best results. Please see the recipe card for complete details.

    Seasoned boneless pork chops.
    Step 1: Season chops.
    Browned pork chops in cast iron.
    Step 2: Brown in the pan on one side only, then remove to a plate or rimmed baking sheet.
    Sliced onions cooking in a cast iron pan.
    Step 3: Add butter to the pan and start cooking the onions.
    Caramelized onions in black pan.
    Step 4: Cook onions until caramelized and golden, then add the garlic and cook 1 minute more.
    Golden brown caramelized onions in a black skillet deglazing with wine.
    Step 5: Add the wine and cook until it's almost gone (deglazing the pan).
    Sauce ingredients being whisked together in a pyrex glass measuring cup.
    Step 6: Whisk broth, creme fraiche, thyme, and mustard together.
    Creamy sauce mixture pouring into a pan of caramelized onions to make a sauce.
    Step 7: Pour the sauce mixture into the onions .
    A sour cream onion sauce cooking down on the stovetop in a cast iron pan.
    Step 8: Simmer about 5 minutes until reduced.
    Boneless pork chops in a black skillet on top of sauce to be cooked down.
    Step 9: Add the pork chops back to the pan.
    Pork chops under a glass lid to finish cooking on the stovetop.
    Step 10: Put a lid on the pan, turn heat down a bit, and cook for 5-8 minutes until chops reach 140°F-145°F. Ready to serve.

    To Thicken the Sauce

    The sauce is very juicy. If you want to thicken it into more of a gravy, add 1 tablespoon of cornstarch to 2 tablespoons of water and stir until smooth in a small bowl (called a slurry). Remove the chops to a plate and keep warm. Stir the slurry into the hot sauce and cook for 1 minute to thicken and remove any raw taste from the cornstarch. It's ready to serve when it's thickened.

    Tips for Pork Chop Success

    • Cook time will depend on the thickness of the pork chops. Thin one cooks faster, a thicker cut pork chop will take a little longer.
    • When you slice the onions, it looks like a crazy amount of onions; they cook down as they release moisture.
    • Some recipes use bouillon cubes. All I can say is don't. Use real chicken broth. Those cubes (and jarred pastes) are super high in sodium and filled with unhealthy ingredients.

    Other Ways to Use Creme Fraiche

    • Garnish soup or chili
    • Sweeten with honey and use over berries for dessert
    • Stir into soups for a creamy richness (like tomato soup)
    • Make a decadent hot fudge sauce
    • Dollop next to dessert like an apple cake or pumpkin tart.
    Close up of creamy pork chops with sauce.

    Serving Suggestions

    Sour cream pork chops work well with a simple side vegetable like 5 minute green beans or easy broccolini. And to go with that terrific sauce, mashed potatoes are hard to beat! Also delicious are fluffy white rice, egg noodles, or brown rice pasta (like farfalle) for gluten-free work well too.

    Store any leftovers in an airtight container for 3-4 days. Be sure to label and date.

    How to Reheat

    Leftovers reheat well. Use your oven. Place the chops in a small glass dish and add the leftover sauce. If no sauce, add a little broth, 1-2 tablespoons. Cover tightly with foil and heat for about 30 minutes.

    Recipe FAQs

    Why are my pork chops always tough and dry?

    Pork chops are lean protein, so it's easy to over-cook them. Watch your timing as they cook pretty quickly. The sauce in this recipe keeps them moist and flavorful. Thin chops cook faster than thick ones. Test with a digital thermometer. The perfect temperature is (140°F-145°F).

    Can pork chops be a little pink in the middle?

    A little pink is ok. Rather than guess whether they are properly cooked, use a digital thermometer and cook until they reach 145°F (the safe temperature).

    Should you rinse pork chops before cooking?

    No. Do not wash any kind of meat before cooking. Washing raw poultry, beef, pork, lamb or veal before cooking just spreads and bacteria to other surfaces. Cooking to the proper temperature makes them safe.

    Recipes for Super Side Dishes

    What to add to this delectable dinner? Try one of these side dish options.

    • roasted broccoli
      Roasted Broccoli with Parmesan and Lemon
    • White bowl of golden browned air fryer red potatoes with rosemary.
      Air Fryer Red Potatoes (or oven roasted)
    • A bowl of bright green beans almondine with toasted buttered almonds.
      Fresh Green Beans Almondine Recipe
    • cauliflower puree
      Creamy Cauliflower Puree with Fresh Herbs

    ⭐️Did You Make This?

    If you make this pork chop recipe, please comment and let me know,. If you loved it, please give it a 5 star rating! They really help other readers and I enjoy hearing from you.

    📖 Recipe

    Sour crem pork chops in cast iron skillet.

    Sour Cream Pork Chops

    Sally Cameron
    Rich and creamy, these tender pork chops are made with French-style creme fraiche instead of sour cream. Don't use regular sour cream as it will curdle the sauce. For best results, get chops out of the refrigerator 45-60 minutes before cooking.
    4.34 from 3 votes
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 5 minutes mins
    Cook Time 25 minutes mins
    Total Time 30 minutes mins
    Course Dinner, Entree, Main Course
    Cuisine American
    Servings 4
    Calories 390 kcal

    Equipment

    • 10" cast iron skillet or similar heavy pan
    • Lid for the pan I like glass lids to see in

    Ingredients
      

    • 1 large onion brown, yellow, or sweet
    • 2 garlic cloves
    • 1 tablespoon fresh thyme leaves or 1 teaspoon dry
    • ¾ teaspoon sea salt or kosher salt
    • ¼ teaspoon ground black pepper
    • 1 tablespoon extra virgin olive oil
    • 2 pounds boneless pork chops 4 chops about 1" to 1 ½" thick each
    • 1 tablespoon unsalted butter
    • 1 cup low sodium chicken broth
    • ⅓ cup dry white wine or dry sherry, or dry white vermouth
    • ¼ cup creme fraiche French-style sour cream
    • 1 tablespoon creamy style Dijon mustard

    For optional thickening

    • 1 tablespoon cornstarch
    • 2 tablespoons water

    Would you like to save this recipe?

    Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

    Instructions
     

    Prep work

    • Slice the top end of the onion off and set it flat on your cutting board. Slice the onion in half through the root. Peel the onion, then lay the onion halves flat and sliced into ¼-inch thick slices (half rounds). Place in a small bowl.
    • Peel and chop the garlic cloves fine, and chop the fresh thyme leaves.

    Brown the Pork Chops

    • Heat a cast iron skillet over medium heat. Season pork chops on both sides with salt and black pepper. When the pan is hot, add the olive oil to the pan, then add the pork chops. Sear until that side of the chop is a golden brown, 3-4 minutes. Remove the chops to a plate or small rimmed baking sheet and keep warm. Pour any pan juices over the chops to save.

    Caramelize the Onions

    • Add the butter to the hot pan, then add the sliced onions. Cook the onions until golden brown, stirring occasionally with a wooden spoon or wooden spatula, about 10 minutes. Next, add the garlic and cook 1 minute, stirring. Add the wine and cook down until almost gone (called deglazing).

    Make the Sauce

    • Whisk together the broth, creme fraiche, thyme, and Dijon until smooth, then pour over the onions in the pan. Simmer the onions and sauce over medium to medium low heat for 5 minutes, then add the pork chops back in with any juices.

    Finish the Pork Chops

    • Place a lid on the skillet and simmer the chops on medium-low heat until they reach 140°F-145°F measured with a digital thermometer, 5-8 minutes. Timing depends on the thickness of the pork chops. When done, the sauce should be thickened and the chops tender. Measure the chops temperature early versus late and don't overcook.

    Serving

    • Serve 1 chop per person with sauce and onions spooned over the top.
      If you want a thicker sauce, remove the chops from the pan and keep warm. Add 1 tablespoons of cornstarch to 2 tablespoons of cold water and stir smooth in a small bowl, then add to the bubbling sauce in the pan. Stir and cook for 1 minutes. You should feel the sauce thicken. It's ready to serve.

    Storage

    • Leftovers keep for 3-4 days in an airtight container. To reheat, leave the container on the counter for up to an hour, then heat in a shallow pan with the sauce covered with a lid until heated through or in a 350°F oven in a shallow casserole, covered with foil or a lid.

    Notes

    I developed this recipe for 1-inch to 1 ½-inch thick boneless pork chops. If yours are thicker, say 2-inches, they will take a couple of minutes longer. Take them to 145°F as measured with a digital thermometer. 
    Do not try to substitute regular sour cream for creme fraiche. It will curdle the sauce because it is lower in fat. Serve with green beans or broccoli and mashed potatoes or rice.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 390kcalCarbohydrates: 6gProtein: 39gFat: 21gSaturated Fat: 8gPolyunsaturated Fat: 2gMonounsaturated Fat: 9gTrans Fat: 0.2gCholesterol: 121mgSodium: 595mgPotassium: 774mgFiber: 1gSugar: 2gVitamin A: 182IUVitamin C: 6mgCalcium: 36mgIron: 2mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    Creamy Mango Sauce

    07/19/2014 by Sally Cameron 7 Comments

    Citrus mango sauce

    This brightly flavored citrusy mango sauce is a smooth, golden blend that adds fresh tropical flavor to grilled chicken, fish, shrimp, and salads. Made with ripe mango, a medley of citrus juices, a little shallot, and just a touch of honey, it's tangy, lightly sweet, and perfectly balanced. Blended until velvety and pourable, this versatile sauce is an easy way to elevate simple summer meals.

    Citrus mango sauce

    The inspiration for this recipe came from a lobster salad we enjoyed at the Montage in Laguna Beach, CA. The restaurant was nice enough to tell me what was in it so I took notes and came up with my own recipe. Hope you enjoy it. Its a terrific, refreshing summer sauce.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why You'll Love This Recipe

    • It's really versatile as both a sauce and a dressing.
    • It's light and bright citrusy mango flavor are terrific.
    • Mango sauce lasts 5 days in the refrigerator.
    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Mango Sauce Ingredients

    • Oil: Extra virgin olive oil or avocado oil.
    • Mango: Either fresh or frozen.
    • Citrus: Pink grapefruit, lemon, orange, and lime for their juices.
    • Shallot: A little more mild and sweet than onion.
    • Sweetener: A little honey balances the citrus, or use the zero-sugar honey.

    Please see the recipe card for measurements, salt, and pepper.

    Mango sauce is delicious served with this grilled prosciutto or bacon wrapped scallops.

    Substitutions and Variations

    • No mango? Try ripe peaches or pineapple for a similar tropical flavor.
    • Citrus mix: Swap in your favorite combination-lime and orange for something sweeter, or grapefruit and lemon for more tang.
    • Sweetener: Use maple syrup or a sugar-free liquid sweetener in place of honey if preferred.
    • Add a kick: For a spicy variation, blend in a small piece of jalapeño, a pinch of crushed red pepper, or add some of your favorite hot sauce!
    • Make it creamy: Add a spoonful of coconut cream or Greek yogurt for a thicker, richer finish.

    Recipe Directions

    It's so easy to make. Just dump everything for the mango sauce into the blender and puree! Creamy citrus mango sauce lasts for five days in the fridge so extra does not go to waste.

    Grilled scallops wrapped with prosciutto and mango sauce.

    Servings Suggestions for Mango Sauce

    • As a salad dressing over fresh salad greens.
    • With grilled or roasted fish.
    • Grilled or seared scallops (photo above).
    • Grilled or broiled shrimp.
    • Drizzled over vegetables like green beans or broccoli.
    • To jazz up simple boneless, skinless chicken breasts.

    Other Mango Recipes

    Did you know mango is the most widely consumed fruit in the world? With its natural sweetness and versatility, it's no wonder it stars in everything from sauces to smoothies.

    • A bright yellow mango pineapple smoothie in a glass with lime and fruit wedge.
      Tropical Mango Pineapple Smoothie
    • Bowl of bright tropical colored pineapple mango salsa.
      Fresh Pineapple Mango Salsa Recipe
    • Tropical Mango Green Smoothie
      Green Smoothie Recipe with Mango

    Did You Make This Recipe?

    If you make this mango sauce, please add your comment. I appreciate your feedback and enjoy hearing from you. If you loved it, please give it a 5-star rating! They really help other readers.

    📖 Recipe

    Citrus mango sauce

    Mango Sauce

    Sally Cameron
    Creamy and light, this dressing or sauce can be used with salad as a dressing to over grilled fish, chicken breast, scallops, or shrimp. It's great over an open face avocado and tomato sandwich too. Puree in a blender and taste, then adjust to your preference.
    4.67 from 3 votes
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 5 minutes mins
    Total Time 5 minutes mins
    Course condiment
    Cuisine American
    Servings 4 servings
    Calories 112 kcal

    Ingredients
      

    • 3 tablespoons avocado oil or other light neutral oil
    • 2-3 tablespoons finely chopped mango cubes
    • 2 tablespoons pink grapefruit juice
    • 1 tablespoon lemon juice
    • 1 tablespoon orange juice
    • 1 tablespoon lime juice
    • 1 tablespoon finely chopped shallot
    • 1-2 teaspoons honey
    • Sprinkles of salt and white pepper

    Would you like to save this recipe?

    Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

    Instructions
     

    • Place all ingredients in a blender and puree until light, fluffy and smooth.
    • Taste and make any adjustments for your preference. Keep chilled until serving.

    Notes

    Try this sauce with:
    • Salad greens
    • Lobster salad
    • Grilled or roasted fish
    • Grilled or seared scallops
    • Grilled or broiled shrimp
    • Drizzled over vegetables like green beans or broccoli
    • To jazz up simple boneless, skinless chicken breasts

    Nutrition

    Calories: 112kcalCarbohydrates: 5gProtein: 0.2gFat: 11gSaturated Fat: 1gPolyunsaturated Fat: 1gMonounsaturated Fat: 7gSodium: 1mgPotassium: 51mgFiber: 0.2gSugar: 4gVitamin A: 91IUVitamin C: 10mgCalcium: 4mgIron: 0.1mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    Pomegranate and Spinach Salad

    12/18/2017 by Sally Cameron 3 Comments

    spinach salad with pomegranate

    Love spinach salads? Try this twist on the classic strawberry spinach salad by swapping in juicy pomegranate seeds for a vibrant, seasonal touch. This pomegranate and spinach salad is perfect for fall when pomegranates are at their peak. It has everything-ruby-red seeds, tender baby spinach, crunchy walnuts, hard-boiled egg, creamy goat cheese, slivered red onion, and crisp bacon. To bring it all together, a homemade pomegranate vinaigrette adds the perfect balance of tangy and sweet.

    A white bowl of spinach leaves, red onion, hard boiled eggs, crisp bacon crumbles and pomegranate seeds.

    While many spinach salads are dressed with a warm bacon dressing, this version takes a fresher approach with an easy pomegranate vinaigrette. It's light, tangy, and lets the vibrant flavors shine. Plus, from a health standpoint, this salad is packed with nutrients while still tasting absolutely delicious. And for all the bacon lovers out there-don't worry! I've kept the crispy crumbles for added crunch, but you can always skip them if you prefer

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why You'll Like This Recipe

    • It's easy, healthy, and colorful.
    • A nice trade off from a standard salad.
    • Make the elements ahead of time and toss to serve.

    With any extra baby spinach, use it in smoothies like this blueberry spinach or this refreshing cucumber and spinach smoothie.

    Recipe Ingredients

    Pomegranate and Spinach salad

    • Baby spinach leaves: Grab a container of the baby spinach leaves to save time.
    • Cheese: Goat cheese is lovely with a soft tang, either a log you can crumble yourself or the crumbled container.
    • Nuts: I went with walnuts for this salad for their rich flavor.
    • Pomegranate seeds: Add so much beautiful color and a tart tanginess. Buying a whole pomegranate and seeding it yourself is easy and the seeds are fresher and last longer. If you prefer, buy a container of pomegranate seeds (called arils).
    • Bacon: Adds a nice, salty crunch. Use either pork bacon or turkey bacon.
    • Eggs: Hard boiled eggs take 15 minutes plus a chill in ice water. Read here on how to make perfect hard boiled eggs.
    • Onion: Red onion adds color and a little bite. Use shallot if you prefer.

    Pomegranate Vinaigrette

    • Oil: Use extra virgin olive oil or avocado oil for a nice vinaigrette.
    • Vinegar: Pomegranate vinegar is a fun flavored vinegar to have in your pantry. Find it at Traders Joes and online.
    • Maple syrup: For just a touch of sweetness and helps bring the vinaigrette together.
    • Mustard: Creamy Dijon must is best in vinaigrettes and helps emulsify the dressing.

    Please see the recipe card for measurements, salt and pepper.

    Substitution and Variations

    • Other fruit vinegar options include red wine vinegar, cranberry vinegar, raspberry vinegar, or cherry vinegar.
    • Try other nuts such as pecan, pine nuts, or sliced almonds. Toasted pepitas are delicious too. For how to toast pepitas see this post.
    • For nut allergies, omit or use sunflower seeds or pumpkins seeds (pepitas).
    • Don't like goat cheese? Try blue cheese crumbles or tangy Greek feta cheese.
    • For vegetarians, skip the bacon.
    • If you're an avocado lover, diced avocado is a great addition with it's creamy rich texture and flavor.

    For a great comfort food meal, try these stuffed pasta shells with spinach and ricotta.

    Chef's tip: Intimidated by opening a pomegranate? It really is easy, and once you do it you might prefer doing it yourself as the seeds are fresher and last a lot longer in the refrigerator than buying a container. For instructions on how to open a pomegranate see this post. Be sure to wear an apron!

    Recipe Instructions

    All of the components of this baby spinach salad are easily made ahead of time and assembled at serving time.

    • Step 1: Get the bacon frying, either in a pan or the oven. When cool, chop or crumble.
    • Step 2: Hard boil your eggs.
    • Step 3: Seed the pomegranate if using a fresh one.
    • Step 4: Slice your onion or shallot.
    • Step 5: Crumble the cheese (if using) and chop the nuts if needed.
    • Step 6: Make the vinaigrette.

    Chef's tip: Cooking bacon in the oven. If you want a hands off way to cook bacon and not mess up your stovetop, try baking it in the oven. Line a rimmed baking sheet with foil, top with a wire cooking rack, and top with raw bacon strips. Bake at 350°F for 15 minutes on each side, or until golden and crisp. Cool and crumble.

    A serving bowl of a baby spinach salad, small plates in the background, and a glass pitcher of dressing.

    How to Make a Basic Vinaigrette

    The general rule for making vinaigrettes is one part of acid (vinegar) to three parts of fat (oil). My first choice is a good extra virgin olive oil, but other oils works such as avocado oil. I love to use flavored olive oils to keep things interesting. Depending on the flavor you want to achieve there are many options.

    Basic vinegars for vinaigrette include red wine vinegar, champagne vinegar, and apple cider vinegar, but again there are many fun options. You can also use citrus juice such as lemon, orange, and lime. A little Dijon mustard emulsifies the vinaigrette (holds it together).

    Taste the vinaigrette and adjust for yourself. I added a little more vinegar for more tang. A little salt and pepper and you are good to go.

    colorful spinach salad with pomegranate.

    Serving Suggestions

    Keep all elements in the refrigerator in an airtight container until serving time, then toss with a little dressing and serve more at the table if desired.

    Without dressing, this salad holds pretty well overnight. If you think you won't use all of the salad, don't toss the baby spinach salad with dressing but serve it at the table for each person to drizzle on.

    This is a great side salad but if you want to add protein, try a little sliced grilled chicken or steak.

    Dietary Notes

    For most people, spinach is a great add to your diet, but it is high in natural compounds called oxalates.  If you suffer with kidney or gallbladder issues, check with your healthcare provider before consuming spinach. It's also high risk for people with histamine intolerance.

    Recipe FAQs

    What are some variations of baby spinach salad?

    To change up a baby spinach salad, vary the fruits using strawberries in summer or pears and apples in fall. Add grains such as cooked quinoa. For summer, add what in season such as cucumber, bell peppers. In fall roast beets are a great addition. Change m up the cheese, nuts, and try a vinaigrette dressing instead of the standard warm bacon dressing.

    How do I make a simple baby spinach salad?

    For a simple baby spinach salad, limit the elements you are adding to 1 or 2, such as a fruit and nuts, or cheese and nuts. Use what is best seasonally. Dress with a simple vinaigrette dressing versus a more time-consuming warm spinach dressing. A good dressing makes even a simple salad terrific.

    What dressings pair well with baby spinach?

    While tradition might be a warm bacon dressing, many other dressing pair well with a baby spinach salad. Try a balsamic vinaigrette or a honey mustard dressing. Try a vinegar made with a fruit flavored oil and vinegar. Just be sure the dressing compliments the other elements of the salad.

    More Terrific Salad Recipes

    Boost your salad creativity with these salad recipe ideas. Banish boring salads all year long and make them something to look forward to for your family. One more great use for baby spinach, try this versatile ricotta filling made with spinach.

    • Tomato and cucumber salad, with red onion, feta, and garbanzo beans with greek dressing.
      Cucumber Tomato and Feta Salad (Greek Salad)
    • Fennel orange salad with avocado, pomegranate seeds, and orange slices on a plate.
      Fennel Orange Salad with Orange Vinaigrette
    • leafy green and berry salad
      Strawberry Goat Cheese Salad
    • Color Hawaiian salad with tomatoes, avocado, pineapple, beets. macadamia nuts and more in a bowl with utensils.
      Hawaiian Salad With Goat Cheese

    ⭐️Did You Make This Recipe?

    If you make this pomegranate and spinach salad, please comment and let me know, and if you loved it, please give it a 5 star rating! They really help other reader and I appreciate hearing from you.

    📖 Recipe

    pomegranate spinach salad | AFoodCentricLife.com

    Pomegranate and Spinach Salad

    Sally Cameron
    Crisp greens, crunchy bacon and walnuts, egg, red onions, and pomegranate seeds. An almost classic spinach salad with a few delicious twists, including a pomegranate vinaigrette.
    5 from 2 votes
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 20 minutes mins
    Cook Time 0 minutes mins
    Total Time 20 minutes mins
    Course Salad
    Cuisine American
    Servings 4
    Calories 307 kcal

    Ingredients
      

    Pomegranate Vinaigrette

    • 2 tablespoons extra virgin olive oil
    • 2-3 teaspoons pomegranate vinegar see swaps below
    • 1 teaspoon real maple syrup
    • ½ teaspoon Dijon mustard
    • 2 pinches sea salt
    • 2 pinches ground black pepper

    Spinach Salad

    • 6-8 ounces clean baby spinach leaves
    • 4 ounces goat cheese crumbles or try blue cheese or feta
    • ⅓ cup chopped walnut pieces about 2 ounces
    • ⅓ cup pomegranate seeds
    • 4-6 strips bacon, turkey or pork cooked crisp, crumbled
    • 2 hard boiled eggs peeled and chopped
    • ¼ small red onion sliced thin, or sub shallot

    Would you like to save this recipe?

    Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

    Instructions
     

    • Start by making the vinaigrette. Add the oil, vinegar, maple syrup, mustard, salt and pepper to a small bowl and whisk until smooth. 
    • Add spinach leaves to a large bowl and toss with the dressing. Scatter the cheese, walnuts, seeds, bacon, egg and onion over the top and toss again and serve family style or on four individual plates. 

    Notes

    Substitutions and variations: 
    • Try pecans, pine nuts, or sliced almonds. Toasted pepitas are delicious too. For how to toast pepitas see this post.
    • For nut allergies, omit or use sunflower seeds or pumpkins seeds (pepitas).
    • Don't like goat cheese? Try blue cheese crumbles or tangy Greek feta cheese.
    • For vegetarians, skip the bacon.
    • If you're an avocado lover, diced avocado is a great addition with it's creamy rich texture and flavor.
    • Use red wine vinegar, cherry vinegar, or a cranberry vinegar.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 307kcalCarbohydrates: 8gProtein: 14gFat: 25gSaturated Fat: 8gPolyunsaturated Fat: 6gMonounsaturated Fat: 10gTrans Fat: 0.01gCholesterol: 114mgSodium: 505mgPotassium: 414mgFiber: 2gSugar: 4gVitamin A: 4419IUVitamin C: 14mgCalcium: 113mgIron: 3mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    One-Pan Mediterranean Chicken Thighs

    11/06/2015 by Sally Cameron 7 Comments

    Mediterranean chicken thighs

    Need a fresh idea for chicken dinner? Try these Mediterranean chicken thighs-a one-pan meal bursting with sunny Mediterranean flavors. Last night, I picked up chicken thighs with no plan, and this delicious dish came together with tomatoes, thyme, olives, and veggies. The sauce is rich, flavorful, and perfect on its own or served over pasta. Easy and packed with flavor-this is a must-add to your chicken recipe collection.

    Mediterranean Chicken | AFoodCentricLife.com

    Quick recipes are a lifesaver for busy cooks, and these Mediterranean chicken thighs come together in about 30 minutes. Make them fresh for a fast, flavorful dinner or prep them on Sunday for easy reheating during the week-they'll keep well for up to 4 days in the fridge. Leftovers? They make a fantastic lunch, and the juicy vegetables and rich sauce only get better with time.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why You'll Like This Recipe

    • Takes about 30 minutes.
    • Make it ahead and reheat during the week if desired.
    • Tasty sauce with lots of veggies.

    Recipe Ingredients

    • Chicken: Bone-in chicken thighs.
    • Onion: Yellow, brown, or white onion.
    • Celery: Supports flavor.
    • Carrots: For flavor and sweetness.
    • Wine: Use white wine such as a Chardonnay or a Sauvignon Blanc.
    • Oil: Olive oil or avocado oil.
    • Broth: Low sodium or homemade chicken broth.
    • Tomatoes: Canned diced tomatoes work fine, petite diced if you can find them.
    • Olives: Pitted Kalamata olives.
    • Garlic: For flavor, fresh is best.
    • Herbs: Either fresh thyme or dried thyme, or use an dried Italian blend, and a bay leaf.
    • Saffron: Adds beautiful color and flavor, optional (as it is expensive).

    Please see the recipe card for measurement, salt, and pepper.

    Substitutions and Variations

    • Substitute bone-in chicken breasts for thighs, cutting them in half crosswise.
    • If you don't cook with wine, use chicken broth.

    Recipe Instructions

    Chicken Thighs|AFoodCentricLife.com

    Step 1: Place chicken thighs top down on a cutting board and trim any extra fat and skin. Season with salt and pepper.

    Mediterranean Chicken | AFoodCentricLife.com

    Step 2: Brown the chicken thighs in oil in a medium dutch oven or other large heavy pot until golden brown.

    Step 3: Add the veggies, broth, cover and finish cooking in 15-18 minutes. Cook until the thighs read 165°F with a digital kitchen thermometer.

    Mediterranean Chicken | AFoodCentricLife.com

    Serving Suggestions

    Serve mediterranean chicken thighs alone in a shallow bowl as there is lots of veggies and broth. Or you can serve with a little brown rice, pasta (brown rice pasta for gluten-free) or zucchini noodles for low carb. Riced mashed potatoes work well too.

    Storage and Reheating

    If you have leftovers, save extra chicken and the juices and vegetables in an airtight container for up to four days. Reheat gently on the stovetop covered with a lid to maintain moisture. Reheating in the oven works as well, at 350°F until heated through to 165°F.

    Recipe FAQs

    Can I use boneless, skinless chicken thighs instead of bone-in?

    Yes, you can use boneless, skinless chicken thighs instead of bone-in chicken thighs. The cooking time will be reduced. Before you do, remember that the bone adds flavor and moisture, but do what works best.

    What are suitable substitutes for Kalamata olives?

    If you can't get the blackish-purple Kalamata olives, try the green Castelvetrano olives and be sure they are pitted.

    Can I use chicken breasts instead of thighs?

    Yes, chicken breasts work really well. Use bone-in chicken breasts and cut them in half crosswise before cooking. You can also use boneless chicken breasts.

    More Chicken Recipe

    Can you ever have too many chicken recipes? I don't think so. Try some of these to add to your recipe file. And be sure to checkout the chicken recipe index for more inspriation!

    • Platter of grilled chicken breasts with herbs.
      Easy Blender Lemon Chicken Marinade
    • A platter of sliced glazed teriyaki chicken with broccoli, carrots and zucchini.
      Baked Teriyaki Chicken Thighs
    • Golden baked chicken breasts on the dinner table.
      Roast Split Chicken Breast
    • A gray platter of sals verde chicken breasts with tomatillo sauce, grated cheese and chopped cilantro.
      Easy Salsa Verde Chicken (green salsa chicken)

    Did You Make This Recipe?

    If you make these Mediterranean chicken thighs, please add your comment. I appreciate your feedback and enjoy hearing from you. If you loved it, please give it a 5-star rating! They really help other readers.

    📖 Recipe

    Mediterranean chicken thighs

    Mediterranean Chicken Thighs

    Sally Cameron
    Mediterranean Chicken. Fresh flavors with economical chicken thighs. An easy dinner plus leftovers make a nice lunch. Serve in a shallow bowl with the broth and veggies or over brown rice pasta (GF), or zucchini noodles.
    5 from 1 vote
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 10 minutes mins
    Cook Time 20 minutes mins
    Total Time 30 minutes mins
    Course Dinner, Main Course
    Cuisine Mediterranean
    Servings 4
    Calories 660 kcal

    Ingredients
      

    • 2 ½-3 pounds bone-in chicken thighs or 3-4 bone-in chicken breasts, 3 pounds
    • ½ teaspoon sea salt
    • ½ teaspoon black pepper
    • 1 tablespoon olive oil
    • 1 cup finely chopped onion 1 small
    • ¾ cup finely chopped celery 2 large ribs
    • ¾ cup finely chopped carrots 2 large
    • 2-3 garlic cloves finely chopped
    • ½ cup dry white wine substitute chicken broth
    • 1 cup chicken broth low sodium or homemade
    • 1 cup canned diced tomatoes
    • 16 pitted Kalamata olives
    • 1 teaspoon dried thyme or 1 tablespoon chopped fresh
    • 1-2 pinches saffron threads optional
    • 1 bay leaf

    Would you like to save this recipe?

    Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

    Instructions
     

    • Trim chicken thighs of excess fat or skin. Sprinkle with salt, pepper and granulated garlic. Heat olive oil in a medium Dutch oven (5 ½ quart) or other heavy wide pan over medium low heat. When oil is hot (but not smoking), place seasoned chicken skin side down in a single layer in the pot. The chicken should sizzle when it hits the heat. Cook chicken until it is golden brown, 5-7 minutes. Remove chicken to a plate and keep warm. Turn the heat down to medium low. Drain off excess fat with a spoon but leave a little.
    • To the pot add chopped onion, celery and carrots. Cook, stirring occasionally, until the vegetables are soft, about 5 minutes. Add the garlic and cook 1 minute. Add the wine (or sub broth) and cook until it is reduced by half. Add the broth, tomatoes, olives, thyme, saffron and bay leaf. Add the chicken back into the pot, nestling it into the vegetables. Cover the pot and cook until the chicken reaches 165°F, 15-18 minutes. Serve chicken thighs in 4 shallow bowls covered with the vegetables and juices.

    Notes

    Leftovers will keep 4 days tightly covered and refrigerated. Re-heat in a covered pan over low heat until hot, about 20 minutes depending on how cold they are out of the refrigerator.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 660kcalCarbohydrates: 13gProtein: 42gFat: 47gSaturated Fat: 12gPolyunsaturated Fat: 9gMonounsaturated Fat: 21gTrans Fat: 0.2gCholesterol: 236mgSodium: 865mgPotassium: 888mgFiber: 3gSugar: 5gVitamin A: 4430IUVitamin C: 11mgCalcium: 85mgIron: 3mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    Creamy Chicken with Gravy

    02/22/2016 by Sally Cameron 11 Comments

    Chicken with gravy-it's the kind of meal that brings back memories of family dinners at Grandma's, complete with mouthwatering, creamy gravy. But if you're gluten-free, dairy-free, or grain-free, you might think those rich, comforting flavors are off the table. Not anymore! This chicken with plant-based gravy is creamy, satisfying, and downright delicious. The secret? Cashew butter adds a luscious texture and rich flavor that will have everyone at the table asking for seconds.

    Braised chicken breasts on a platter with gravy boat of cashew sauce.

    This chicken with gravy recipe features a creamy, dreamy gravy made with cashew butter! It's a classic comfort food reimagined-completely gluten-free, grain-free, and dairy-free. While it might sound unconventional, it absolutely works, delivering all the rich, satisfying flavors you love without the traditional ingredients

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why You'll Like This Recipe

    • Gluten-free and dairy-free gravy.
    • A classic creamy gravy that tastes great.
    • Another delicious chicken recipe to add to your recipe file.
    Braised Chicken with gravy in a wide shallow pan.

    Recipe Ingredients

    • Chicken: Bone-in-skin-on chicken breasts.
    • Oil: Extra virgin olive oil.
    • Broth: Chicken broth.
    • Almond milk: Be sure to buy unsweetened.
    • Nut butter: Creamy cashew butter (I use this brand).
    • Mustard: Creamy Dijon mustard adds nice flavor.
    • Garlic: Granulate garlic works fine.
    • Herbs: Fresh thyme sprigs, or dried if no fresh is available.
    • Thickener: Cornstarch or arrowroot starch.

    Please see the recipe card for measurements, salt and pepper.

    Chef's tip: What is braising? The technique for cooking this chicken is called braising. Braising is a traditional two-step cooking method. Meat is first browned then a liquid of some sort is added for the meat to finish cooking in, creating it's own sauce. Braising is usually done with larger cuts of meat and works great with bone-in chicken breasts. It's really easy and just about fool-proof.

    Substitutions and Variations

    • Use another plant-based milk such as coconut milk, cashew milk, or oat milk.
    • For other herbs, use a dried Italian seasoning blend.

    Recipe Instructions

    Pre-heat the oven to 375°F.

    Trimming bone-in chicken breasts of side ribs with a cleaver on brown paper.

    Step 1: Trim chicken breasts of any side bones and excess fat and skin. Season chicken breasts with salt, pepper, and garlic.

    Step 2: Over medium heat, add olive oil to a 5½-quart Dutch oven or other heavy pan large enough to hold all of the chicken breasts in a single layer. Place the chicken breasts skin side down and cook until they have a golden brown crust, 5-7 minutes. Turn the chicken breasts over.

    Step 3: Whisk together the broth, almond milk, cashew butter, mustard and the garlic until smooth. Pour around the chicken in the pan. Sprinkle with chopped thyme leaves. Place a lid on the pan and place in the oven for approximately 30 minutes or until a digital thermometer reads 160°F-165°F when inserted into the thickest part. When the chicken is done, remove the pieces to a plate or platter and keep it warm covered with foil. Put the pot back on the stovetop.

    Step 4: In a small bowl or measuring cup, combine the water and the arrowroot starch and stir until smooth. Add the arrowroot mixture to the pot with the chicken juices and whisk until smooth. Simmer for 2-3 minutes to cook off the raw taste and for the juices to thicken into gravy.

    Serving Suggestions

    Riced mashed potatoes are a terrific side dish for chicken with gravy. Serve with a green vegetable and a side tossed green salad and you're set.

    You will probably have extra gravy, as a serving is ½ cup per person. Leftover gravy reheats well and keeps tightly covered in the refrigerator for 3-4 days.

    Chicken with gravy on a blue plate for dinner with green beans.

    Recipe FAQs

    What cut of chicken is best for making chicken with gravy?

    Bone-in chicken breasts are the best cut of chicken as the bone adds flavor and moisture, but boneless chicken breasts work for convenience. For bone-in chicken breasts, leave the skin as it adds more flavor and creates a crispy texture.

    What can I use instead of flour to thicken gluten-free gravy?

    Good thickeners to use for gravy without flour include cornstarch, arrowroot starch, and tapioca starch. Nut butters are another way to thicken and enrich gravy.

    What broth should I use for gluten-free gravy?

    For gluten-free gravy, use either chicken broth or vegetable broth. Homemade provides the best flavor and control over ingredients. If buying your broth, read labels for questionable ingredients and sodium levels, and check out the frozen foods aisle for good broths as well.

    More Great Chicken Recipe

    Chicken is so versatile! Here are more ways to enjoy it with both chicken thighs and chicken breasts. For more inspiration check out the chicken recipes index page.

    • A round pan of golden chicken thighs in red sauce with rosemary on the side.
      One Pan Italian Chicken Thighs
    • A platter of sliced glazed teriyaki chicken with broccoli, carrots and zucchini.
      Baked Teriyaki Chicken Thighs
    • A gray platter of sals verde chicken breasts with tomatillo sauce, grated cheese and chopped cilantro.
      Easy Salsa Verde Chicken (green salsa chicken)
    • Golden baked chicken breasts on the dinner table.
      Roast Split Chicken Breast

    Did You Make This Recipe?

    If you make tis chicken with gravy, please add your comment. I appreciate your feedback and enjoy hearing from you. If you loved it, please give it a 5-star rating! They really help other readers.

    I created this recipe for the book Eat Fat Get Thin, A NY Times best-seller for keto diets.

    📖 Recipe

    Chicken with Gravy

    Sally Cameron
    Cashew butter gives the gravy an amazingly smooth richness, a delicious accompaniment to the crisp-skinned chicken breast. Save any extra gravy for another chicken dish.
    5 from 1 vote
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 10 minutes mins
    Cook Time 40 minutes mins
    Total Time 50 minutes mins
    Course Main Course
    Cuisine American
    Servings 4 servings
    Calories 474 kcal

    Equipment

    • Large wide shallow pan like a brasier

    Ingredients
      

    • 4 bone-in-skin-on chicken breasts
    • 1 tablespoon extra virgin olive oil
    • ½ teaspoon sea salt
    • ½ teaspoon granulated garlic
    • ¼ teaspoon ground black pepper
    • 1½ cups chicken broth low or no sodium
    • ½ cups plain unsweetened almond milk
    • ¼ cup creamy raw cashew butter I use Artisana
    • 2 tablespoons Dijon mustard
    • 4 cloves garlic peeled and finely chopped
    • 1 tablespoon fresh chopped thyme leaves or 1 teaspoon dried
    • 2 tablespoons filtered water
    • 1 tablespoon arrowroot starch

    Would you like to save this recipe?

    Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

    Instructions
     

    • Pre-heat the oven to 375°F. Trim any excess fat from the tops and sides of the chicken breasts.
    • With a heavy knife or poultry scissors, trim off the small side rib bones for a clean edge. Discard the ribs and excess fat.
    • Over medium heat, add olive oil to a 5½-quart Dutch oven or other heavy pan large enough to hold all of the chicken breasts in a single layer. Combine salt, garlic and pepper in a small bowl and sprinkle over the chicken breasts. Place the chicken breasts skin side down and allow them to cook until they have a golden brown crust, 5-7 minutes. Turn the chicken over.
    • In a bowl or large measuring cup, whisk together the broth, almond milk, cashew butter, mustard and the garlic until smooth. Pour around the chicken in the pan. Sprinkle with chopped thyme leaves. Place a lid on the pan and place in the oven. Roast the chicken for approximately 30 minutes or until a digital thermometer reads 160°F-165°F when inserted into the thickest part without touching the bone. When the chicken is done, remove the pieces to a plate or platter and keep it warm covered with foil.
    • In a small bowl or measuring cup, combine the water and the arrowroot starch and stir until smooth. Add the arrowroot mixture to the pot with the chicken juices and whisk until smooth. Simmer for 2-3 minutes to cook off the raw taste and for the juices to thicken into gravy.
    • Serve the chicken with a ½ cup of the gravy per person. Store any leftover sauce in an airtight container in the refrigerator up to 5 days.

    Notes

    You will probably have extra gravy, as a serving is ½ cup per person. Leftover gravy reheats well and keeps tightly covered in the refrigerator for 3-4 days.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 474kcalCarbohydrates: 10gProtein: 43gFat: 29gSaturated Fat: 7gPolyunsaturated Fat: 6gMonounsaturated Fat: 15gTrans Fat: 0.2gCholesterol: 116mgSodium: 558mgPotassium: 602mgFiber: 1gSugar: 0.3gVitamin A: 239IUVitamin C: 4mgCalcium: 87mgIron: 3mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    Curry Chicken Thighs

    06/20/2016 by Sally Cameron 2 Comments

    chicken curry

    These easy curry chicken thighs come together in under 30 minutes, making them perfect for a quick and comforting dinner. Bone-in chicken thighs are seared, then braised in a coconut milk and spice mixture-so the chicken stays juicy while creating its own rich, flavorful sauce. With bold Indian-inspired flavors and a creamy texture, this dish is both satisfying and simple. The sauce is delicious spooned over rice and vegetables.

    quick chicken curry | AFoodCentricLife.com

    These creamy curry chicken thighs are really is easy and fast using a few simple ingredients from your pantry. Think you don't like curry? Try this recipe. The warm spices are so inviting and, well, warming! The creamy sauce is terrific with rice and veggies.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why You'll Like Curry Chicken Thighs

    • Curry chicken thighs makes it's own sauce.
    • It's a fast and easy recipe for a busy weeknight.
    • Keep most ingredients in your pantry.

    Ingredients You'll Need

    • Chicken: Use bone-in chicken thighs, but chicken breasts work too.
    • Oil: Coconut oil, avocado oil, or use a healthy neutral oil.
    • Coconut milk: Use canned coconut milk for a rich, creamy sauce.
    • Chicken broth: Buy low sodium so you control the salt.
    • Garlic: Fresh garlic cloves for the best flavor.
    • Curry powder: Start with mild curry powder and add heat with cayenne pepper or hot sauce if you love heat.
    • Curry paste: I use this clean red thai curry paste which is medium heat. Use yellow for more mild curry paste.
    • Ginger: I use a ginger puree in a jar as it's easy, but you can use fresh ginger finely grated, or the tube puree.
    • Limes: For the tart, bright, acidity it adds to the dish.
    • Saffron: Use a pinch of saffron threads if you have it for more flavor and color. Just a few threads will do (optional).
    • Thickener: Use either cornstarch or arrowroot starch to thicken the pan sauce at the end.
    • Cilantro: Fresh chopped for a nice visual counterpart to the golden sauce and adds fresh flavor.

    Please see the recipe card for all ingredients and measurements, salt and black pepper.

    Substitutions and Variations

    • If your family doesn't like dark meat thighs, use bone-in chicken breasts and cut them in half cross wise. Bones add flavor and moisture to chicken.
    • Swap fresh Italian parsley for the cilantro.
    • Add carrots. Peel and thinly chop 4 carrots and add with the braising sauce.

    Recipe Instructions

    Pull the chicken out of the fridge and unwrap for 45 minutes if you can. This gets the chill off and helps the chicken cook more quickly with better results.

    Trim extra fat and skin with a sharp knife. Season the chicken with sprinkles of sea salt and ground black pepper.

    quick chicken curry | AFoodCentricLife.com

    Choose a pan that holds the chicken skin side down in a single layer as well as the braising liquid. Sear chicken skin side down in oil until golden.

    Pour off the extra fat in the pan, turn chicken over and pour the coconut curry mixture in the pan around the chicken. Cover and simmer about 15 minutes until chicken reaches 170°F - 175°F. Thighs need to go to a little higher temperature than chicken breasts.

    quick chicken curry | AFoodCentricLife.com

    Serving and Sauce

    To thicken the braising liquid into a sauce, whisk together the cornstarch and equal water until smooth. Add to the sauce in the pan and cook stirring 1-2 minutes until thickened. If the sauce get lumpy, pulse for a few seconds in a blender.

    quick chicken curry | AFoodCentricLife.com

    Serving Suggestions

    Curry chicken thighs are great served with either brown, white rice, or quinoa for no-grain. I like to blanch sugar snap peas for 2-3 minutes and serve with the chicken. Simple green beans work perfectly too.

    Make Ahead and Reheat

    A great way to streamline meal preparation during the busy week is to make a few dishes ahead on Sunday afternoon, cool, wrap well, date and refrigerate. This chicken curry reheats well.

    To reheat, place chicken and sauce in a sauté pan in a flat layer and cover with a lid. Turn heat to low. Allow the chicken to heat up slowly and get back to 165°. It will take awhile cold out of the fridge but you can be off doing other things while dinner warms up or making side dishes.

    Alternatively re-heat the chicken in a 350°F oven covered for about 30 minutes. Timing depends on how cold it is to start.

    A blue plate with golden chicken thighs and bright yellow curry sauce.

    Chef's Note: Curry powder is a blend of spices, usually turmeric (where it gets it's color), ginger, cinnamon, cumin, coriander, anise, fenugreek, dry mustard and others. You can buy it at any grocery store. Different brands vary in their taste and blend, so if you like curry, experiment to find your favorite. They also vary from mild to hot.

    Recipe FAQs

    What cooking method is best for chicken thighs?

    While you can roast, bake, saute or grill chicken thighs, braising is a delicious, easy and fast way to cook chicken thighs, which is basically what this recipe is. Started with searing, turn, then finish with a broth or gravy, simmering until done.

    What makes curry so creamy?

    It depends on where the recipe hails from. Indian curries use cream and yogurt for creaminess, and Thai curries usually use coconut milk for the creamy texture.

    More Recipe Ideas

    For another terrific chicken recipe try my braised chicken with cashew gravy.

    • quick coconut curry shrimp
      Coconut Shrimp Curry (Quick Dinner)
    • Mediterranean chicken thighs
      One-Pan Mediterranean Chicken Thighs
    • Grilled chicken kabobs glazed with hoisin sauce on a baking sheet.
      Grilled Hoisin Chicken Skewers
    • Golden baked chicken breasts on the dinner table.
      Roast Split Chicken Breast

    ⭐️Did You Make This Recipe?

    If you make curry chicken thighs, please add your comment. I appreciate your feedback and enjoy hearing from you and they really help other readers. If you loved it, please give it a 5-star rating!

    📖 Recipe

    quick chicken curry | AFoodCentricLife.com

    Easy Creamy Curry Chicken Thighs

    Sally Cameron
    Creamy, golden-hued and Indian-inspired, these chicken thighs are ready in under 30 minutes. Serve with cauliflower rice, white rice or brown with a green vegetable, such as broccoli, broccolini or asparagus. Its hard to give an accurate weight when buying chicken thighs as they vary so much in size. Buy 8 pieces, any leftover are good.
    5 from 2 votes
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 5 minutes mins
    Cook Time 30 minutes mins
    Total Time 35 minutes mins
    Course Main Course
    Cuisine Indian
    Servings 4 servings
    Calories 845 kcal

    Ingredients
      

    • 8 bone-in chicken thighs about 4 pounds
    • ¼ teaspoon sea salt
    • ¼ teaspoon ground black pepper
    • 1 tablespoon coconut oil or a neutral oil
    • 1 cup canned full fat coconut milk
    • ¾ cup chicken broth low sodium
    • 3 large garlic cloves finely chopped
    • 1 ½ tablespoons milld curry powder
    • 1 ½ tablespoons ginger puree, jar or tube or fresh ginger finely zested or grated
    • 2 limes
    • 1 pinch saffron threads optional
    • 1 ½ tablespoons cornstarch or arrowroot starch
    • 1 tablespoon chopped fresh cilantro for garnish optional

    Would you like to save this recipe?

    Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

    Instructions
     

    Trim chicken

    • Turn thighs skin side down and trim chicken of extra skin and fat. See post photo for help. Season with salt and black pepper both sides.

    Make curry sauce

    • In a medium bowl stir measuring cup, whisk together coconut milk, broth, garlic, curry powder, curry paste, ginger, lime juice, and saffron. Set it near the stove as you brown the chicken.

    Cook chicken

    • Place a medium saute or fry pan large enough to hold chicken in a single layer over medium heat. When the pan is hot, add the oil, then add the chicken thighs skin side down. Turn heat down to medium.
      Cook chicken until the skin side is golden, 5-7 minutes. Remove chicken to a plate or rimmed baking sheet and pour off fat leaving a little. Add chicken back to the pan top side up.

    Add curry sauce

    • Pour the milk-broth mixture around the pieces. Bring the pan to a simmer, cover and turn to heat to low. Cook the chicken for approximately another 10-12 minutes, or until they reach 170°F internally. Timing will depend on the size and thickness of the chicken thighs.
    • Remove chicken thighs to a plate and keep warm. Whisk the starch with 1 ½ tablespoons of water until smooth, add and simmer, stirring until smooth and thickened, 1-2 minutes.
      To serve, put the chicken back into the pan and serve family style or place thighs into shallow bowls with rice and veggies then add the creamy sauce.
      Sprinkle with cilantro and more lime juice if desired

    Notes

    If you don't like bones, use boneless breasts cut in half crosswise or boneless thighs. It still works. Buy 6-8 ounces per person by weight. They will cook at a different rate so watch your time and temperature.
    When buying bone-in chicken thighs, it's hard to gauge weight. It's easier to buy pieces that you think will feed your family. I err on the high side because leftovers are alwasy good for lunch the next day.
    My past purchase was 4 chicken thighs and they weighed 2 pounds before trimming.
    If you love spicy food, use a hotter curry paste or more of the red thai curry paste, or add cayenne for more kick, Be careful! You can always add more heat but not take it back if you make it too hot to enjoy. 

    Nutrition

    Calories: 845kcalCarbohydrates: 13gProtein: 50gFat: 66gSaturated Fat: 26gPolyunsaturated Fat: 11gMonounsaturated Fat: 23gTrans Fat: 0.2gCholesterol: 283mgSodium: 395mgPotassium: 869mgFiber: 3gSugar: 3gVitamin A: 272IUVitamin C: 12mgCalcium: 61mgIron: 4mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    Gluten-Free Apple Cake

    11/06/2014 by Sally Cameron 186 Comments

    apple pecan coffee cake on cake stand

    Here's a delicious way to enjoy apples any time of the year. If you're looking for recipes with apples, try this delicious apple cake. Slices of apples and chopped nuts tucked into cake batter spiced with cinnamon. The baking cake fills the house with an irresistible aroma. Plus, my recipe is both gluten-free and dairy-free. No one would ever guess.

    Apple Pecan Coffee Cake | AFoodCentricLife.com

    This moist cake recipe was a big hit with a group of girlfriends so I decided to post it for you. The crumb is tender, and the baked apples with cinnamon are lovely for fall. It's a perfect snack or dessert cake and you can sneak a piece in for breakfast. See serving tips at the end.

    For another easy, one-pan cake, try this lovely fresh cherry cake.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]
    layering apples for a cake | AFoodCentricLife.com
    Apple cake in the pan for baking.

    Recipe Ingredients

    I've made this recipe with both chopped and sliced apples and I like the sliced apples a little better. I do use cinnamon, and prefer it with a little softly whipped heavy cream if serving for dessert.

    For your shopping list:

    • All-purpose gluten-free flour blend (like Bob's Red Mill 1:1 blue bag)
    • Almond flour 
    • Granular monk fruit blend or natural sugar
    • Baking powder (buy aluminum-free)
    • Baking soda
    • Cinnamon
    • Salt
    • Olive oil or coconut oil
    • Golden brown sugar
    • Eggs
    • Vanilla extract or paste (here's my favorite)
    • Almond milk or dairy milk
    • Chopped pecans or walnuts
    • 2 large apples (Honeycrisp, Granny Smith or Pink Lady)

    For measurements please see the recipe.

    Ingredient Tips

    Sugar: Following a low-carb or reduced sugar diet? Use white or golden monk fruit blend for part or all. If not, a natural sugar is great.

    Another sugar option is Sucanat, a whole unrefined cane sugar. It retains all of the cane's natural molasses and has a distinct, natural molasses flavor that is particularly nice in baking. Or use unrefined raw coconut sugar.

    Spices: Cinnamon is traditional but Chinese Five Spice is a nice twist.

    Oil: Coconut oil is a good swap for olive oil if preferred. Don't use standard vegetable oil. If you have it, toss it. It's terrible for you.

    Apple Pecan Coffee Cake|AFoodCentricLife.com
    Cinnamon apple cake on a glass cake stand.

    What is Apple Cake?

    Apple cake is a single layer cake served as a snack or dessert cake across many cultures. You'll find recipes for Irish apple cake, French apple cake, and German (Polish or Austrian) as well as Jewish apple cake. There are lovely, delicious nuances to each cultural tradition.

    What kind of Apples

    For the best apples, choose a variety that is firm and crisp. Honeycrisp apples is what I had on hand. Granny Smith apples are another great option and classic for baking. Other crisp-tart-sweet apples good for baking are Pink Lady and Jazz. For more apple variety information read here.

    Apple Pecan Coffee Cake|AFoodCentricLife.com

    Storing Apples

    As they ripen, apples emit a plant hormone called ethylene gas. It hastens the spoilage of ethylene gas-sensitive fruits and vegetables like lettuce, berries, kale, green beans, and carrots.

    The tip: store apples in a plastic bag with a few holes in it alone in the crisper drawer. Don't store other vegetables in the same drawer. 

    Tools

    For the cake pan, you need a 9" springform pan and parchment paper. Springforms are not expensive and available online, at cooking stores, even Target. Find parchment at the grocery store, cooking stores and online. You can even buy handy pre-cut round pieces. 

    Apple Pecan Coffee Cake|AFoodCentricLife.com
    A piece of cinnamon apple cake on a plate with fork.

    To Peel or Not

    I tested the cake both ways. While I like the idea of leaving the skin on for more fiber and nutrition, it looked nice without the peel. The lead photo was baked without the peel.

    The photo above shows apples with the skin on, and two teaspoons of extra, coarse brown sugar (Demerara or Turbinado) for sparkle after baking. It's optional if you want to reduce sugar.

    Coffee Cake in a pan | AFoodCentricLife.com
    Apple cake in a pan ready for baking.

    Instructions

    Pre-heat the oven and prep your pan by spraying with a little non-stick and placing a parchment round on the bottom of the pan. Mix dry ingredients in one medium bowl, and wet ingredients in another. Stir both bowls together and fold in nuts by hand with a flexible spatula. Pour the thick batter into the prepared pan.

    Peel apples and core. This is easiest with an apple corer tool. Then slice each eighth into 3 slices each for 24 thin slices.

    Arrange apple slices in a circular overlapping pattern starting at the outside edge of the pan. Slightly overlap apple ends and tip the bottom of the slices (the thinner end) a bit down into the batter. See photo above for example. Bake, cool and serve warm or room temperature.

    Pro Tip: You will know cake is done when the edges of the cake are golden and just pulling away from the sides of the pan, and a toothpick or cake tester inserted in the center comes out clean with a few moist crumbs.

    Serving Suggestions

    Serve alone or with a dollop of whipped cream. Sweeten heavy whipping cream with a bit of sugar and vanilla extract (called Chantilly cream) and whip stiff with a hand mixer. 

    If serving after dinner, serve it a la mode with a scoop of ice cream or sweetened French sour cream (creme fraiche) It's nice with a cup of coffee or tea.

    📖 Recipe

    Apple Pecan Coffee Cake|AFoodCentricLife.com

    Gluten-Free Apple Cake

    Sally Cameron
    Spiced, golden and sweet with apples, this gluten-free, dairy-free and reduced-sugar coffee cake is a nice treat for fall weekends or holidays. For breakfast or brunch, serve with fresh fruit and eggs. For a snack, enjoy it with a cup of spiced tea or coffee. Please read the notes on sugar, below
    5 from 1 vote
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 15 minutes mins
    Cook Time 45 minutes mins
    Total Time 1 hour hr
    Course Dessert, Snack
    Cuisine American
    Servings 8 to 10
    Calories 300 kcal

    Equipment

    • 9" springform pan
    • Parchment paper

    Ingredients
      

    Dry Ingredients

    • 1 cup all-purpose gluten-free flour blend 4 ½ ounces, I use Bob’s Red Mill
    • ½ cup almond flour 1 ¾ ounces, Bob’s Red Mill
    • 1 ½ teaspoons baking powder aluminum free
    • 1 ½ teaspoons baking soda
    • 1 teaspoon cinnamon
    • ¼ teaspoon salt

    West Ingredients

    • ⅓ cup olive oil or coconut oil, melted or coconut oil, melted
    • ⅓ cup  sucanat  or golden brown sugar
    • 2 large eggs
    • 1 teaspoon vanilla extract or vanilla paste
    • ½ cup milk or almond milk
    • ½ cup chopped pecans or walnuts 2 ¼ ounces
    • 2 large Honeycrisp or Granny Smith apples

    Optional Topping

    • 2 teaspoons Demerara or Turbinado sugar

    Would you like to save this recipe?

    Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

    Instructions
     

    • Pre-heat oven to 350º. Cut a parchment round to fit inside springform pan, spray pan with non-stick and add parchment.

    Mix Dry Ingredients

    • In a medium bowl, whisk together the dry ingredients: all purpose and almond flour, baking powder and soda, spice and salt.

    Mix Wet Ingredients

    • In a large measuring cup or bowl, whisk together wet ingredients: oil, sugar, eggs, vanilla and almond milk until smooth. Pour wet ingredients into dry and stir well until smooth. Stir in nuts. Pour batter into the pan.

    Slice Apples and Add to Batter

    • Trim a thin slice off of the top and bottom of the apples. Core and peel apples. Cut into 24 slices. To do this easily, cut the apple into eights, then each piece into equal thirds. Arrange apple slices in a circular overlapping pattern starting at the outside edge of the pan. Slightly overlap apple ends and tip the bottom of the slices (the thinner end) a bit down into the batter. This will allow you to get more apples into the batter. Continue around the pan until you get to the center. For the small center, cut a slice of apple into smaller pieces and fit them in as best you can. You may not need all of the apple slices. If using, sprinkle the demerara sugar over the top to give the cake top a sparkle (optional).

    Bake the Cake

    • Bake cake at 350º for approximately 40-45 minutes. Timing will depend on your ovens. When done a toothpick inserted into the center should come out clean but moist. Remove cake from the oven and allow to cool for 15 minutes. Run a thin bladed knife around the inside edge of the pan to free the cake, then pop the spring and remove the cake. Cool on a wire rack or serve warm. If serving later after cooling, wrap well and keep at room temperature. 

    Notes

    Notes on sugar - Demerara and Turbinado sugar are a large crystal, somewhat crunchy, raw light brown sugar. I've sprinkled two teaspoons over the top before baking to give the top a sparkle, but this is optional. Sucunat is a natural, unrefined brown sugar, as is raw coconut sugar.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 300kcalCarbohydrates: 30gProtein: 5gFat: 19gSaturated Fat: 2gTrans Fat: 1gCholesterol: 41mgSodium: 397mgPotassium: 116mgFiber: 4gSugar: 16gVitamin A: 93IUVitamin C: 3mgCalcium: 110mgIron: 1mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    This post was sponsored by Sub-Zero Wolf.

    Super Easy Thanksgiving Green Beans

    11/02/2015 by Sally Cameron Leave a Comment

    thanksgiving green beans

    Planning and preparing a big holiday dinner stresses even the most seasoned of cooks. Having a simple side dish in your arsenal of recipes helps keep you sane and your guests happy and well fed. Here is a simple Thanksgiving green beans recipe to accompany your feast. You can even make them ahead.

    Green beans on a platter with shallots and pomegranate seeds.
    Green beans on a platter with shallots and pomegranate seeds.

    French haricot vert (har-ee-ko vare), often called baby green beans, are widely available these days. One of my favorite vegetables, they are slender and more tender than other green bean varieties. You can prepare them a day or two ahead, a great help for the busy holiday cook.

    Tools

    • Large pot to cook the beans
    • Large bowl to chill after cooking
    • Saute or fry pan to warm them back up

    How to Make Easy Thanksgiving Green Beans

    Baby green beans or haricot vert often come ready to cook with ends snapped off in packages, saving you preparation time. If they are not trimmed, line them up on a cutting board and trim off the ends with a chef's knife.

    Start by setting up an ice bath. Fill a large bowl half full of ice and fill ¾ full with cold water. Bring a large pot of water to a boil. Drop the beans into boiling salted water for 5 minutes, then plunge immediately into a big bowl of ice water (called shocking) to halt the cooking process.

    Raw green beans piled on a cutting board.

    Make Them Ahead of Time

    As soon as the beans are cold, drain on a clean kitchen towel or in a colander, then refrigerate until needed. This can be done 2-3 days ahead of time.

    Pro Tip - Don't just cook the green beans ahead, but ready your garnishes ahead too. Put them in small bowls or bags, label them, and place them on top of or near the beans in the refrigerator. That way you don't have to think about it when you're ready to serve.

    Cooked green beans chilling in ice after cooking.

    How to Warm

    Pull beans from the fridge about an hour ahead of time to come to room temperature. They will heat more quickly.

    While the turkey or main course is resting, place the green beans in the oven to warm. Depending on the quantity, they will warm pretty quickly in a shallow casserole dish or on a foil covered rimmed baking sheet covered with foil at 350 degrees.

    Finish and Serve

    To finish the beans, thinly slice a large shallot crosswise into rings (do this in the morning and refrigerate covered until needed).  Cook shallot in a little olive oil over medium low heat until they are soft and sweet. Season with salt and pepper. Toss with warmed green beans and sprinkle with chopped toasted pecans. Add bright red pomegranate seeds, like sparkling rubies on your holiday table.

    Thanksgiving Green Beans on a white platter with serving fork.
    Thanksgiving Green Beans on a white platter with serving fork.

    More Thanksgiving Recipes

    To complete your Thanksgiving side dishes and dessert, click on the recipe links for:

    • Mashed potatoes
    • Cranberry salad
    • Mashed sweet potatoes with rosemary
    • Pumpkin mousse
    • Pumpkin tart (pie)

    📖 Recipe

    Thanksgiving Green Beans | AFoodCentricLife.com

    Thanksgiving Green Beans

    Sally Cameron
    These baby green beans are easy and fast. We eat them once a week at least, all through the year. For planning purposes figure about 3 ounces per person raw weight. And be sure to decide on your garnishes in advance and add them to your grocery list. Ideas are noted in the post. Cook the beans a day ahead to save time. Warm and garnish at serving time.
    5 from 2 votes
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 5 minutes mins
    Cook Time 5 minutes mins
    Total Time 10 minutes mins
    Course Side Dish, vegetables
    Cuisine American
    Servings 4 to 6
    Calories 126 kcal

    Equipment

    • Large pot for cooking
    • Large bowl for chilling in ice

    Ingredients
      

    • 12 ounces haricot vert French baby green beans
    • 1 tablespoon olive oil divided use
    • 1 large shallot 3 ounces, peeled and thinly sliced into rings
    • 2 garlic cloves finely chopped
    • ¼ teaspoon salt
    • ¼ teaspoon ground black pepper

    Optional garnishes

    • 3 tablespoons chopped pecans hazelnuts or pine nuts, toasted
    • 3 tablespoons pomegranate seeds

    Would you like to save this recipe?

    Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

    Instructions
     

    Set up

    • Fill a large mixing bowl ⅓ full of ice. Fill the bowl with cold water and set aside. Bring a large pot of water to a full boil.

    Cooking and Chilling

    • When water comes to a boil, add salt (2 teaspoons). Drop beans into the boiling water for 5 minutes. Remove immediately and plunge into the ice water bath. Chill a few minutes, then drain, dry, toss with 1 teaspoon olive oil. Refrigerate, covered, until ready to serve. This can be done 1-2 days ahead.

    Finishing

    • Place a medium sauté or fry pan over medium low heat. Add remaining 2 teaspoons of olive oil. When oil is warm, add the shallot. Cook the shallots until soft and translucent, stirring occasionally, about 5 minutes. Add the garlic and cook 1 minute longer. Either refrigerate until serving or leave at room temperature, covered, if doing right before dinner.
    • If chilled, remove the beans from the refrigerator an hour ahead. About 20 minutes before serving, place the green beans in a large shallow casserole dish and top with the shallots. Cover with foil and place in the oven. When green beans are hot, top with nuts and pomegranate seeds. Serve at once.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 126kcalCarbohydrates: 11gProtein: 3gFat: 9gSaturated Fat: 1gPolyunsaturated Fat: 2gMonounsaturated Fat: 6gSodium: 152mgPotassium: 265mgFiber: 4gSugar: 5gVitamin A: 592IUVitamin C: 13mgCalcium: 44mgIron: 1mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    Kale Chickpea Salad With Tahini Dressing

    01/15/2018 by Sally Cameron 2 Comments

    kale salad tahini dressing

    This kale and chickpea salad with creamy tahini dressing makes a nourishing, satisfying lunch or side salad. Sturdy greens like curly kale need a dressing with body-and tahini delivers. It clings to the leaves beautifully while adding richness and flavor. Toss in creamy avocado, chickpeas, and a sprinkle of hemp seeds for an easy, plant-based salad packed with protein, healthy fats, and texture.

    A shallow salad bowl filled with kale and chickpea salad with avocado and hemp seeds on top.

    I've been making this kale and chickpea salad on repeat lately-it's just one of those craveable, feel-good meals I never get tired of. It's hearty, filling, and full of nourishing ingredients, with a satisfying mix of creamy avocado, protein-packed chickpeas, and nutty hemp seeds. Plus, the tahini dressing pulls everything together with rich, lemony flavor that clings perfectly to the kale.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why You'll Love This Kale and Chickpea Salad

    • Hearty and nourishing - Packed with fiber, plant-based protein, and healthy fats to keep you full and energized.
    • Creamy tahini dressing - Rich, lemony, and clings to the kale just right-no sad, soggy greens here.
    • Perfect for meal prep - Holds up well in the fridge and makes a satisfying lunch or side any day of the week.

    What else to do with tahini? Try this roasted red bell pepper hummus.

    What You'll Need

    Kale salad

    • Kale - Buy curly kale bundles and wash it yourself.
    • Chickpeas - Canned garbanzo beans aka chickpeas.
    • Avocado - Ripe but firm dices easily.
    • Seeds - Raw shelled hemp seeds add protein and crunch.

    Tahini dressing

    • Extra Virgin Olive Oil - Use a good-quality oil for richness and body.
    • Lemon Juice - Freshly squeezed adds bright acidity and balances the tahini.
    • Tahini - Creamy sesame paste gives the dressing a smooth texture and nutty depth.
    • Garlic - Just one clove adds the perfect savory punch.
    • Tamari or Soy Sauce - Use tamari for a gluten-free option, or low-sodium soy sauce if preferred.
    • Ketchup - Just a touch adds subtle sweetness and umami (trust me-it works).
    • Vinegars - A splash of unseasoned rice vinegar and balsamic vinegar add complexity and depth to round everything out.

    please see the recipe card for measurements, salt, and black pepper.

    For another terrific dressing using tahini, try this creamy ginger dressing.

    Substitutions and Variations

    • No soy? Try a soy-free tamari alternative (it is delicious).
    • No chickpeas? Swap in cannellini beans or white beans for a similarly creamy texture and mild flavor.
    • Add crunch: Toasted sunflower seeds, slivered almonds, or pepitas make great toppings.
    • Make it spicy: Add a pinch of crushed red pepper flakes or a dash of hot sauce to the dressing for a little heat.
    • Herb it up: Fresh parsley, dill, or mint can brighten the flavor and add a fresh twist.

    Love kale? Try this warm kale salad recipe.

    Chef's Tip: How to Massage Curly Kale
    Raw curly kale can be tough and fibrous, but a quick massage transforms it. After adding the dressing (or just a drizzle of olive oil and lemon), use clean hands to gently rub and squeeze the kale for 1-2 minutes. You'll feel the leaves soften and darken slightly-it's a sign the kale is tenderizing and becoming more flavorful. This simple step makes all the difference in texture and taste.

    How to Make Kale and Avocado Salad

    Kale in a salad spinner.
    1. Wash your kale, tear the leaves into bite-sized pieces and spin them dry. Massage with a little bit of olive oil to soften if desired.
    2. Make the tahini dressing, shake the dressing ingredients in a jar or blend briefly in a blender.
    3. Dice the avocado and assemble the salad, adding the seeds.
    A curly kale salad with chickpeas and creamy tahini dressing.

    Chef's tip on kale nutrition: Raw curly kale is a hearty, not a fluffy salad green. It's actually a cruciferous vegetable, like cabbage, broccoli and Brussels sprouts. It's also one of the healthiest greens you can eat. In just a single cup, kale provides a whopping amount of vitamins and minerals including vitamin A, C, K, B6, and manganese. You even get some fiber and protein for good measure and it's low carb. That's a power green.

    A serving of kale salad on a plate with chickpeas, avocado, and hemp seeds.

    Serving Suggestions

    • As a light lunch - It's filling on its own, especially with the chickpeas and avocado.
    • With grilled protein - Pairs beautifully with grilled chicken, salmon, shrimp, or tofu.
    • As a side dish - Great alongside soups, grain bowls, or anything from the grill.
    • Meal prep hero - Make the dressing and kale ahead, then add avocado and toppings just before serving.

    Recipe FAQs

    Is the dressing dairy-free and gluten-free?

    Yes-as long as you use gluten-free tamari, the dressing is both dairy- and gluten-free, and vegan if you use maple syrup.

    Can I use curly kale or Lacinato kale?

    Either works! Lacinato (dino) kale is a bit more tender, but curly kale softens nicely once massaged with the dressing.

    Can I use curly kale or Lacinato kale?

    Yes! Massage the kale and make the dressing ahead-it holds up well for 2-3 days. For best texture, add avocado and any crunchy toppings just before serving.

    More Recipes With Kale

    If you love kale as much as I do, I've got more healthy ways to use it! This nutrient-packed green is endlessly versatile. Try one of my favorite kale recipes below and get inspired to use up that bunch in the fridge.

    • cauliflower colcannon
      Cauliflower Colcannon with Kale
    • kale salad with colorful veggies | afoodcentriclife.com
      Roasted Vegetable Salad with Kale
    • Ribollita in a gray pot.
      Italian Ribollita Soup (Ribollita Toscana)
    • warm kale salad with cranberries
      Warm Kale Salad with Cranberries and Walnuts

    ⭐️Did You Make This Recipe?

    If you make this lemon tahini salad dressing, please add your comment. I appreciate your feedback and enjoy hearing from you. If you loved it, please give it a 5-star rating! Your comments help other readers. Thanks for supporting my site!

    📖 Recipe

    curly kale salad tahini dressing | AFoodCentricLife.com

    Kale and Chickpea Salad with Tahini Dressing

    Sally Cameron
    Sturdy, healthy kale leaves with a creamy tahini dressing. Add avocado, hemp seeds and garbanzo beans and you have an incredible plant-based, high protein salad to fuel your day. A single large bundle of curly kale serves four as a side or two as an entree salad.
    5 from 1 vote
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 15 minutes mins
    Total Time 15 minutes mins
    Course Salad
    Cuisine American
    Servings 4
    Calories 486 kcal

    Ingredients
      

    Tahini Dressing

    • 6 tablespoons extra virgin olive oil
    • 3 tablespoons tahini
    • 3 tablespoons lemon juice
    • 1 tablespoon low-sodium tamari or soy sauce
    • 1 tablespoon unseasoned rice vinegar
    • 2-3 teaspoons Balsamic vinegar
    • 1 large garlic clove very finely chopped and smeared or microplaned

    Kale Salad

    • 1-2 bundles curly kale leaves washed and torn into small pieces
    • 1 15 ounce can garbanzo beans rinsed and drained
    • 1 ripe avocado seeded and diced
    • ¼ cup raw shelled hemp seeds

    Would you like to save this recipe?

    Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

    Instructions
     

    • Start by making dressing. Combine all ingredients into a jar and shake well until smooth and creamy, or place in a blender and blend on low speed. Makes extra.
    • For salad, wash kale leaves, then strip or slice out center tough rib. Tear leaves into bite-sized pieces. Dry in a salad spinner or in layers of clean kitchen towels. This can be done ahead to save time. Toss salad with a few tablespoons of dressing then add beans, avocado, and sprinkles of hemp seeds to serve.

    Notes

    Raw shelled hemp seeds can be purchased at most markets today, especially health food markets and online. Tahini (sesame seed butter) can be purchased on the nut butter aisle.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 486kcalCarbohydrates: 23gProtein: 13gFat: 40gSaturated Fat: 5gPolyunsaturated Fat: 10gMonounsaturated Fat: 23gSodium: 416mgPotassium: 462mgFiber: 9gSugar: 1gVitamin A: 197IUVitamin C: 9mgCalcium: 76mgIron: 4mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    Roasted Vegetable Salad with Kale

    10/18/2016 by Sally Cameron 8 Comments

    kale salad with colorful veggies | afoodcentriclife.com

    Get more veggies on the table and change up your usual salad with this roasted vegetable salad. Roast beets and cauliflower florets, chop fennel, add crunchy toasted pumpkin seeds and serve over kale. Add a little feta cheese if you like dairy (or avocado) and finish with a tangy vinaigrette. Definitely a big dose of veggies, plus it's packed with color, taste, texture and healthy nutrition.

    colorful kale salad on a platter.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why You'll Like This Recipe

    • This roasted vegetable salad has multiple elements but they can all be done ahead of time then assembled for a meal.
    • For a heartier main dish salad, add protein.

    Roasted Vegetable Salad Ingredients

    • Kale: Skip the bagged kale and buy fresh leafy bundles. The bagged version might be convenient but it still has the tough center rib. Invest a few minutes and chop your own. Buy Lacinato or Tuscan kale instead of curly kale, and buy organic if possible.
    • Cauliflower: I buy a head of cauliflower and break it into florets myself to control the size, but you can buy a bag of florets to save time.
    • Beets: Buy raw beets and roast yourself for the best result. It's super easy and mostly hands-off.
    • Fennel: Raw fennel gives nice flavor and an edge to this salad, but if you're not a fan it's optional.
    • Pepitas: Raw or toasted pumpkin seeds are the perfect fall garnish for this salad and made ahead in minutes.
    • Cheese: Greek feta is a nice tangy add-on, but blue cheese or goat cheese are delicious too. Omit for dairy-free.

    Vinaigrette Ingredients

    • Oil: Extra virgin olive oil is my first choice; avocado oil works nicely too.
    • Vinegar: Red wine vinegar or apple cider vinegar.
    • Mustard: Just a touch of Dijon mustard helps emulsify the vinaigrette and adds a little tang.

    Please see the recipe card for measurements, salt and pepper.

    For another terrific entree style salad try my Chinese Chicken Salad with Ginger Vinaigrette.

    Recipe Instructions

    While there are a few components to this salad, they can all be done ahead of time if desired.

    Step 1: Roasting beets: Do this at first (or ahead). Read this post on how to roast beets. It's easy. Cut off tops, wrap in heavy foil, drizzle with oil. Roast at 400°F until tender. Rub off skin and chop. Short cut: buy pre-cooked beets at the store. Look in the refrigerated produce case. They are not roasted, but steamed.

    sliced cauliflower ready to roast.

    Step 2: Roasting cauliflower: Core the head and break off large florets. Cut florets crosswise into wedges about ½″ thick. Place on a rimmed baking sheet lined with parchment or foil. Drizzle with olive oil and sprinkle with salt, pepper and granulated garlic. Roast at 400° for approximately 15-18 minutes, until golden with browned edges.

    kale ribbons on a cutting board.

    Step 3: Prep the kale leaves while the vegetables are roasting. To stem the kale, hold the bottom of the stem in one hand, clasp your other hand around the leaf at the bottom and run your clasped hand up the stem. The leafy part should separate easily. If not, cut out any stubborn ribs with a knife. Pile kale leaves together and chop crosswise into thin ribbons.

    Step 4: Slicing fennel: Use a mandoline or inexpensive handheld slicer to shave or thinly slice fennel. Cut the tops off, cut out the triangular core, then starting at the bottom of the bulb, slice. Save the fluffy fronds for garnish.

    Close up of roasted pumpkin seeds on baking tray.

    Step 5: Toasting pumpkin seeds: Scatter ½ cup seeds on a rimmed baking sheet at bake at 350° for 15-18 minutes until you can smell them. Shake the pan half way through. Be careful they don't burn. You can also toast them on the stove top in a pan over low heat. You can also use them raw to garnish the salad.

    Serving Suggestions

    When all of the elements are ready, toss together and serve with the vinaigrette. This salad is beautiful when served family style on a platter or in a large shallow salad bowl.

    Single plate of kale salad with beets and cauliflower.

    Recipe FAQs

    How do I prevent vegetables from becoming soggy when roasting them for a salad?

    Don't crowd vegetables when roasting, keep them in a single, flat layer. Don't add too much oil before roasting. And be sure your using a hot oven, around 400°F-425°F. Roast until the edges are browned, then taste test one to see if they are done enough for you. You want a little caramelization for the best flavor.

    5. How do I add protein to a roasted vegetable salad?

    To add protein, use diced roasted or grilled chicken breast, or sliced steak. Adding cheese adds protein (if you enjoy dairy). Adding plant-based protein such as chick peas (garbanzo beans), lentils or cooked quinoa are other good options.

    7. What are some good flavor additions to a roasted vegetable salad?

    Adding nuts (raw or toasted for more flavor), seeds, homemade croutons, or dried fruit such as dried cranberries or golden berries are good additions. Just be sure they compliment the overall flavor of the salad.

    ⭐️Did you Make This Recipe?

    If you make these roast beets, please add your comment. I appreciate your feedback and enjoy hearing from you. If you loved it, please give it a 5-star rating! They really help other readers.

    📖 Recipe

    kale salad with colorful veggies | afoodcentriclife.com

    Roasted Vegetable Salad with Kale

    Sally Cameron
    Here's a delicious way to get more veggies on the table and change-up your usual salad - a kale salad featuring roast beets and cauliflower florets, chopped fennel and crunchy toasted pumpkin seeds. Add a little feta cheese if you like dairy or skip. Avocado is good too. Finish with a tangy vinaigrette.
    5 from 1 vote
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 10 minutes mins
    Cook Time 35 minutes mins
    Total Time 45 minutes mins
    Course Salad
    Cuisine American
    Servings 4 servings
    Calories 362 kcal

    Ingredients
      

    Kale Salad

    • 2-3 tablespoons raw pumpkin seeds pepitas
    • 1 head cauliflower or use bagged florets as a shortcut
    • 1 ½ tablespoons olive oil
    • 1 teaspoon  granulated garlic
    • ½ teaspoon sea salt
    • ½ teaspoon ground black pepper
    • 1 large bundle of Lacinato (Tuscan) kale
    • 1 small fennel bulb
    • 2 medium roasted beets store bought or homemade
    • 4-6 ounces feta cheese optional

    My Basic Vinaigrette

    • 3 tablespoons extra virgin olive oil
    • 1 tablespoon apple cider or red wine vinegar
    • 2 teaspoons Dijon mustard
    • 2 pinches sea salt
    • 2 pinches ground black pepper

    Would you like to save this recipe?

    Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

    Instructions
     

    • Pre-heat oven to 350° (177 C). Scatter pumpkin seeds on a rimmed baking sheet and toast for approximately 15 minutes, until you can smell them and they are lightly browned. Watch so they do not burn. While they are toasting, work on your vegetables.
    • Turn oven up to 400° after the pumpkin seeds are done (or start a second oven at the same time). Cut the core from cauliflower head. Break off florets and cut them into ½″ thick wedges. Place on a rimmed baking sheet lined with parchment or foil. Drizzle olive oil over florets and sprinkle with garlic, salt, and pepper. Roast cauliflower until golden brown at the edges, about 18-20 minutes.
    • For kale, strip out center stem with hands or trim out with a knife. Slice leaves crosswise into thin ribbons.
    • Trim top stalks off of fennel. Save some of the fluffy fronds for garnish if desired. Thinly slice fennel bulb with a sharp knife, mandolin, or handheld slicer. Dice the roasted beets. Dice or crumble the feta.
    • Whisk together the oil, vinegar and Dijon until emulsified. Sprinkle in salt and pepper to taste. Toss kale greens with a few teaspoons until lightly coated and place on plates or a platter. Add vegetables, pumpkin seeds, and cheese. Add extra vinaigrette over top.

    Notes

    For Histamine Intolerance

    The only thing you should likely skip is the feta cheese. Some people do fine with goat cheese. Do what works best for you and keeps you safe.
    This serves 2 as an entree salad or 4 as a side salad.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 362kcalCarbohydrates: 25gProtein: 13gFat: 26gSaturated Fat: 7gPolyunsaturated Fat: 4gMonounsaturated Fat: 14gTrans Fat: 0.003gCholesterol: 25mgSodium: 818mgPotassium: 1260mgFiber: 10gSugar: 11gVitamin A: 6973IUVitamin C: 144mgCalcium: 391mgIron: 4mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    Hearty Tuscan White Bean Soup

    11/24/2023 by Sally Cameron Leave a Comment

    Gray bowl with bean and kale soup topped with parmesan and basil.

    Hearty Tuscan white bean soup is a flavorful comforting Italian-style soup for a chilly day. Lots of vegetables, broth, and herbs provide rich flavor, and optional kale for an extra veggie boost. Easy to make adding leftover turkey or chicken for more protein or leave it out for a vegan soup. Make a big pot of soup and freeze it for for a future quick lunch or dinner. It's a great use for leftovers!

    A gray bowl of white bean soup with basil, parmesan, and kale.

    Once your prep work is done, this recipe goes together quickly for a healthy hearty soup. Check out the variations section for lots of customizable options, like how to make it vegan. Don't like kale? Skip it or use baby spinach leaves.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why You'll like This Recipe

    • Using canned white beans and leftover turkey or chicken shortens cooking time.
    • It's hearty, filling, and healthy.
    • There are many ways to vary it to meet your preferences.

    For another terrific Italian bean soup, try this ribollita recipe. The addition of tomatoes and pancetta give it great flavor.

    Recipe Ingredients

    here si what you need to make Tuscan White Bean Soup.

    Ingredients for white bean soup with turkey or chicken with herbs and aromatics.
    • White beans: Cannellini beans (white kidney beans) are an Italian favorite, but other white beans will work if you can't get them. Canned beans make it easy. Buy low sodium beans and compare labels.
    • Protein: Leftover turkey, roast chicken breasts, or rotisserie chicken work well.
    • Broth: Use chicken broth, turkey broth, or easy vegetable broth. Homemade if you can for best flavor.
    • Oil: Extra virgin olive oil is perfect.
    • Vegetables: You need carrot, onion, celery, fennel and kale. The first three are classic for flavoring soup, and fennel is a flavorful addition widely used in Italian cuisine. For kale, buy the tuscan kale also called dinosaur kale or lacinato kale.
    • Herbs: Thyme, bay leaf, sage, and fennel seed (optional). Optionally, add fresh chopped basil leaves and fresh parsley before serving.
    • Garlic: An Italian-style soup without garlic? No way. Use fresh garlic or garlic powder.
    • Wine: Use a dry white wine such as a sauvignon blanc or chardonnay. I use the little mini airline size bottles to cook with. Wine adds lovely flavor but it is optional.

    Please see the recipe card for quantities, measurements, salt and black pepper.

    For another easy recipe with beans, try this easy three bean salad with a french vinaigrette.

    Chef's note: If you want to use dry beans, soak them overnight in cold water to cover, drain beans in the morning, and cook either on the stove top in fresh water until tender or use a pressure cooker on high pressure. Read this article for ways to cook beans.

    Substitutions and Variations

    • No cannellini beans? Use other types of beans such as great northern beans, small white beans, or navy beans.
    • Make it vegan with vegetable broth and skipping the chicken or turkey. For volume, add another can of white beans if preferred.
    • For a little heat, serve red pepper flakes on the side.
    • Want it thinner? Just add broth.
    • Want it creamier? For a creamy white bean soup, add 1 can of the cannellini beans to a food processor or blender with a little broth and puree, then add to the soup.
    • Toss a parmesan rind into the pot while cooking for extra flavor, remove before serving.
    • No good looking kale? Leave it out or add baby spinach leaves.

    Chef's note: Fresh herbs vs. dried herbs. I often use fresh herbs (and grow them), but dried is easier to keep on hand. If fresh herbs are not available, the rule is use half to a third of the amount of dried herbs (they are more potent) versus fresh herbs. Dried herbs also need liquid (like broth) to rehydrate and release their flavor. Ultimately it depends on your taste preferences and the herbs you are working with.

    Recipe Instructions

    Making this white bean soup recipe is so easy! Let me show you how. I use a 5.5 quart dutch oven or use another heavy large pot.

    Sautéing vegetables as the base for a soup in a Dutch oven.
    Step 1: Chop onion, celery, carrots, fennel and herbs and saute in olive oil over medium heat until soft. Add wine and cook down.
    Adding white beans to a pot making a soup.
    Step 2: When vegetables are soft, add beans.
    Pouring golden broth into a pot while making soup.
    Step 3: Add broth.
    Adding chopped chicken to a pot for white bean soup.
    Step 4: Add meat.
    Adding kale to a soup pot for added vegetables and nutritoin.
    Step 5: Add kale and simmer until hot and all flavors are combined, then stir in fresh parsley and basil for flavor and color at serving. Remove the parmesan rind and bay leaves before serving.Top with parmesan if desired.

    Chef's Tip: Wild fennel pollen. Sometimes I'll use wild fennel pollen versus fennel seed. Find wild fennel pollen online or in a specialty spice shop. The flavor is fantastic. It is the most potent variety of fennel and has an amazing aromatic quality.

    Golden homemade broth in a quart container.

    Serving Suggestions

    Serve white bean soup hot with a dusting of freshly grated parmesan cheese and additional fresh chopped herbs if desired. Garlic toast or a crusty roll to soak up the broth is a nice accompaniment. Remember to remove bay leaves before serving.

    White bean soup is terrific the next day or label and date in an airtight container then freeze. I usually freeze in 3 cup portions for 2 servings.

    Recipe FAQs

    How can I thicken or thin out white bean soup?

    To thin white bean soup, add additional broth, not water. Using water dilutes the flavor. To thicken, try one of two approaches: stir in bread bread crumbs and simmer until thickened, or puree an additional can of white beans until smooth as stir in as much as you want to attain the desired thickness.

    Can I use different types of white beans?

    For the best white bean soup, use either cannellini beans (Italian white kidney beans), great northern beans, navy beans, or small white beans. Canned beans make it easier, but you can use dried beans if you prefer. Rinse and soak dried beans in plenty of water ahead overnight, then simmer until tender in fresh water. Another option is to cook dried beans in a pressure cooker or Instant Pot, then use for white bean soup.

    What are some good side dishes to serve with white bean soup?

    A hearty white bean soup is pretty much a meal in itself. If you want to make it a bigger meal, add a tossed green salad and garlic toast or crusty rolls to serve alongside. Another option, make the white bean soup heartier by adding protein to your recipe. Add shredded cooked chicken or diced rotisserie chicken. After Thanksgiving, add leftover roast turkey or ham.

    Gray bowl with bean and kale soup topped with parmesan and basil.

    More Warming Soup Recipes

    Be sure to check out the soup category page for more terrific soup, stew, and chili recipes! Try this recipe for a fast and flavorful chicken rice soup, or the navy bean soup below for a bean and ham soup.

    • chicken tomatillo soup
      Tomatillo Soup (with Chicken or Turkey)
    • Close up of Mexican chicken soup in a white bowl.
      Mexican Chicken Tortilla Soup Recipe
    • Navy bean soup with ham and vegetables.
      Instant Pot Navy Bean Soup Recipe (with ham)
    • Roasted cauliflower soup on a gray bowl with a swirl of bright green pesto, and herbs.
      Creamy Cauliflower Soup with Roasted Garlic

    ⭐️Did You Make This?

    If you make Tuscan white bean soup, please comment and let me know, and if you loved it, please give it a 5 star rating! They really help other readers.

    📖 Recipe

    Gray bowl with bean and kale soup topped with parmesan and basil.

    Tuscan White Bean Soup

    Sally Cameron
    Make this easy, hearty and healthy soup, adding either leftover Thanksgiving turkey or chicken. It's so good, you will want to enjoy it through the winter. Freezes too. See notes at end.
    5 from 1 vote
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 20 minutes mins
    Cook Time 25 minutes mins
    Total Time 45 minutes mins
    Course Soup
    Cuisine American
    Servings 4 to 6/yield 2 quarts
    Calories 300 kcal

    Equipment

    • Large soup pot like a Dutch oven about 5 quarts

    Ingredients
      

    • 2 tablespoons olive oil
    • 1 ¼ cups finely chopped onion 1 medium onion
    • 1 cup finely chopped celery 2-3 ribs
    • 1 cup finely chopped carrot 2-3
    • ½ fennel bulb chopped fine
    • 1 tablespoon fresh chopped thyme or 1 teaspoon dried
    • 2 teaspoons fresh chopped sage or ¾ teaspoon dried
    • 1 teaspoon fennel seed or wild fennel pollen optional
    • 1 large bay leaf
    • 3 garlic cloves, chopped fine or ½ teaspoon of garlic powder.
    • ⅓ cup dry white wine optional
    • 2  15 ounce cans white beans, rinsed and drained Sub cannellini, Navy, White or Great Northern
    • 2 cups leftover shredded chicken or turkey
    • 4 cups low sodium chicken broth or turkey broth
    • ½ bunch tuscan or lacinato kale
    • ½ bunch basil leaves chopped, optional

    Would you like to save this recipe?

    Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

    Instructions
     

    Vegetable Prep Work

    • Chop any vegetables you haven't finished. Strip the center ribs from the kale leaves, roll lengthwise like a cigar and finely chop crosswise. Chop the parsley and basil if using.

    Cooking the Soup

    • In a large heavy pot, heat olive oil over medium heat. Add chopped onion, celery, carrot and fennel. Cook until vegetables are soft, stirring occasionally, 8-10 minutes. Turn heat down to medium-low if needed. Add the garlic, thyme, and sage. Cook another minute. Add wine and cook down until almost gone, about a minute. Add the beans, broth, bay leaf, meat, and kale. Stir together and simmer soup for a few minutes until hot.
    • To serve, stir in parsley and basil leaves (if using). Top with grated parmesan cheese if desired.

    Notes

    Fresh herbs vs. dried herbs. I often use fresh herbs (and grow them), but dried is easier to keep on hand. If fresh herbs are not available, the rule is use half to a third of the amount of dried herbs (they are more potent) versus fresh herbs. Dried herbs also need liquid (like broth) to rehydrate and release their flavor. Ultimately it depends on your taste preferences and the herbs you are working with.
    To thin, add more broth, start with a cup or two.
    See more substitutions and variations in the post.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 300kcalCarbohydrates: 17gProtein: 25gFat: 14gSaturated Fat: 3gPolyunsaturated Fat: 2gMonounsaturated Fat: 8gCholesterol: 53mgSodium: 203mgPotassium: 895mgFiber: 5gSugar: 6gVitamin A: 9038IUVitamin C: 45mgCalcium: 178mgIron: 3mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    Curried Cauliflower Soup

    01/08/2021 by Sally Cameron Leave a Comment

    creamy cauliflower soup

    Curried cauliflower soup is a comforting, easy recipe for chilly days. This golden, velvety soup is naturally gluten-free and dairy-free (or use cream), with its beautiful color and flavor coming from curry powder. Made with just a few simple ingredients, it comes together quickly on the stovetop or mostly hands-off in the Instant Pot.

    curry cauliflower soup | afoodcentriclife.com

    Curried cauliflower soup is one of those recipes that feels both exotic and comforting at the same time. The curry powder does the heavy lifting, giving you layers of flavor without pulling out a dozen spice jars. Pair that with the creaminess of coconut milk (or cream, if you prefer), and you've got a simple soup that tastes like much more effort than it takes.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why You'll Love This Curried Cauliflower Soup

    • Easy and flexible - Mostly hands-off in the Instant Pot, or simmer on the stovetop.
    • Golden and flavorful - Curry powder adds warm spice, depth, and that gorgeous golden color. Use mild or spicy depending on your taste.
    • Creamy but dairy-free - Coconut milk gives the soup a velvety texture without dairy. Prefer classic? Use cream or half-and-half, or try a plant-based cream alternative.
    • Healthy comfort food - Naturally gluten-free, full of vegetables, and satisfying without being heavy.

    For another another easy recipe with curry powder, skip take out and mke this easy creamy coconut curry shrimp.

    Ingredients You'll Need

    curry cauliflower soup | afoodcentriclife.com
    • Coconut oil or olive oil - Either works well as the base for sautéing; coconut oil adds a subtle sweetness that pairs beautifully with curry.
    • Onion - Provides a savory, sweet foundation for the soup.
    • Leek - Milder than onion, it adds a gentle, earthy note.
    • Garlic - Just a little brings warmth and depth of flavor.
    • Curry powder - The star of the recipe, giving golden color and a fragrant spice blend. Choose mild or hot depending on your preference.
    • Cauliflower - Two heads, trimmed into florets; the creamy, nutty base of the soup.
    • Broth - Use chicken broth or vegetable broth (keeps it vegan), homemade is best.
    • Milk - Canned coconut milk makes the soup velvety smooth without dairy
    • Water - To thin as needed and adjust consistency.

    Please see the recipe card for measurements, salt, and either black or white pepper.

    Substitutions and Variations

    • Cauliflower - Fresh florets work best, but frozen cauliflower is a great shortcut. Use the same weight and add directly to the pot.
    • Creaminess - Keep it dairy-free with coconut milk, or swap in half-and-half, heavy cream, or a plant-based cream alternative.

    For another creamy soup with curry powder, try my Butternut Apple Soup.

    Chef's Tip: Choosing Curry Powder
    I've used both purchased curry powder and blended my own, but I was curious how it's used in Indian home kitchens. A friend explained that curry powder is more of a British invention than a traditional Indian spice. Her family sometimes uses it alongside other spices, but they more often reach for blends like garam masala. The takeaway? Indian food is all about the spices. For this soup, choose what works best for you - a store-bought curry powder (mild or spicy), your own custom blend, or garam masala for a slightly different flavor.

    How to Make Curried Cauliflower Soup

    You can make this soup in either your Instant Pot or on the stove top. What's nice about the Instant Pot is that it pretty much hands off and you can walk away.

    Instant Pot Method

    Saute the onion, leek, garlic and spices then add the cauliflower and broth using the "steam" setting (high pressure). It takes about 15 minutes for both the warm up and the cool down phases to get the pot to pressure then release (de-pressure) but just a few actual minutes of cooking.

    curry cauliflower soup | afoodcentriclife.com

    Stove Top Method

    For the stove top,  follow the same direction just do it in a big pot on the stove top. Saute the veggies and when you add the cauliflower and broth florets, bring to a boil, cover with a lid, turn the heat to low and simmer until tender.

    curry cauliflower soup | afoodcentriclife.com

    To Finish the Soup

    For both methods, add the cooked vegetables to a blender and puree with coconut milk or cream. Add water to thin as needed.

    creamy curry cauliflower soup | afoodcentriclife.com

    How to Serve Curried Cauliflower Soup

    This golden, creamy soup makes a beautiful light meal or starter. Pair it with a crisp tossed green salad and a quick homemade orange vinaigrette, then add extra veggies for crunch. Don't skip the garnish - toasted pumpkin seeds (pepitas) add a nutty flavor, great texture, and extra nutrition. A sprinkle of fresh herbs or a side of warm bread makes it even better.

    Storage & Freezing

    • Make ahead: This soup is great to prepare a day ahead. The flavors deepen as it rests, making it even better the next day.
    • Refrigerate: Store leftover soup in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 4 days. Reheat gently on the stovetop over medium-low heat, stirring often.
    • Freezing: Soups with coconut milk or cream don't always freeze perfectly - the texture may separate slightly. The flavor stays good, but it may not be as silky after thawing. If you do freeze it, cool completely first, portion into freezer containers, and freeze for up to 2 months. Thaw overnight in the refrigerator, then re-blend briefly before reheating.

    More Creamy Soups

    Looking for more cozy bowls of comfort? These creamy soup recipes are smooth, flavorful, and easy to make - perfect for chilly nights or when you just need something warm and nourishing.

    • A gray bowl of fennel and white bean soup with olive oil and fried shallots.
      Creamy Fennel Soup With White Beans
    • roasted red pepper soup
      Roasted Red Pepper Soup (sheet pan recipe)
    • A single bowl of tomato soup with a sprig of rfesh thyme leaves and silver spoon.
      Quick Tomato Soup From Canned Tomatoes
    • cream of broccoli soup with sausage
      Cream of Broccoli Soup (dairy free vegan option)

    For other recipes using curry powder try my Quick Shrimp Curry, Quick Chicken Curry, or creamy butternut apple soup. All delicious! And for another plant-based soup try my leek and mushroom soup.

    📖 Recipe

    curry cauliflower soup | afoodcentriclife.com

    Curried Cauliflower Soup

    Sally Cameron
    This creamy, golden (and dairy-free), Indian-inspired soup is easy to make and mostly hands off with an Instant Pot. Make it vegan swapping vegetable broth for chicken broth. For standard stovetop method, see notes at end.
    5 from 1 vote
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 10 minutes mins
    Cook Time 9 minutes mins
    Instant Pot heat up and cool down 30 minutes mins
    Total Time 49 minutes mins
    Course Dinner, lunch, Soup
    Cuisine Indian
    Servings 6 Yield 2 quarts
    Calories 183 kcal

    Equipment

    • Instant Pot (can also be made stove top)

    Ingredients
      

    • 1 tablespoon coconut or olive oil
    • 1 cup chopped onion ½ a large
    • 1 cup chopped leek ½ a large
    • 2 garlic cloves chopped fine
    • 2 teaspoons curry powder
    • ½ teaspoon sea salt
    • ¼ teaspoon black or white pepper
    • 2 medium heads cauliflower trimmed into florets 4 pounds raw, 2 pounds trimmed florets
    • 2 cups chicken broth low to no sodium
    • 1 cup canned coconut milk
    • 1 cup water to thin if needed

    Optional Garnishes

    • 4 tablespoons raw or toasted pumpkin seeds (pepitas)
    • 2 tablespoon chopped cilantro or flat leaf parsley

    Would you like to save this recipe?

    Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

    Instructions
     

    • Add the oil to the Instant Pot and press the saute button. Set timer for 4 minutes. When oil is hot, about 1 minute, add the onion and leek. Saute until soft, stirring occasionally. Add garlic 1 minute before timer is done. Add curry powder, salt and pepper, florets and broth.
      Lock lid on and turn the top valve to close. Press steam button and set timer for 5 minutes. It will take the pressure approximately 15 minutes to get to high. When timer completes, allow the pressure to release naturally for 15 minutes, then release any additional steam by turning the top valve open. When all steam is released, carefully open lid away from face.
    • Place all vegetables and coconut milk into a blender and puree until smooth. If it's too thick, add the water to thin. Pour from the blender into bowls and serve. Garnish if desired. Soup keeps up to 4 days in the refrigerator. Reheat on the stovetop to serve.

    Notes

    To make this without and Instant Pot on the stovetop follow this method:
    Place a large heavy pot like a 5 ½ quart Dutch oven over medium heat. When hot add oil and turn heat down a bit, then add onion and leek. Cook stirring occasionally until veggies are soft, 5-7 minutes. Add garlic and cook 1 more minute. Do not let vegetables brown.
    Add curry powder, salt and pepper, then cauliflower and broth. Cover with a tight fitting lid and bring to a boil, until steam is coming out from under the lid, then turn to low and simmer/steam until cauliflower is very tender, about 20 minutes.
    Place vegetables and coconut milk into a blender and puree smooth.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 183kcalCarbohydrates: 15gProtein: 6gFat: 13gSaturated Fat: 11gSodium: 272mgPotassium: 667mgFiber: 5gSugar: 6gVitamin A: 247IUVitamin C: 73mgCalcium: 60mgIron: 2mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    How to Dry Brine Turkey Tutorial

    11/23/2020 by Sally Cameron 2 Comments

    A brining bag with a whole turkey inside with herb rub on a cutting board.

    Want to make the golden, crisp-skinned Thanksgiving turkey of your dreams? Here's how to dry brine turkey - a simple technique and recipe I've been using for over 25 years. The skin turns beautifully browned and crisp, while the meat stays moist, tender, and full of flavor. Just follow my step-by-step tutorial and you can do this with confidence. Plus, don't miss my best turkey tips - from how much turkey to buy, to making a flavorful compound butter.

    raw turkey on a cutting board ready to dry brine.

    Once you discover dry brining you'll never look back. No more wet brining and dealing with a heavy bucket of brine and bird or the risk of soggy skin. At first I was skeptical because it was so simple. But thanks to legendary food writer and Editor Russ Parsons, I gave it a try. When I pulled that first glorious golden bird from the oven I was amazed. I think you will be too!

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why You'll Love Dry Brining a Turkey

    • It's EASY!
    • The results are terrific.
    • No juggling buckets of wet brine.

    Ingredients You Need

    Ingredients for brining a turkey with salt, citrus, herbs, garlic, and the bird.
    • Turkey: Order a fresh 12-14 pound, no-salt-added raw, turkey, ahead of time to get what you want. See my tips below for how much turkey to buy.
    • Salt: Use kosher sea salt to make the dry brine. See salt notes by brand below as weights vary.
    • Citrus: Fresh lemon and orange because you're after the zest. The zest is where all of the aromatic oils are in citrus fruit.
    • Herbs: Fresh rosemary and thyme. Fresh is better than dried for brining because the herbs are not dehydrated for storage.
    • Garlic: Instead of chopping fine, use the microplane zester. It works great on peeled fresh garlic cloves. Alternatively use a garlic press and chop it fine.

    Please see recipe card for tools and measurements.

    Let's Talk Salt

    As brining is all about salt, let's talk salt brands. Different brands have different weights, which effects the salinity of the brine and your results, and knowing the weights of the salt allows you to adjust for the size of your turkey. My weights below are for a 14-15 pound bird.

    • La Baleine Kosher Sea Salt: 18 g / tablespoon → 3 tablespoon = 54 g, has a fine texture, dissolves well, clean taste. My go-to.
    • Morton Coarse Kosher: 18 g / tablespoon → 3 tablespoon = 54 g, has denser grains, they include an anti-caking agent which tastes a bit sharper, but a good reliable brand.
    • Diamond Crystal Kosher: 11 g / tablespoon → 5 tablespoon = 55 g (≈ 54 g), very light and flaky, so it requires more.

    How to Dry Brine a Turkey

    The amount of salt is based on the weight of the turkey. Follow the chart above, and the notes are also in the recipe card.

    Making the brine, salt and citrus zest.
    Step 1: Zest the citrus.
    Brining ingredients in a pestle for mixing.
    Step 2: Chop herbs and garlic fine, add the zest and the salt to make the rub. Blend them well in a small bowl or grind together in a mortar and pestle.

    Prepare The Turkey

    To dry brine, unwrap the turkey from the original plastic wrap and remove the bag of turkey parts from the larger cavity as well as the tail end. Do this over a rimmed baking sheet or in the sink to catch any raw juices (and remember to sanitize your sink afterwards).

    Trim off excess hanging skin at the tail. Pat the turkey dry inside and out with paper towels.

    Dry brine all ready to go.

    Rub Turkey and Refrigerate

    Rub the turkey with the dry brine blend, concentrating on the legs and breast. Rub a little inside the cavity.

    Place the turkey in a heavy brining bag, seal and refrigerate it. Let it rest for 2-3 days. It should look well seasoned but not overly salted. Give the turkey a quick massage once a day (through the plastic bag) to work in the seasonings.

    A turkey in a brining bag covered with herbs, citrus, and salt on a kitchen counter.

    Drying to Crisp Skin

    On Wednesday afternoon, remove the turkey from the bag and discard the bag. Brush off any excess salt and blot with paper towels. Do not rinse! Place the turkey on a rimmed baking sheet with a wire rack underneath.

    Place the bird on the rack and put it back in the refrigerator uncovered to dry for 12 hours. You might have to adjust your refrigerator shelves. The drying step gives you a crisp skin when roasting.

    How to Roast Turkey

    On Thanksgiving morning, remove the bird from the refrigerator 1 - 1 ½ hours ahead of time and you're ready for roasting. This gets the chill off and the turkey roasts better. Tuck the wings back under the body.

    How Much Turkey Per Person

    If you like leftover turkey for soup, tacos, stews or casseroles, order approximately 1 ½ pounds per person. If you don't want leftovers, figure 1 pound per person.

    I recommend purchasing no more than a 14-15 pound turkey. That serves 8-10 people at 1 ½ pounds per person with leftovers. They are easier to handle and roast than bigger turkey's over that weight range. For more guests, do a second turkey if you have another oven or even just a turkey breast which is smaller and easier to do than a whole bird or a giant bird that's 20 pounds.

    Fresh vs. Frozen Turkey

    I usually order fresh turkey (no thawing, more brining time), but buy what's available and works for your schedule.

    If you buy frozen:
    Plan on 24 hours of refrigerator thawing per 4-5 pounds of turkey. Keep your fridge at 35-40°F (≤40°F is the safety line).

    USDA guidance on timing:
    The USDA recommends cooking a turkey immediately after it's fully thawed. In practice, if your refrigerator is reliably ≤40°F and you're dry brining, many cooks hold the thawed bird up to 1 day before roasting. When in doubt, follow the USDA's conservative guidance and roast as soon as it's thawed.

    If you can, get a fresh bird. It buys you time for a proper dry brine and simplifies the workflow.

    If frozen turkey is your preference:

    • Thaw turkey in the fridge, then dry brine as much time as you have (even 1 day helps).
    • This 2014 article from Russ Parsons says you can brine a frozen turkey, and while I have not tried it, I trust his teaching, so give it a try.

    Cold-water or microwave thawing:
    The cold water method requires you to cook immediately after thawing (no time to brine), so I don't recommend them if brining is part of your plan. And I do not recommend microwave thawing.

    One more label check:
    If the bird is "enhanced," "self-basting," or "contains a solution," skip the brine (it's already salted) and season lightly instead.

    Raw turkey with brine mix in a brining bag.

    Make a Compound Butter for a Turkey

    Mixing butter, herbs, garlic, citrus, and other flavors is called a compound butter. It gives the turkey flavor, moisture, and a crisp golden skin. Make the compound butter ahead of time, it's easy.

    If you'd like the recipe and instructions, please see this post on how to make compound butter for turkey.

    After my bird is brined and dry, I rub this over the top and under the skin before roasting.

    Stuff the Cavity

    For more flavor I stuff the cavity loosely with chopped onion, carrot, celery, whole garlic cloves and more herbs, then loosely tie the legs together with twine (better for roasting).

    Roast the Turkey

    Roast turkey in a roasting pan on a turkey rack to lift the bird off the bottom of the pan. I put more veggies in the bottom and eventually add enough turkey broth to the pan to keep things moist (not burned) and build good drippings for flavorful gravy.

    Last note, I roast turkey at 325°F on the lower rack of the oven and do not turn it. Trying to turn a hot heavy turkey is not safe. Mine always comes out gorgeous without turning.

    Roast until a digital thermometer reads 170°F-175°F when placed in the thickest part of the thigh without touching the bone.

    Rest the Turkey

    After roasting, rest the turkey for at least 20 to 30 minutes after roasting, and up to 45 minutes for larger birds. Resting allows the juices to redistribute throughout the meat, making it moist and flavorful.

    Keep it Covered: Loosely tent the turkey with foil to retain heat without trapping steam, which can soften the skin. Carving too soon will cause the juices to run out, leaving the meat dry.

    Chef's Tips: For tips on getting organized for a smooth Thanksgiving, read this post on my Thanksgiving Game Plan. Wear disposable kitchen prep gloves to keep hands clean when handling raw turkey. Use a microplane zester for very fine zest and wash it right after using.

    Recipe FAQs

    How long should you dry brine turkey?

    About 3 days, but if you only have 2 do it anyway, it still works.

    When should I start dry brining a turkey?

    I start mine on Sunday afternoon or Monday.

    Do you rinse off dry brine on turkey?

    Do not rinse the turkey. You don't want to add any moisture that will inhibit browning for a golden crisp skin. Resist the temptation to rinse. Brush off any dry brine and pat with a paper towel.

    Turkey Side Dish Recipes

    Last note, for ideas on what to serve with your beautiful bird, try these delicious side dishes. If you do this, please let me know in the comments! If you need gluten-free or dairy-free recipes ideas for Thanksgiving, check out this Thanksgiving recipe roundup!

    • Deep red whole berry cranberry sauce in a glass bowl.
      Whole Berry Cranberry Sauce
    • Classic herbed bread stuffing in white casserole ready to serve.
      Gluten Free Thanksgiving Stuffing Recipe
    • lemon thyme brussels sprouts
      Sautéed Brussels Sprouts with Lemon and Thyme
    • thanksgiving green beans
      Super Easy Thanksgiving Green Beans

    ⭐️Did You Make This?

    If you dry brine your turkey, please comment and let me know, and if you loved it, please give it a ⭐️ rating! They really help other readers.

    📖 Recipe

    A whole fresh turkey in a brining bag on a cutting board.

    How to Dry Brine Turkey

    Sally Cameron
    Dry brining a turkey is an easy technique that gives you a crisp golden crust and moist delicious meat, and it's easier then wet brining with great results. Follow these directions and start early, Sunday if you can, Monday at the latest. Please see the salt brand notes at the end.
    5 from 2 votes
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 30 minutes mins
    Resting TIme 3 days d
    Total Time 3 days d 30 minutes mins
    Course Dinner
    Cuisine American
    Servings 8
    Calories 737 kcal

    Equipment

    • A large heavy closable brining bag
    • Wire rack (smaller bird on quarter sheet and larger on half sheet) for drying on Wednesday
    • Enough room in your refrigerator
    • Rimmed baking sheet quarter or half sized

    Ingredients
      

    Dry Brine

    • 3-5 tablespoons Kosher sea salt, depending on brand See brand notes below for volume
    • 1 ½ tablespoons fresh chopped rosemary
    • 1 ½ tablespoons fresh chopped thyme leaves
    • 1 large orange, zested
    • 1 large lemon, zested
    • 2 garlic cloves, chopped

    Turkey

    • 14-15 pound fresh turkey
    • ½ stick UNSALTED butter dairy or plant-based, for roasting

    Would you like to save this recipe?

    Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

    Instructions
     

    Make the Dry Brine

    • Add the salt, rosemary, thyme, citrus zests and garlic to a mortar. Using the pestle, grind the mixture together to create the rub. See post photo for example if needed. If you do not have a mortar and pestle, you can use a small clean coffee/spice grinder or mash all of the ingredients together in a small bowl until well mixed and fine, or use a mini food processor.

    Dry Brine the Turkey (2-3 days)

    • Remove the turkey from the plastic covering over a sink or on a rimmed baking sheet to cartch any raw juices. Rinse the turkey under cool water and pat dry with paper towels. Place the turkey in a large heavy plastic brining bag. Reach in with your hand and sprinkle the rub over the turkey concentrating on the breast and legs, then sprinkle a little inside the cavity. The turkey should look well seasoned but not overly salted. Seal the bag well. Place on a clean rimmed baking sheet and place in the refrigerator for 2-3 days, massaging the rub into the turkey once a day.

    Wednesday, Drying the Turkey

    • The day before roasting (Wednesday for Thankgiving) remove the turkey from the bag and discard. Brush off the salt rub and pat dry with paper towels. Place the brined turkey on a wire rack positined on a rimmed baking sheet and dry the bird uncovered in the refrigerator overnight. T

    Thursday Roasting

    • Thursday, the day of roasting, remove the turkey from the refrigerator 1-1 ½ hours before roasting to get the chill off then proceed with roasting.

    Notes

    To calculate the dry rub for a larger or smaller turkey, use 1 tablespoon of kosher sea salt for every 5 pounds of turkey and adjust the herbs and other ingredients up or down.
    For how to roast the turkey and the additional vegetables and broth you will need, please read the post. Extra onion, carrot, celery, herbs, citrus, garlic.
    Compound Turkey Butter Recipe (optional before roasting)
    Brining is all about salt, so accuracy matters more than the brand name on the box. I measured my three go-to salts on a digital scale — La Baleine Kosher Sea Salt, Morton Coarse Kosher, and Diamond Crystal Kosher Salt Flakes, and here’s the weight per tablespoon for your guidance:
    • La Baleine Kosher Sea Salt: 18 g / tablespoon → 3 tablespoon = 54 g (fine texture, dissolves well).
    • Morton Coarse Kosher: 18 g / tablespoon → 3 tablespoon = 54 g (denser grains, same weight as La Baleine).
    • Diamond Crystal Kosher: 11 g / tablespoon → 5 tablespoon = 55 g (≈ 54 g) (very light and flaky, needs more).
     

    Nutrition

    Calories: 737kcalCarbohydrates: 1gProtein: 105gFat: 33gSaturated Fat: 11gPolyunsaturated Fat: 7gMonounsaturated Fat: 10gTrans Fat: 1gCholesterol: 363mgSodium: 2722mgPotassium: 1102mgFiber: 0.5gSugar: 0.3gVitamin A: 527IUVitamin C: 5mgCalcium: 67mgIron: 4mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    Cauliflower Colcannon with Kale

    03/13/2017 by Sally Cameron Leave a Comment

    cauliflower colcannon

    A classic Irish dish, colcannon is rich, buttery mashed potatoes mixed with tender cabbage or kale. This lighter, low-carb twist swaps potatoes for cauliflower, keeping all the creamy, comforting flavor while making it a healthier option. Perfect for St. Patrick's Day or any time you're craving a cozy, satisfying side, try this cauliflower colcannon with kale.

    A bowl of cauliflower colcannon with kale and butter.

    Who doesn't love real mashed potatoes? My husband might live on them if I let him. If you want to reduce starchy carbs or just change things up, try this cauliflower colcannon. Cauliflower stands in for traditional mashed potatoes for a healthy and delicious twist on traditional Irish colcannon.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why You'll Like This Recipe

    • A good way to get more veggies on the table.
    • Tastes terrific.
    • A twist on a traditional recipe using cauliflower.

    For another easy Irish-inspired recipe for St. Patrick's Day, make a loaf of this Irish soda bread. It's gluten-free too.

    Recipe Ingredients

    • Cauliflower: Buy a large head of head cauliflower or 24 ounces of bagged florets.
    • Kale: Look for Tuscan or Lacinato kale with the larger, flatter leaves.
    • Onions: Go with green onions or scallions.
    • Garlic: Pick up a head of fresh garlic or try the puree in a tube for speed.
    • Milk: Use half and half or canned coconut milk for no-dairy.
    • Butter: Use unsalted grass-fed butter or clarified butter (note below).

    Please see the recipe card for measurements, salt and pepper. For another terrific recipe with cauliflower, try this smooth and creamy cauliflower soup.

    Substitutions and Variations

    • Don't like kale? Swap baby spinach.
    • Use dairy heavy cream for a rich indulgence.
    • Swap plant butter for dairy butter or use extra virgin olive oil.
    • Add garlic and green onions for more savory flavor.

    Chef's tip: Clarified Butter is lightly heated until the milk solids separate and are then strained out. It has a mild, clean butter flavor and a higher smoke point (good for higher heat cooking) than regular butter. Many dairy-sensitive people tolerate clarified butter (and ghee which is cook longer) because the milk solids (whey and casein) are removed during the clarifying process. This makes them a good option for those with lactose intolerance or casein sensitivity. While you can buy it, here is how to make homemade clarified butter.

    Recipe Instructions

    Trim a head of cauliflower to just the florets. In a pinch, you can use 24 ounces of bagged florets, but it's easy to do yourself and fresher. For the kale, strip tough center stems with your hands, then chop the leaves into small pieces.

    Cauliflower florets in a steamer rack in a pot.
    Step 1: Place the cauliflower florets into a steamer basket and steam until soft, 8-10 minutes.
    Steamed kale ribbons in a steamer bakset.
    Step 2: Cook kale ribbons in butter with onion until soft.
    Cauliflower colcannon | AFoodCentricLife.com
    Step 3: Puree the cauliflower and garlic cloves in a food processor, then add the steamed kale ribbons and pulse a few times to refine the texture.
    Cauliflower colcannon | AFoodCentricLife.com

    Serving Suggestions

    Cauliflower puree loses its temperature quickly. To serve this hot, either mix and place the bowl in a warm oven or microwave for a few minutes until hot again for serving.

    To make cauliflower colcannon ahead of time, completely make the dish and store in the refrigerator in an airtight container for up to 4 days. Reheat in either a microwave oven or in a 350°F oven until heated through to 165°F. It will take awhile if it's very cold straight out of the refrigerator.

    Optionally, if you enjoy Parmesan cheese, add a little grated to the colcannon before serving. It's not traditionally Irish, but it sure tastes good!

    Recipe FAQs

    What are the traditional ingredients in colcannon?

    Traditional ingredients for Irish colcannon include potatoes, butter, and kale or green cabbage, but spinach can be swapped for the greens. Garlic and onions add flavor. Enjoy it not just on St. Patrick's Day but year round for a savory side dish.

    Is colcannon gluten-free/dairy-free/vegan?

    Colcannon is easily made dairy-free or vegan, and is naturally gluten-free. To make colcannon dairy-free or vegan, skip the dairy butter and substitute a good plant-butter or extra virgin olive oil.

    How do you serve colcannon?

    Colcannon is delicious served as a side dish with savory meat dishes such as corned beef or roast chicken. It's also a great side dish for roast salmon.

    More Savory Side Dish Recipes

    Whether St. Patrick's Day or every day, here are a few terrific side dishes and a side dish recipe index for you to peruse for more ideas.

    • braised cabbage in a bowl
      Sauteed Cabbage Recipe
    • Golden baked loaf of Irish soda bread, sliced on a white plate.
      Easy Gluten-Free Irish Soda Bread
    • Baby dutch yellow potatoes wtih herbs and Parmesan cheese.
      Buttery Baby Dutch Yellow Potatoes
    • roasted carrots with thyme
      Maple Roasted Carrots (Easy Glazed Carrots Recipe)

    ⭐️Did You Make This Recipe?

    If you make this recipe, please comment, and let me know. I appreciate the feedback and enjoy hearing from you. If you loved it, please give it a 5 star rating! They really help other readers.

    📖 Recipe

    Cauliflower colcannon | AFoodCentricLife.com

    Cauliflower Colcannon

    Sally Cameron
    Cauliflower replaces potatoes in this traditional Irish side dish for a lower-carb, healthier version. I use good Irish pastured butter, you can use ghee, olive oil, or plant-based butter to make it vegan and for those who are dairy-sensitive. Leftovers reheat well.  Serve with roast salmon or chicken. 
    5 from 1 vote
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 10 minutes mins
    Cook Time 15 minutes mins
    Total Time 25 minutes mins
    Course Side Dish
    Cuisine American
    Servings 4 to 6
    Calories 230 kcal

    Equipment

    • Food Processor

    Ingredients
      

    • 1 head cauliflower 2 pounds, or 24 ounces bagged florets
    • 1 bunch Tuscan or Lacinato kale
    • 3 green onions or scallions
    • 4 large garlic cloves peeled
    • ¾ cup canned coconut milk
    • 2-3 tablespoons unsalted grass-fed butter, ghee, plant butter divided use
    • ¼ teaspoon sea salt
    • ¼ teaspoon ground pepper, preferably white

    Would you like to save this recipe?

    Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

    Instructions
     

    • Trim the head of cauliflower into florets; discard center stem. Strip the stem from the kale leaves with your hands, then chop the leaves into small pieces. Chop green onions fine. Save a few of the green tops for garnish and use the rest when cooking. 
    • Fill a large pot (5 quarts) with a few inches of water, add a steamer rack inside and place a lid on top. Over medium high heat, bring the water to a boil with steam coming out of top. Place the cauliflower florets and garlic cloves into the steamer rack and steam until very soft, 8-10 minutes. While the cauliflower is steaming, melt 1 tablespoon of butter in a medium sauté pan. Add the green onions and kale and cook until soft, about 4 minutes.
    • Drain florets and add to the bowl of a food processor with a steel knife. Puree the cauliflower and garlic cloves with the coconut milk and 1 tablespoon butter until fairly smooth. 
    • Add the cauliflower puree and kale to a bowl and stir together. Add salt and pepper. Serve hot. Finish with one last tablespoon of butter if desired. If the colcannon has cooled down, microwave to heat or place in a warm oven while you are finishing the meal. For a more refined colcannon, add the kale to the food processor and pulse. 

    Notes

    Variations:

    • Don't like kale? Swap baby spinach.
    • Use dairy heavy cream for a rich indulgence.
    • Swap plant butter for dairy butter or use extra virgin olive oil.
    • Add garlic and green onions for more savory flavor.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 230kcalCarbohydrates: 17gProtein: 7gFat: 17gSaturated Fat: 13gCholesterol: 15mgSodium: 273mgPotassium: 916mgFiber: 4gSugar: 4gVitamin A: 7008IUVitamin C: 154mgCalcium: 152mgIron: 3mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    Pumpkin Chocolate Chip Cake (Snack Cake)

    10/02/2013 by Sally Cameron 5 Comments

    Pumpkin snack cake with chocolate chips.

    This pumpkin chocolate chip cake is the kind of dessert you'll want on repeat all fall. Simply mix, pour, and bake - no frosting required. Warm spices highlight the pumpkin, chocolate chips add little bursts of indulgence, and the texture is moist and tender without being heavy. Best of all, it's gluten-free, though no one will ever guess.

    Pumpkin chocolate chip snack cake

    It was hard to know what to call this recipe - pumpkin chocolate chip cake, pumpkin brownies, or even a snack cake. Whatever the name, just make a batch and enjoy. This fall favorite is easy, delicious, and comes together with a simple mix, pour, and bake. No frosting required. Bonus! It's a make-ahead pumpkin cake and freezes great!

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why You'll Love This Pumpkin Chocolate Chip Cake

    • So easy - Just mix, pour, and bake. One bowl, one pan, no fuss.
    • Naturally gluten-free - Wholesome ingredients, no special flour blends.
    • Perfectly spiced - Full of warm fall spices.
    • No frosting needed - Moist, tender, and sweet enough on its own.
    • Chocolate meets pumpkin - The chips melt into pockets of richness in every bite for a moist pumpkin cake.

    For another easy, terrific pumpkin dessert, make this pumpkin mousse.

    Ingredients You'll Need

    pumpkin snack cake ingredients.
    • Flour - For a gluten-free pumpkin cake, use an all-purpose, gluten-free flour blend. I use King Arthur, but other blends should work.
    • Baking powder - Choose aluminum-free and always and check the expiration date.
    • Spices - The fall classics: cinnamon, allspice, and clove.
    • Eggs - Provide structure, richness, and moisture.
    • Pumpkin - Use canned pumpkin purée (100% pumpkin), not pumpkin pie mix.
    • Maple syrup - Go for the real deal. Dark maple adds a more robust flavor.
    • Oil - Coconut oil, avocado oil, or a healthy vegetable oil.
    • Vanilla - Extract or paste both work, here is my favorite brand of vanilla.
    • Chocolate chips - Semi-sweet or dark chips, and sugar-free too.

    Please see the recipe card for measurements.

    Here's another way to use chocolate chips, in these Forgotten Cookies (aka chocolate chip meringues).

    Substitutions and Variations

    • Chocolate chips - To reduce sugar, choose no-sugar varieties. I like stevia-sweetened chips or newer date-sweetened chips with no refined sugar. (I avoid erythritol-based brands due to recent studies.) You can also leave out the chocolate chips entirely, though they add a delicious twist.
    • Flour - If you're not gluten-free, regular all-purpose white flour works in place of a gluten-free blend.
    • Frosting (optional) - This cake doesn't need it, but a simple cream cheese frosting can dress it up for a more dessert-style presentation.
    • Add-ins - Stir in chopped pecans or walnuts for extra texture.

    Here's another recipe with pumpkin, this time a fantastic, super easy soup; pumpkin black bean soup, one of my most shared soup recipes.

    How to Make This Easy Pumpkin Cake

    Gather all ingredients and a 9″ square metal non-stick baking pan. Pre-heat oven to 325°F. Spray the pan and line bottom the line with piece of parchment paper that is long enough to go above the sides of the pans like wings. This make the cake easy to remove from the pan after baking. Mix the batter by hand or with an electric hand mixer.

    Chef's tip: When you measure flour, don't scoop from the bag. Reach into the bag or canister with a large spoon and fill the measuring cup, then level it off. Seems silly but there is a difference and it might effect your results. Another way I do it is to stir and aerate the flour bag (or canister), then scoop.

    Mixing bowl with pumpkin puree and eggs for pumpkin cake batter.
    1. Add the wet ingredients (eggs, pumpkin, oil, vanilla, maple) to a medium bowl and whisk smooth.
    Bowl with pumpkin snack cake batter and a whisk for mixking.
    1. Add the dry ingredients (flour, soda and powder, spices, salt) to a medium bowl and whisk to combine. Add the dry ingredients to the wet ingredients and whisk until smooth.
    Batter mixed with chocolate chips
    1. Fold in the chocolate chips.
    Cake batter in pan ready to bake.
    1. Pour the batter into the pan and bake about 45 minutes. The cake is done when it is golden and firm to the touch, and a toothpick or cake tester comes out almost clean when inserted into the center of the cake.
    pumpkin cake on cooling rack.

    Serving Suggestions

    • Everyday treat - Enjoy a square as an afternoon snack or after-school bite.
    • Fall dessert - Serve warm with a scoop of vanilla ice cream or a dollop of whipped cream.
    • Holiday spread - Cut into neat squares and add to a dessert tray alongside cookies and bars.
    • Coffee break - Perfect with your morning coffee or afternoon tea.

    Pumpkin's not just for dessert! Try this delicious pumpkin pie smoothie for breakfast!

    Storage & Freezing Pumpkin Cake

    Freezer - Wrap individual squares tightly in plastic wrap, then place in a freezer bag or airtight container. Freeze for up to 2 months. Thaw at room temperature before serving.

    Room temperature - Store pumpkin chocolate chip cake in an airtight container at room temperature for up to 3 days (though it usually disappears faster!).

    Refrigerator - For longer storage, refrigerate for up to 5 days. Bring to room temperature before serving for the best texture.

    Squares of pumpkin brownies with chocolate chips on a white cake stand.

    Recipe FAQs

    Can I make pumpkin chocolate chip cake ahead of time?

    Yes. Bake the cake, let it cool completely, and store covered at room temperature for up to 3 days or in the fridge for up to 5 days.

    Can I freeze pumpkin chocolate chip cake?

    Absolutely. Wrap cooled slices tightly and freeze for up to 2 months. Thaw at room temperature before serving.

    What kind of chocolate chips work best?

    Semi-sweet chocolate chips are classic, but dark or milk chocolate work too. For less sugar, try stevia- or date-sweetened chips.

    Can I make this recipe without gluten-free flour?

    Yes. If you don't need it gluten-free, use regular all-purpose flour in place of the gluten-free blend.

    More Terrific Fall Recipes

    Try this savory pumpkin polenta with chicken sausage for a hearty dinner. If dessert sounds better, try this pumpkin tart with a press-in cookie type crust.

    • Gluten-free brownies with melted chocolate in a square pan after baking.
      Fudgy Gluten-Free Chocolate Brownies
    • Creamy orange pumpkin pie smoothie in a glass with a silver straw.
      Pumpkin Smoothie (Healthy & Easy)
    • A glass of creamy pumpkin mousse dusted with cinnamon with a gold spoon.
      Pumpkin Mousse (Easy No-Bake Dessert)
    • apple pecan coffee cake on cake stand
      Gluten-Free Apple Cake

    ⭐️Did You Make This?

    If you make this pumpkin cake, please comment and let me know, and if you loved it, please give it a 5 star rating! They really help other readers.

    📖 Recipe

    Squares of pumpkin brownies with chocolate chips on a white cake stand.

    Pumpkin Chocolate Chip Cake

    Sally Cameron
    This pumpkin cake is easy to bake making a nice fall snack or dessert. Parchment in the bottom of the pan makes them easy to remove after baking for cooling. For a dessert garnish, serve with a dollop of vanilla whipped cream on the side. If you want big pieces, slice into 9 squares.
    5 from 1 vote
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 15 minutes mins
    Cook Time 45 minutes mins
    cooling 10 minutes mins
    Total Time 1 hour hr 10 minutes mins
    Course Dessert
    Cuisine American
    Servings 12
    Calories 291 kcal

    Equipment

    • 9″ square metal non-stick baking pan
    • Parchment paper
    • digital kitchen scale optional

    Ingredients
      

    Dry Ingredients

    • 2 ½ cups  gluten-free flour blend 13 ounces, Bob's Red Mill blue bag 1:1 GF blend
    • 2 teaspoons baking powder aluminum free
    • 2 teaspoons ground cinnamon
    • ¾ teaspoon baking soda
    • ½ teaspoon salt
    • ¼ teaspoon allspice
    • ⅛ teaspoon ground clove

    Wet Ingredients

    • 2 large eggs
    • 15 ounces canned pumpkin puree not pumpkin pie filling
    • ¾ cup real maple syrup
    • ½ cup extra virgin coconut oil, melted or use a healthy neutral oil, see note at end
    • 2 teaspoons vanilla extract

    Chocolate Chips

    • ⅔ cup chocolate chips

    Would you like to save this recipe?

    Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

    Instructions
     

    Get Ready to Bake

    • Pre-heat oven to 325°F. Gather all ingredients and a 9″ square metal non-stick baking pan. Spray the pan and line bottom with piece of parchment paper that is long enough to go above the sides of the pans like wings. This make the cake easy to remove from the pan after baking.

    Mix Ingredients

    • Combine flour, baking powder, baking soda, spices and salt in a medium bowl and whisk to combine well. In a large bowl, add eggs, pumpkin, maple syrup, oil and vanilla. Whisk until smooth.

    Combine and Pour into Pan

    • Add wet ingredients into dry and whisk or stir until smooth. Stir in chocolate chips. Pour cake batter into baking pan and smooth the top with a flexible spatula. Bake approximately 45 minutes or until golden and a toothpick inserted in the center comes out clean with a few moist crumbs.
    • Cool cake in pan for 10 minutes. Remove cake to a wire cooling rack using the parchment "wings". Enjoy warm or cool.

    Notes

    Chocolate chip tips

    I used Lily's Dark Chocolate Baking Chips. They are no-sugar-added and gluten-free. They are delicious and a great way to reduce overall sugar in the recipe and taste terrific. Compared to using regular chocolate chips such as Tollhouse, using Lily's reduces the overall sugar by 68 grams, about 8 grams per piece (that's 2 teaspoons).
    Do what ever works best for your family when it comes to buying chocolate chips. There are many options on the market these days.

    Oil

    If you are allergic to coconut oil, I recommend this healthy neutral oil cultured from sugar can grass, called Zero Acre Farms. It's become an regular culinary oil in my kitchen. Way better for you than industrially produced vegetable oil. Another option is avocado oil which has a neutral taste.

    Nutrition

    Serving: 1pieceCalories: 291kcalCarbohydrates: 42gProtein: 4gFat: 14gSaturated Fat: 10gPolyunsaturated Fat: 0.5gMonounsaturated Fat: 1gTrans Fat: 0.003gCholesterol: 31mgSodium: 252mgPotassium: 162mgFiber: 4gSugar: 20gVitamin A: 5561IUVitamin C: 2mgCalcium: 103mgIron: 2mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    Easy Chicken Parmesan Cutlets

    10/27/2023 by Sally Cameron 45 Comments

    A plate of crispy golden chicken parmesan with pasta sauce and cheese.

    If you love chicken Parmesan, these easy Chicken Parmesan Cutlets are a faster, lighter way to enjoy the classic. Thin chicken cutlets are dusted with flour (gluten or all purpose flour), pan-seared until golden, topped with marinara and Italian cheeses, then briefly baked until bubbly. They're ready in about 30 minutes and perfect for an easy weeknight dinner.

    A white platter of chicken parmesan with red sauce and sprinkles of cheese.

    This chicken Parmesan cutlets recipe is not the classic breaded version, but it delivers all the flavor with less work. Instead of a three-step breading station, the chicken is simply dusted with flour, pan-seared, topped with pasta sauce and Italian cheeses, then baked until melted. It's built from two favorite basics: golden chicken cutlets and my easy 30-minute pasta sauce, which I make ahead and freeze.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Chicken Parmesan Cutlets Recipe Highlights

    • Chicken parmesan is an easy, family pleasing recipe.
    • It's a lighter faster way to make chicken parmesan; no heavy breading,
    • No frying, no pounding, and a lot less dishes than the chicken parmesan traditional recipe.

    For another fast and easy recipe using boneless, skinless chicken breasts, try this chicken salsa verde. Use a jarred sauce or homemade.

    Ingredients You'll Need

    For chicken parmesan cutlets, here is what you need.

    Ingredients for chicken parmesan on the counter.
    • Chicken breasts: choose boneless chicken breasts. Buy them by weight versus by the the piece. Choose big ones as they will be sliced in half horizontally to make cutlets (1 ½ pounds for 2 chicken breasts).
    • Seasoning: sea salt, ground black pepper, and granulated garlic or powdered garlic.
    • Flour: Instead of a breadcrumb mixture, all you need is flour for a light crispy crust. For gluten-free choose coconut flour, brown rice flour, cassava flour, or GF blend. If you are not GF, I like white wheat all purpose flour. Choose what works for you.
    • Cooking fat: extra-virgin olive oil or butter. The combination of the two is nice.
    • Cheeses: for speed use pre-grated or shredded mozzarella cheese. For the Parmesan cheese, get a chunk of the real deal and grate it fresh, or get a container of fresh grated. Not the powdered stuff. You can use fresh mozzarella but it is harder to grate as it's very soft.
    • Sauce: use your favorite rich homemade tomato sauce or good store-bought sauce.
    • Herbs: fresh chopped basil, oregano, or parsley for garnish and flavor.

    Please see the recipe card for quantities and seasoning like salt, pepper, and garlic powder.

    Chef's Tip: Buying boneless, skinless chicken breasts. If the chicken breasts are small and not big enough to slice into cutlets, do this instead. With the smooth side of a meat mallet or pounder, gently pound the chicken breasts to a thinner, more even thickness. They might take a few extra minutes of cooking but not much longer. For a more detailed explanation, see this grilled chicken post.

    Substitutions and Variations

    • Other cheeses - Use other Italian cheeses or non-Italian cheeses for a twist on the traditional. Look for cheese that will grate and melt well. Swap Monterey jack for mozzarella. Also try a grated packaged Italian cheese blend
    • Use other sauces - Crispy chicken cutlets can be topped with other sauces such as green enchilada sauce for a Mexican twist (with jack cheese), a tropical pineapple mango salsa, and many others. Chicken cutlets make a terrific basic recipe.

    How to Make Chicken Parmesan Cutlets

    Pre-heat your broiler or oven to finish and melt the cheese at the end before serving.

    Slicing a boneless, skinless chicken breast in half horizontally for a cutlet.
    Step 1: Create chicken cutlets. Do tenders separately or save for another use.
    A chicken breast being sliced into half for a cutlet with a thin sharp knife.
    Step 2: Slice all of the way through the chicken breast creating two equal halves.
    Seasoned and floured chicken breast halves ready to saute in olive oil.
    Step 3: Season and flour the chicken cutlets.
    Melting butter and olive oil in a frying pan.
    Step 4: Melt the olive oil and butter together in a large skillet.
    Cooking chicken cutlets in a stainless steel fry pan.
    Step 5: When the fat is hot, add the cutlets. nicer side down first.
    Golden chicken cutlets cooking in a skillet.
    Step 6: Cook until the cutlets are golden brown, then turn them over.
    A foil lined baking tray with chicken cutlets, red pasta sauce and cheese.
    Step 7: Place chicken breasts on the aluminum foil covered sheet pan, spoon sauce and sprinkle cheese on top of the chicken and broil.

    Chef's Tips:

    • Slice the chicken breasts in half horizontally. A sharp, thin slicing knife makes it easy.
    • Season the chicken, not the flour, for better control over your seasoning.
    • Before cooking, gently shake off excess flour. A light dusting gives the chicken a golden color, crisp texture, and toasty flavor.

    Serving Suggestions

    Serve chicken parmesan cutlets with a side of steamed broccoli, broccolini, green beans, zucchini noodles, or your favorite pasta and a simple green salad with this easy homemade Italian dressing. A little garlic bread is good too. And be sure to serve extra sauce on the side. For garnish use a little chopped fresh Italian parsley or fresh basil leaves.

    Storage and Freezing

    Store leftover chicken Parmesan cutlets in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 3 days. Reheat in a 350°F oven or toaster oven until hot and the cheese is melted again. The microwave works, but the coating may soften.

    To freeze, cool completely, then freeze the cutlets with the sauce and cheese on top. The texture won't be quite as crisp after thawing, but extra sauce helps protect the chicken and keeps it moist. Thaw overnight in the refrigerator, then place on a foil-lined baking sheet and bake at 350°F until hot.

    Jars of homemade pasta sauce ready to use. Freezes well.

    More Chicken Recipes

    And for a few more Italian-inspired recipes ideas try lemon garlic shrimp scampi or these braised Italian chicken thighs.

    • A platter of sliced glazed teriyaki chicken with broccoli, carrots and zucchini.
      Baked Teriyaki Chicken Thighs
    • Creamy Chicken with Gravy
    • Golden baked chicken breasts on the dinner table.
      Roast Split Chicken Breast
    • A round pan of golden chicken thighs in red sauce with rosemary on the side.
      One Pan Italian Chicken Thighs

    ⭐️If You Make Chicken Parmesan Cutlets

    If you make this recipe, please comment and let me know, and if you loved it, please give it a 5 star rating! They really help other readers.

    📖 Recipe

    A plate of crispy golden chicken parmesan with pasta sauce and cheese.

    Easy Chicken Parmesan Cutlets

    Sally Cameron
    A family classic made easy with quick cooking chicken cutlets, pasta sauce and Italian cheeses. Takes about 30 minutes. Serve with pasta noodles or zucchini noodles, a side of green vegetables or a leafy green salad.
    5 from 3 votes
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 15 minutes mins
    Cook Time 20 minutes mins
    Total Time 35 minutes mins
    Course Entree, Main Course
    Cuisine American, Italian
    Servings 4
    Calories 403 kcal

    Equipment

    • Large 12" fry pan
    • Rimmed baking sheet broiler safe

    Ingredients
      

    • 1 ½ pounds boneless, skinless chicken breasts get two large ones if possible
    • ½ teaspoon sea salt
    • ¼ teaspoon ground black pepper
    • ¼ teaspoon granulated garlic or garlic powder
    • ½ cup flour of choice wheat, coconut, cassava, brown rice or GF blend. They all work.
    • 2 tablespoons olive oil
    • 1 tablespoon unsalted butter
    • 1 ½ cups homemade pasta sauce or favorite store brand
    • 4 tablespoons grated Parmesan cheese
    • ⅓ cup grated or shredded mozzarella or Italian blend
    • 1 tablespoon fresh chopped basil, oregano or parsley optional garnish

    Would you like to save this recipe?

    Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

    Instructions
     

    Set-up

    • Pre-heat the broiler and place the rack on the level below the top, heat the sauce, line a baking sheet with foil.

    Slice cutlets

    • Place the chicken breasts flat on your cutting surface with the rounded, smooth side facing up. Trim any tenders and set aside to cook with the cutlets or freeze for later use. Place the palm of your hand on the chicken breast. Slice the chicken breasts into equal halves horizontally, keeping your knife parallel to the cutting board (see photos in post). Be careful about starting your knife in the middle so the bottom piece does not come out too thin.

    Season cutlets

    • Season both sides of the chicken with salt, pepper and garlic. Sprinkle flour over the chicken and lightly coat both sides. Shake off excess.

    Cook cutlets

    • Heat a large 12" saute or fry pan over medium heat. Add olive oil and butter. When it's bubbling and hot, add chicken cutlets, smooth side down first. Allow the cutlets to cook until they are golden.
      You can tell when they are almost ready to turn as the edges start to get white. Turn the cutlets and cook another minute or two, depending on how thick the cutlets are. When done, they will feel firm to the touch but still give just a little.

    Finish and serve

    • Pre-heat the broiler on high and fit the rack on the second down from the top. Place cooked cutlets on a foil lined baking sheet in a single layer. Top with sauce and cheeses. Broil briefly until cheese melts. Top with fresh herbs and serve. Serve any extra sauce on the side.

    Notes

    My thirty minute homemade sauce (marinara sauce or spaghetti sauce) is made from things you probably have in your pantry, like canned tomatoes, tomato sauce, onion, garlic and dried herbs. I make a larger batch and freeze it in small jars to thaw for a quick dinner. It works for pasta dishes and nicely for this chicken parmesan.
    Substitutes for Mozzarella: cheeses that will melt well and grate well. Provolone is an alternative as is a young, mild white Cheddar (versus aged cheddar with a strong flavor). Try Swiss cheese or Monterey Jack, but the flavor will be a bit different than traditional Mozzarella.
    For a Parmesan alternative: try Asiago cheese, Pecorino (sharper and saltier), Piave (younger than parmesan), or Grana Padano (milder than pecorino, less crumbly).
    All can give you a fun twist on tradition while still making a delicious meal.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 403kcalCarbohydrates: 17gProtein: 42gFat: 19gSaturated Fat: 6gPolyunsaturated Fat: 2gMonounsaturated Fat: 8gTrans Fat: 0.1gCholesterol: 128mgSodium: 1071mgPotassium: 929mgFiber: 3gSugar: 4gVitamin A: 728IUVitamin C: 10mgCalcium: 126mgIron: 2mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    Bison Bolognese(Ground Bison Meat Sauce)

    10/04/2015 by Sally Cameron 24 Comments

    bison bolognese with pasta

    Pasta with a hearty meat sauce is a timeless favorite, and this bison bolognese is a flavorful twist on the classic. While traditional bolognese is made with ground beef, veal, pork, or a combination, this version uses lean, protein-rich ground bison. It's not a traditional bolognese, but it's rich, hearty, and packed with flavor-perfect for a healthier take on a meaty marinara. Pick up some ground bison and give it a try, and extra freezes beautifully.

    bison bolognese with pasta

    We eat a lot of chicken and turkey, so my first test of this recipe was with ground turkey. While it was very good (and you can certainly use dark meat turkey), I wanted something different. Something richer. Bison was just the thing.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why You'll love Bison Bolognese

    • Lean & healthy - Made with ground bison, lower in fat than beef but still rich in flavor.
    • A lighter alternative - A fresh take on classic Bolognese.
    • Freezer-friendly - Doubles well, freezes beautifully, and reheats great.
    • Easy to make - Simple steps and pantry staples; most of the cooking is hands-off.

    Chef's tip: Bison is a leaner choice compared ground beef and a healthy choice for meat eaters that you can find at most markets. Another health benefit, bison are raised on pasture, not in feedlots or on factory farms. If you want to swap bison and use ground beef, use pasture raised beef as the best choice.

    Ingredients You'll Need

    • Extra virgin olive oil - For sautéing the vegetables and building flavor.
    • Onion, celery, and carrot - The classic soffritto base that gives depth and sweetness.
    • Garlic - Adds aromatic punch.
    • Italian herb blend - Use a dried mix, or substitute basil, oregano, thyme, or rosemary.
    • Bay leaf - A gentle herbal note that balances the richness.
    • Ground bison - Leaner than beef but still flavorful; healthier and a bit lighter.
    • Dry white wine (optional) - Adds acidity and complexity; substitute broth if preferred.
    • Canned tomatoes - You'll need whole tomatoes or crushed, and diced as well.
    • Tomato paste - For concentrated flavor and body.
    • Nutmeg - Classic in Bolognese, adds warmth and depth.
    • Milk - Traditionally includes whole milk, added for its ability to tenderize the meat, mellow the acidity of tomatoes, and give the sauce a rich, velvety, and complex flavor and texture.
    • Red pepper flakes - Optional kick of heat; adjust to taste.

    Please see the recipe card for measurements, salt and pepper.

    Bison Bolognese Meat Sauce|AFoodCentricLife.com
    Chopped carrots, onion, and celery on marble counter.

    Chef's tip on tomatoes - High-quality canned tomatoes make the best base for this sauce. I like a mix of crushed or whole tomatoes plus diced for texture. If you can find certified San Marzano tomatoes, they're worth it for their natural sweetness, fewer seeds, and low acidity, but good canned plum or whole peeled tomatoes work well too.

    Substitutions and Variations

    • Ground meat - If bison isn't available, substitute ground beef, turkey, or chicken. Choose 85-90% lean for best flavor.
    • Dairy-free option - Use diluted canned coconut milk in place of whole milk. It adds richness without dairy (and won't taste "coconut-y" once simmered).
    • Wine substitute - Replace the white wine with chicken or beef broth plus a splash of white wine vinegar or lemon juice for brightness.

    Chef's Tip - Cooking with Ground Bison
    Bison is naturally leaner than beef, which means it cooks faster and can dry out if overdone. For the best results, brown it lightly rather than cooking it until completely dry, then let it finish gently simmering in the sauce. The slow simmer keeps the meat tender and allows the flavors to meld without losing moisture.

    How to Make Bison Bolognese

    Start by cooking the vegetables, garlic and herbs until soft in a tablespoon of olive oil. Use a heavy pot for even heat distribution like a 5 ½ quart Dutch oven or other heavy pot. Next, add the ground bison, breaking the meat up with a wooden spoon. Cook the bison until still a bit pink (it will finish during simmering).

    Next, add tomatoes, dried Italian seasoning, bay leaf, and red pepper flakes. Stir and scrape any small pieces off the bottom of the pan. Add the milk and simmer.

    Bison Bolognese Meat Sauce|AFoodCentricLife.com

    Simmer to Develop Flavor

    To develop rich flavor and thick texture, simmer your sauce at least one hour, and if possible, two. The simmering sauce will fill the house with wonderful fragrance. Everyone will be asking when dinner will be ready.

    Another tip for creating a delicious sauce, add a Parmesan rind to the simmering sauce and let it melt in. It adds a fantastic savory flavor. Before serving, fish out what is left and discard.

    Bison Bolognese Meat Sauce|AFoodCentricLife.com

    If you need to stretch the sauce quantity to feed more mouths, add a can of tomato sauce. If you want it thicker, add a two tablespoons of tomato paste. Too thick? Thin with a little water.

    A gray stoneware bowl of pasta with meat sauce and a fork, parmesan cheese on the side.

    Serving Suggestions

    What pasta goes best with Bison Bolognese? Traditionally, Bolognese is served with wide noodles like pappardelle or tagliatelle, but it's also excellent with penne, gnocchi, or polenta. Be sure to top with a sprinkle of Parmesan cheese.

    For low carb or Paleo eaters, use zucchini noodles, cassava noodles, or spaghetti squash.

    Storage and Freezing

    • Refrigerator: Store cooled bolognese in an airtight container for up to 4 days. Reheat gently on the stovetop, adding a splash of broth or water if the sauce has thickened.
    • Freezer: This sauce freezes beautifully. Portion into containers or freezer bags, label, and freeze for up to 3 months. Thaw overnight in the refrigerator before reheating.
    • Pro Tip: Freeze in single-serving portions for easy weeknight meals - just add to hot pasta or polenta for a quick dinner. Thaw the sauce first, of course.

    Recipe FAQs

    What's the difference between bison and beef Bolognese?

    Bison is leaner than beef, so the sauce is a bit lighter but still rich and hearty. Cooking it gently in the tomato sauce keeps the meat tender and moist.

    Can I make this dairy-free?

    Yes. Substitute canned coconut milk for the half & half. It adds creaminess without dairy, and the flavor blends seamlessly into the sauce.

    Do I have to use wine in Bolognese?

    No. White wine adds depth and brightness, but you can use broth with a splash of white wine vinegar or lemon juice for acidity.

    More Great Pasta Sauce Recipes

    If you love this Bison Bolognese, try one of my other hearty pasta sauces. From rich, beef short rib ragu to weeknight favorites that freeze beautifully for quick meals.

    • Pot full of homemade marinara.
      Easy Pasta Sauce With Tomato Sauce
    • roasted tomato marinara
      The Best Roasted Tomato Sauce
    • mushroom marinara pasta sauce
      Mushroom Tomato Sauce

    Did You Make This Recipe?

    If you enjoyed this bison bolognese, please leave me a comment. I enjoy hearing from you! And the comments help others readers as well.

    📖 Recipe

    Bison Bolognese Meat SauceAFoodCentricLife.com

    Bison Bolognese Meat Sauce

    Sally Cameron
    Lean ground bison updates this classic, long-simmered sauce with rich flavor. Serve over your choice of pasta, zucchini noodles or spaghetti squash for a low carb dinner. Extra freezes great, so if you have time, double the batch. You can substitute ground beef for the bison. Got time? Simmer up to 2 hours.
    5 from 1 vote
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 15 minutes mins
    Cook Time 1 hour hr
    Total Time 1 hour hr 15 minutes mins
    Course Sauce
    Cuisine Italian
    Servings 6 to 8
    Calories 361 kcal

    Ingredients
      

    • 1 tablespoon extra virgin olive oil
    • 1 cup finely chopped onion ½ of a large
    • 1 cup finely chopped celery 3 ribs
    • 1 cup finely chopped carrot 2-3
    • 2-3 large cloves garlic finely chopped
    • 2 teaspoons dried Italian herb blend or use basil, oregano, thyme, rosemary
    • 1 pound ground bison 10% fat
    • ¾ cup dry white wine optional
    • ½ teaspoon sea salt
    • ¼ teaspoon ground black pepper
    • 1 28 ounce can whole or crushed tomatoes see note below for fresh tomatoes
    • 1 15 ounce can diced tomatoes
    • 1 6 ounce can tomato paste
    • ¼ teaspoon ground nutmeg or more
    • 1 large bay leaf
    • 1 cup half and half or canned coconut milk
    • ¼ teaspoon red pepper flakes (pizza pepper)

    Would you like to save this recipe?

    Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

    Instructions
     

    Cook the Vegetables

    • To a large heavy pot (5 quart) over medium heat, add olive oil. When oil is hot add the onion, celery and carrot. Turn heat down to medium low and cook the vegetables slowly until soft, about 3-5 minutes. Stir occasionally. Add the garlic and dried Italian herbs and cook 1 minute longer.

    Add Meat and Continue

    • Add the ground bison and cook, breaking it up with a wooden spoon. Cook until it is no longer pink, about 5-7 minutes. Add the wine and cook until wine is reduced, 3-4 minutes. Add salt and pepper, then stir in the tomato paste and your tomatoes. Add nutmeg, bay leaf and milk. Turn the heat up and bring sauce almost to a boil, then turn down to low and cover.

    Simmer for Flavor

    • Simmer sauce 2 hours, stirring occasionally, until thick and rich. Serve over pasta or noodles of choice. Extra sauce freezes well.

    Notes

    For Fresh Tomatoes
    To substitute fresh tomatoes for canned, start by peeling the tomatoes. Bring a large pot of water to a boil. Set up an ice bath by filling a large bowl with half ice and cold water. Slice a small X into the bottom of the tomato (to make peeling easier). When water is boiling, place a few tomatoes at a time into the water for 1 minute, then plunge immediately into the ice bath. Tomato skins should peel right off. 
    With a sharp paring knife, cut out the core. When all tomatoes are peeled, pulse in a food processor or blender to break them up into a sauce. You should get approximately 4 cups of total diced tomatoes. 

    Nutrition

    Calories: 361kcalCarbohydrates: 19gProtein: 18gFat: 22gSaturated Fat: 9gCholesterol: 68mgSodium: 306mgPotassium: 1092mgFiber: 5gSugar: 10gVitamin A: 5998IUVitamin C: 41mgCalcium: 112mgIron: 3mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    Coconut Shrimp Curry (Quick Dinner)

    08/29/2017 by Sally Cameron 4 Comments

    quick coconut curry shrimp

    Coconut shrimp curry is one of those dishes that feels special but is easy enough for any weeknight. Tender shrimp cook in minutes, nestled in a creamy coconut milk sauce infused with curry spices. The result is a golden, fragrant dish you can serve over rice or with warm flatbread. It's faster and better than takeout.

    Orangey colored coconut curry shrimp in a bowl.

    When I need dinner on the table quickly, shrimp are always a go-to - they cook in minutes and take on bold flavors beautifully. In this Thai-inspired coconut shrimp curry with coconut milk creates a rich, dairy-free sauce that's golden from curry powder and fragrant with ginger and garlic. A squeeze of lime juice at the end brightens everything up, balancing the creamy, spiced coconut sauce.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why You'll Love This Coconut Shrimp Curry

    • Quick-cooking shrimp - Shrimp cook fast, making this curry a true weeknight win.
    • Creamy coconut milk sauce - Rich and velvety, with no dairy required.
    • Golden spice blend - Curry powder, ginger, and garlic give it warm flavor and a beautiful golden color.
    • Skip takeout - This dish is simple to make in minutes!

    Ingredients You'll Need

    • Coconut milk - Use canned full-fat coconut milk for the richest, creamiest sauce.
    • Curry powder - A blend of spices giving the dish its golden color and warm flavor.
    • Onion - Adds sweetness and depth as the base of the sauce.
    • Coconut oil - Complements the coconut milk and adds a subtle layer of flavor.
    • Garlic - Fresh cloves bring bold, savory notes to the sauce.
    • Ginger - Finely grated fresh ginger or a spoonful of ginger paste adds zing and warmth.
    • Shrimp - Large raw shrimp, preferably wild.
    • Cilantro (optional) - A sprinkle of chopped fresh cilantro adds color and a bright, herbal finish.

    Please see the recipe card for measurements, salt, and pepper.

    Chef's Tip: Why Choose Wild Shrimp
    Shrimp is the most popular seafood in the U.S., but about 90% is imported and only a tiny fraction is inspected. Farmed shrimp often raise concerns over antibiotics, pesticides, and environmental impact. Wild-caught shrimp, on the other hand, are cleaner, more sustainable, and far better in flavor. When possible, choose wild shrimp.

    Substitutions and Variations

    • Spice it up - If you like more heat, add a pinch of cayenne, a sprinkle of red chili flakes
    • Curry paste swap - Use 1½-2 tablespoons red Thai curry paste instead of curry powder for a bolder, spicier flavor.
    • Milder flavor - Use leeks instead of onion for a milder, sweeter flavor

    Chef's Tip: Understanding Shrimp Sizes
    Shrimp are sold by count per pound. Jumbo sizes like 16-20 or 13-15 mean there are that many shrimp in a pound. Smaller shrimp (21-25) cook faster and are less expensive. Buy shell-on when possible - the shell protects the meat. Peel and devein yourself for best results. Short on time? Pre-peeled and deveined shrimp are a fine shortcut.

    Raw shrimp peeled and cleaned on a rimmed baking sheet.

    Thawing Shrimp the Right Way

    Most shrimp are flash frozen at harvest, often sold IQF (individually quick frozen). Fresh-looking shrimp at the market are usually thawed from frozen.

    • Quick thaw method: Place shrimp in a sealed bag and submerge in cold water, changing the water every 30 minutes until thawed (about 45 minutes depending on size).
    • Best thaw method: Thaw overnight in the refrigerator on a rimmed baking sheet to catch liquid.
    creamy coconut shrimp with curry.

    How to Make Coconut Shrimp Curry

    Shrimp cook quickly and turn tender when simmered in spiced coconut milk, so have everything prepped before you start. Make ahead: You can whisk the sauce ingredients together and chop the onion, garlic, and ginger ahead of time. When ready to cook, dinner comes together in minutes.

    1. Mix the sauce - Whisk together the coconut milk, curry powder, and salt until smooth. (You can also shake it in a jar with a lid.)
    2. Prep the aromatics - Chop the onion. Mince or grate the garlic and ginger.
    3. Cook the base - In a large skillet, warm coconut oil over medium heat. Cook the onion until softened, then stir in the garlic and ginger for the last minute.
    4. Simmer the shrimp - Add the shrimp and the coconut milk mixture. Simmer just a few minutes until the shrimp are opaque and cooked through.
    5. Finish and serve - Taste and adjust seasoning, then garnish with cilantro if desired.

    Chef's Tip: If your prep is done in advance, the cooking itself takes only a few minutes.

    Chef's Tip: How to Cook Shrimp Perfectly
    Shrimp cook in just a few minutes, and the smaller they are the faster they cook. The biggest mistake is leaving them in too long. They're done when they turn pink, opaque, and the grayish, translucent areas are gone. At that point, pull them off the heat right away - even a minute too long can make them rubbery.

    A bowl of coconut curry shrimp served over rice with snap peas.

    Serving Suggestions

    Serve the shrimp and creamy coconut curry sauce over white jasmine rice, nutty brown rice, quinoa, or a lighter base like cauliflower rice. Garnish with chopped cilantro or green onion, and add a squeeze of fresh lime juice to brighten the flavors. For balance, pair it with a simple tossed green salad or a quick vegetable side like simple blanched green beans.

    Storage & Freezing

    • Refrigerate: Store leftovers in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 3 days. Reheat gently on the stovetop over medium-low heat until warmed through - avoid overcooking the shrimp.
    • Freezing: Not recommended. Shrimp tend to become rubbery when frozen and reheated, and the coconut sauce can separate. This dish is best enjoyed fresh.

    Recipe FAQs

    What kind of coconut milk should I use?

    Use canned full-fat coconut milk for the richest, creamiest sauce. Light coconut milk works, but the sauce won't be as velvety. Avoid cartons of coconut beverage, they're too thin.

    Can I use chicken instead of shrimp?

    Yes. Boneless chicken breast or thighs work well. Cut chicken into bite-sized pieces and simmer longer until fully cooked before adding the sauce.

    Can I use frozen shrimp?

    Yes. Most shrimp are sold frozen and thawed at the market. Buy frozen shrimp to keep on hand, then thaw in the refrigerator overnight or in a sealed bag under cold water for about 45 minutes.

    More Recipes With Shrimp

    Quick cooking shrimp make a fast dinner for buys weeks! Here are other shrimp recipes to try.

    • Grilled shrimp on bamboo sticks on a white platter with chimchurri sauce.
      Shrimp Skewers (Grilled or Oven)
    • baked lemon shrimp scampi
      Easy Baked Shrimp Scampi
    • Thai shrimp soup called Tom Yum in bowls with shrimp, jalapenos, cilantro, and limes.
      Shrimp Tom Yum Soup
    • Jalapeno mint shrimp.
      Grilled Tequila Lime Shrimp

    Did You Make This Recipe?

    If you make coconut shrimp curry, please leave a comment. I love to hear from you. Comments also help other readers.

    📖 Recipe

    Coconut Shrimp Curry

    Sally Cameron
    Creamy, quick shrimp curry takes just minutes to get dinner on the table. Serve over rice and add a green vegetable such as sliced snow peas or a green salad. See ingredient list for Thai curry paste swap.
    5 from 4 votes
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 6 minutes mins
    Cook Time 10 minutes mins
    Total Time 16 minutes mins
    Course Dinner, Main Course
    Cuisine Indian
    Servings 4
    Calories 470 kcal

    Ingredients
      

    • 2 cups canned coconut milk
    • 2 ½ teaspoons curry powder mild or hot
    • 1 tablespoon extra virgin coconut oil
    • ⅓ cup onion, finely chopped yellow, or white
    • 2 garlic cloves finely chopped or zested
    • 1 ½ teaspoons ginger finely grated or ginger paste
    • 1 ½ pounds raw peeled deveined shrimp 21-25 size
    • 1-2 tablespoons chopped fresh cilantro optional

    Optional swap for curry powder

    • 1 ½-2 tablespoons red Thai curry paste

    Would you like to save this recipe?

    Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

    Instructions
     

    • Whisk together the coconut milk and curry powder (or curry paste) until smooth. You can also put it in a blender on low speed or shake well in a large jar. 
    • Warm the coconut oil over medium heat in a large saute or fry pan large enough to hold all of the shrimp in one layer. Add the onion and cook, stirring until softened, about 2 minutes. Add the garlic and ginger, cook about 30 seconds longer.
    • Add the shrimp to the pan, laying them flat in a single layer. Cook until pink on one side, 1-2 minutes, then turn shrimp over and pour in the spiced coconut curry milk.
      Bring the pan to a simmer, place a lid on top and turn heat to low. Cook until shrimp are firm and pink on both sides, another 5 minutes depending on the size of the shrimp.  Serve sprinkled with chopped cilantro if desired and a squeeze of lime juice.

    Notes

    When shrimp are cooked, taste the curry sauce to be sure the raw flavor of the curry powder is gone.  If not, remove shrimp and keep warm, and simmer the sauce another 1-2 minutes, this will thicken the sauce as well.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 470kcalCarbohydrates: 11gProtein: 38gFat: 33gSaturated Fat: 28gPolyunsaturated Fat: 1gMonounsaturated Fat: 2gTrans Fat: 0.01gCholesterol: 274mgSodium: 297mgPotassium: 845mgFiber: 4gSugar: 5gVitamin A: 222IUVitamin C: 6mgCalcium: 152mgIron: 4mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!
    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Easy Cream of Asparagus Soup

    03/22/2023 by Sally Cameron 7 Comments

    Pot of cream of asparagus soup ready to serve.

    Looking for a light and delicious soup to add to your spring or Easter menu? Look no further than this vibrant green cream of asparagus soup! Whether you want a vegan, dairy-free soup option or the richness of heavy cream, this soup is easy to make. Make it ahead of time to save time, in only 30 minutes. Don't forget to check out my list of fun and delicious garnishes to take your soup to the next level.

    Bright green and creamy asparagus soup in a gray pot with garnishes.

    Asparagus is the quintessential spring vegetable and I am completely crazy about asparagus and so happy when the beautiful green spears arrive at the store. If you've never made cream of asparagus soup, it is so delicious and easy, you must try it.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why You'll Like This Recipe

    It's that time of year! Asparagus season is the best time to make cream of asparagus soup and all things asparagus.

    • A simple soup with simple ingredients.
    • Easy instructions, finished in a blender
    • Serve warm or chilled
    • Tastes terrific, beautiful color, customizable with garnish options.
    • Make it a day or two ahead.

    Recipe Ingredients

    What are the ingredients needed to make this creamy asparagus soup? So simple!

    Ingredients for asparagus soup on the counter in prep bowls.
    • Asparagus: Choose bright green, fresh asparagus stalks with tight tips or heads, (usually at the market in a little water). A little thicker is better than pencil thin.
    • Cooking fat: Use unsalted dairy butter, a good plant-based butter like this one, or olive oil.
    • Onion: Go with white onion for mild sweet flavor to allow the asparagus to shine. Brown onions or yellow onions still work fine.
    • Garlic: A good place for fresh garlic, zest it with a microplane zester so it melts in.
    • Fresh herbs: Fresh thyme is best but dried works as well. Use about ½ - ⅓ as much as fresh.
    • Broth: Chicken broth (low sodium or homemade) or homemade vegetable broth.
    • Cream: Using canned full-fat coconut milk keeps it non-dairy. If you prefer, use dairy heavy cream. Both work great.
    • Lemon: Fresh squeezed lemon juice lifts or brightens the flavor of asparagus soup.

    See the recipe card for measurements plus salt and white or black pepper.

    Chef's Tip: How to store asparagus. When you get asparagus home, trim a little off the bottom and stand the bundles in a tall container with an inch of water in the bottom to keep the ends moist. Treat asparagus like flowers. Cover loosely with plastic wrap until ready to use. Alternatively, wet a paper towel with water and wrap the ends, then place in a plastic bag. Asparagus will last a couple of days stored this way.

    Substitutions and Variations

    Can I make cream of asparagus soup without cream?

    Yes, you can make it without cream. For an asparagus soup without cream, swap full fat canned coconut milk for heavy cream. And truly, it does not taste like coconut! This swap works for other cream-based soups too.

    Broth options

    While I use chicken broth, if you're vegan or vegetarian, cream of asparagus soup is a great place to use homemade vegetable broth. It's easy to make in short time and the flavor is far superior to canned or boxed stuff.

    Recipe Instructions

    Chopped asparagus in glass bowl ready to cook.
    Step 1: Trim asparagus spears of woody tough ends (and discard), trim off the tips and chop the spears.
    Cooked asparagus pieces chilling in an ice batch.
    Step: 2: Briefly cook asparagus in a large pot of boiling salted water, 2 minutes (blanching). Immediately remove asparagus to ice water and chill, then drain. Separate enough tips for garnish and set aside.

    Chef's Tip: The cold water ice bath stops the cooking process and sets the color of the asparagus to keep the soup a bright green.

    Cooking onion and herbs for the base of asparagus soup.
    Step 3: Melt butter and cook the onion, garlic, and herbs.
    Adding cooked asparagus to pot to simmer for soup.
    Step 4: Add asparagus pieces and rest of tips to the pot.
    Adding the broth and coconut milk to the pot.
    Step 5: Add broth and milk, then simmer a few minutes.
    Cooked asparagus with liquids in the blender for pureeing.
    Step 6: Puree in a high-speed blender. The soup is ready.
    Bright green asparagus soup pureed in a blender container, ready to serve.

    Blender Tips

    If you you don't have a regular blender, use an immersion blender to puree asparagus soup. Place the pot in the sink to reduce splatter. Remember to be extra careful when blending hot liquids.

    Asparagus sou shooters for appetizers.

    Serving Suggestions: Great Garnishes

    Here's a list of terrific garnishes for cream of asparagus soup, for both dairy and non-dairy diners. Be sure to serve lemon wedges alongside. One more thing, this asparagus soup recipe is delightful served either hot, at room temperature, or chilled. A slice of crusty bread is good alongside.

    • First and foremost, the reserved asparagus tips (the best part).
    • Chopped herbs such fresh dill, chives, parsley, or fennel fronds.
    • Garlicky croutons (can be made GF and DF if needed).
    • Crisp crumbled bacon.
    • Chopped or grated hard boiled egg.
    • Grated Parmesan cheese.
    • A dollop of sour cream (dairy or non-dairy), or creme fraiche.
    • Homemade toasted pumpkin seeds add a nice crunch.
    • A drizzle of good lemon olive oil (or basil).
    • Fresh lemon zest.
    • Sliced green onion.
    • Cold tiny bay shrimp.

    Here's a super fun serving idea for a get together appetizer: asparagus soup shooters! Serve them chilled.

    Beautiful green asparagus soup in a white bowl with tasty garnishes ready to eat.

    Recipe FAQs

    Can I freeze cream of asparagus soup?

    While many sites say you can freeze for 3-6 months, soups with cream or milk don't freeze well and tend to separate upon thawing. They can become grainy and lose their taste. I don't recommend freezing asparagus soup. If you want to try freezing, try re-heating gently on the stovetop and briefly blending again.

    How long does cream of asparagus soup last in the fridge?

    Cream of asparagus lasts 3-4 days in the refrigerator in an airtight container. For more information check out this food chart from the FDA.

    Is cream of asparagus soup healthy?

    Asparagus packs a dose of vitamins C, E and K, folate and minerals like zinc, manganese, and selenium. Plus, asparagus is anti-inflammatory and a source of glutathione, the master antioxidant.

    Eating asparagus also gives you inulin, a fiber that acts as a prebiotic, providing a feast for the good bacteria in our gut that help with digestion. But of course, there is all of the fat in cream or coconut milk to weigh in the balance. Read more at this link.

    What can I serve with cream of asparagus soup?

    Cream of asparagus soup goes with just about anything. Try it as a starter before a ham, pork roast, roast chicken, or beef dinner. Serve it alone as a soup shooter for an appetizer. It makes a nice light meal with a grilled cheese sandwich.

    Bright green asparagus soup in a white bowl on a bloue plate on the dinner table.

    More Creamy Soup Recipes

    For another creamy soup recipe, try creamy cauliflower soup, roasted red pepper, or creamy broccoli.

    • Roasted cauliflower soup on a gray bowl with a swirl of bright green pesto, and herbs.
      Creamy Cauliflower Soup with Roasted Garlic
    • roasted red pepper soup
      Roasted Red Pepper Soup (sheet pan recipe)
    • cream of broccoli soup with sausage
      Cream of Broccoli Soup (dairy free vegan option)
    • creamy cauliflower soup
      Curried Cauliflower Soup

    ⭐️Did you Make This Recipe?

    If you make cream of asparagus soup, please add your comment. I appreciate your feedback and enjoy hearing from you. If you loved it, please give it a 5-star rating! They really help other readers.

    📖 Recipe

    Asparagus soup | AFoodCentricLife.com

    Cream of Asparagus Soup

    Sally Cameron
    Vivid green, this creamy asparagus soup is rich and easy to make. Use coconut milk (it doesn't taste like coconut) for no-dairy, or dairy heavy cream. Serve with lemon wedges if desired. See recipe notes for garnish ideas. Soup keeps 3-4 days in the refrigerator in an airtight container.
    5 from 1 vote
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 12 minutes mins
    Cook Time 18 minutes mins
    Total Time 30 minutes mins
    Course Soup
    Cuisine American
    Servings 4 12-ounce servings
    Calories 268 kcal

    Equipment

    • Large pot or Dutch Oven
    • blender

    Ingredients
      

    • 2 bunches fresh asparagus 2 pounds
    • 2 tablespoons olive oil or butter unsalted dairy butter or unsalted plant butter
    • ½ medium onion ¾ cup, chopped
    • 2 large garlic cloves finely chopped or zested
    • 2 teaspoons chopped fresh thyme leaves (or tarragon) or ¾ teaspoon dried
    • 1 ½ cups low sodium broth Chicken or vegetable
    • 1 cup canned coconut milk or dairy cream
    • ½ teaspoon sea salt
    • ¼ teaspoon pepper I use white pepper

    Optional Garnishes (non-dairy and dairy)

    • 4 tablespoons finely grated Parmesan cheese
    • 4 tablespoons sour cream or creme fraiche
    • 1 tablespoon chopped fresh dill, parsley, or chives
    • 4 pieces crisply crumbled bacon
    • 2-4 hardboiled eggs chopped or grated
    • 4 tablespoons toasted pumpkin seeds
    • 4 teaspoons lemon olive oil
    • 1 cup garlicky croutons DF or GF

    Would you like to save this recipe?

    Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

    Instructions
     

    Set up

    • Fill a large pot (5 quarts) three-quarters full with cold water and bring to a boil over high heat. Fill a medium bowl half full of ice, then fill with cold water. This creates an ice bath. While water is coming to a boil, prep the asparagus.

    Blanch and chill

    • Chop the tough ends off of the bottom of the asparagus spears. Trim off the tips, then chop the rest of the spears into 1" pieces. Drop all of the asparagus into boiling salted water and cook for 2 minutes (this is called blanching). Strain asparagus through a sieve into the sink and add the asparagus immediately to the ice batch to stop the cooking process. Chill until cold then drain again. Separate out enough asparagus tips for garnish (12-20 pieces).

    Make the soup

    • In the same pan, cook onion in olive oil or butter over medium to medium heat until soft, about 4 minutes. Add garlic, thyme, salt and pepper and cook 1 minute longer. Add asparagus, broth and coconut milk. Simmer for 7-10 minutes for flavors to blend. Puree in a blender until smooth. Depending on the capacity of your blender container, you may need to do it in two batches. Adjust seasoning to taste with more salt and pepper if needed.
      Serve asparagus soup hot, warm, or chilled with cooked asparagus tips and other preferred garnishes.

    Notes

    • For broth, homemade really shines in soup, especially vegetable broth. Make this easy homemade vegetable broth recipe ahead of time and freeze. The Instant Pot chicken broth recipe is also easy to make ahead and freeze. 
    • Garnish ideas: Chopped fresh herbs like dill, parsley, chives, or chervil, crisp crumbled bacon, grated or chopped hard boiled eggs, a drizzle of lemon olive oil, grated Parmesan cheese, garlicky croutons, a dollop of sour cream or creme fraiche, even cold bay shrimp. 
    • Optional garnishes are not figured into the nutrition calculation. 
    Dietary note: People with histamine intolerance should be fine enjoying this soup, as long as they're ok with the coconut milk. Skip the Parmesan cheese though, aged cheese is high histamine.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 268kcalCarbohydrates: 15gProtein: 8gFat: 22gSaturated Fat: 14gPolyunsaturated Fat: 1gMonounsaturated Fat: 6gSodium: 332mgPotassium: 722mgFiber: 6gSugar: 7gVitamin A: 1750IUVitamin C: 17mgCalcium: 78mgIron: 6mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    Easy Homemade Italian Dressing

    08/09/2022 by Sally Cameron Leave a Comment

    Golden Italian salad dressing in a jar with a silver whisk.

    A good homemade Italian dressing makes salads, pasta salads, and simple vegetables taste better in minutes. This easy Italian vinaigrette is bright, tangy, and full of flavor, made with simple pantry ingredients and no seasoning packets.

    Golden Italian salad dressing in a jar with a silver whisk.

    As a kid, my job before dinner was making the Italian dressing. I'd grab a Good Seasons packet, add oil and vinegar to the lines on the cruet, pour in the dry seasoning mix, and give it a good shake. It was my favorite dressing then, which is why I'm excited to share this homemade version with you now. Think of it as the old favorite made new, fresher, and healthier.

    Homemade Italian Dressing Recipe Snapshot

    • Easy recipe - Add everything to a jar and shake.
    • Clean dressing - No preservatives, additives, or poor-quality oils; you control the ingredients.
    • Simple pantry ingredients - Made with staples you probably already have..

    Ingredients You'll Need

    Italian dressing ingredients.
    • Oil - Extra-virgin olive oil gives this dressing the best flavor. Avocado oil works too, but has a milder taste.
    • Vinegar - Adds brightness and tang. Use champagne vinegar, white wine vinegar, red wine vinegar, or apple cider vinegar.
    • Parmesan cheese - Adds savory, salty, umami flavor. Use good Parmigiano-Reggiano if possible.
    • Mustard - Creamy Dijon mustard helps emulsify the dressing and adds subtle tang.
    • Dried herbs - Italian seasoning blend works well, or use dried basil and oregano. Most blends include herbs such as thyme, marjoram, basil, oregano, sage, and rosemary.
    • Garlic and onion powder - Add savory depth and classic Italian dressing flavor.
    • A touch of sweetness - A small amount balances the vinegar. Use sugar, honey, maple syrup, monk fruit blend, keto simple syrup, or agave.st enough.

    Please see the recipe card for all measurements and salt.

    Substitutions and Variations

    • Mustard - Swap in a little whole grain Dijon for extra texture and flavor.
    • Flavored oil - Try a extra virgin lemon olive oil or a basil extra virgin olive oil.
    • Fresh garlic - Use finely grated fresh garlic instead of garlic powder for a sharper garlic flavor.
    • Zesty Italian dressing - Add a pinch of dried red pepper flakes.
    • Low sodium - Skip the salt or use just a pinch, and go light on the Parmesan.
    • Dairy-free or vegan - Skip the Parmesan and add a little nutritional yeast for cheesy flavor, or vegan parm substitute.
    • Too tangy - Balance the dressing with a small amount of agave, sugar, monk fruit, honey, or maple syrup.

    Chef's Note: Many bottled dressings are made with inexpensive highly refined oils such as soybean, canola, or generic "vegetable oil," along with preservatives, sweeteners, gums, and flavorings. When you make dressing at home, you choose the oil, vinegar, herbs, and seasonings-and the flavor is fresher, brighter, and cleaner. I use extra virgin olive oil, avocado oil is good too, just more of a neutral flavor.

    Grated Parmesan cheese with microplane zester.

    How to Make Homemade Italian Dressing

    Make the dressing about 30 minutes ahead of time for the best flavor. This allows the dried herbs to rehydrate and release their flavor.

    Place all ingredients into a jar or bottle with a tight lid and shake well. For larger batches, use a blender.

    Italian dressing in small pitcher.

    Serving Suggestions

    Use homemade Italian dressing for green salads, cold pasta salads, and more. It also works beautifully as a quick marinade for chicken breasts or shrimp before grilling. Try it tossed with cooked green beans, spooned over grilled vegetables, or drizzled onto simple grain bowls. It's a multipurpose dressing worth keeping in your recipe arsenal.

    Storage

    Store extra Italian dressing in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 1 week. Shake well before using.

    More Homemade Dressing Recipes

    I have many delicious salad dressing and vinaigrettes recipe on this site. Some are separate and some are within salad recipes. Check out the salad category and you'll find strawberry vinaigrette, orange vinaigrette, and more.

    • A bowl of homemade caesar dressing with spoon.
      Caesar Salad Dressing Without Anchovies
    • creamy tahini salad dressing
      Creamy Lemon Tahini Salad Dressing
    • Chicken blueberry salad
      Blueberry Vinaigrette
    • chinese chicken salad
      Healthy Chicken Salad Recipe with Ginger Salad Dressing

    ⭐️Did You Make This Recipe?

    If you make this Italian dressing recipe, please add your comment. I appreciate your feedback and enjoy hearing from you. If you loved it, please give it a 5-star rating! They really help other readers.

    📖 Recipe

    Golden Italian salad dressing in a jar with a silver whisk.

    Homemade Italian Salad Dressing

    Sally Cameron
    Whether you are tossing green salads or dressing a cold pasta salad, a great homemade dressing recipe makes the most of what you're making. Flavorful and tangy, make this easy homemade Italian salad dressing (aka Italian vinaigrette) in your kitchen. 
    5 from 1 vote
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 5 minutes mins
    Cook Time 0 minutes mins
    Total Time 5 minutes mins
    Course condiment, dresssing
    Cuisine Italian
    Servings 16 Yield 1 cup
    Calories 82 kcal

    Ingredients
      

    • ¾ cup extra virgin olive oil
    • 31/4 cup champagne or white wine vinegar sub apple cider vinegar
    • 1 tablespoon finely grated Parmesan cheese
    • ¾ teaspoon Dijon mustard
    • ¾ teaspoon dried Italian seasoning blend sub basil, oregano,
    • ¼ teaspoon garlic powder
    • ¼ teaspoon onion powder
    • ⅛ teaspoon sea salt
    • ⅛ teaspoon ground black pepper
    • ⅛ teaspoon sugar or monk fruit blend sub honey, maple, keto simple syrup, agave
    • 1 pinch red chili flakes (pizza pepper)

    Would you like to save this recipe?

    Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

    Instructions
     

    • Add all ingredients to a jar and shake well and is a bowl and whisk.
    • For a larger batch use a blender.

    Notes

    Besides salad, this is an excellent marinade for chicken breasts and shrimp before grilling. Try it tossed with cooked green beans or grilled vegetables. It's multipurpose, one to always have in your recipe arsenal. Store any extras in an airtight container.

    Nutrition

    Serving: 1tablespoonCalories: 82kcalCarbohydrates: 0.2gProtein: 0.1gFat: 9gSaturated Fat: 1gPolyunsaturated Fat: 1gMonounsaturated Fat: 7gCholesterol: 0.3mgSodium: 27mgPotassium: 4mgFiber: 0.1gSugar: 0.04gVitamin A: 6IUVitamin C: 0.02mgCalcium: 5mgIron: 0.1mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    How to Make Steamed Salmon

    03/25/2023 by Sally Cameron 47 Comments

    Close up of a platter of salmon filets with lemon and herbs on a table.

    Steamed salmon is one of the easiest and healthiest ways to prepare salmon-and it's ready in just 20 minutes. Steaming keeps the fish incredibly moist, tender, and flaky without any added fat or fuss. Whether you're making a quick dinner or planning ahead for meal prep, this simple method shows you how to steam salmon perfectly every time. Serve it hot, warm, or chilled with your favorite sauces, herbs, or grain bowls.

    A white oval platter of pink steamed salmon with lemons and herbs.

    Whether you're an experienced cook or new to the kitchen, steamed salmon is practically foolproof. It's a clean, simple cooking method that yields moist, flaky salmon every time. This steaming salmon works, skin-on or off, and adapts well to any seasoning. It's also ideal for meal prep: make extra and serve it chilled over salads or grain bowls later in the week. Steaming: it's for more than vegetables and rice!

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why You'll Love Steamed Salmon

    Of all the ways I've cooked salmon-roasted, seared, grilled, poached, parchment-baked-steaming might be the easiest. And surprisingly delicious.

    • Fast & Foolproof - Steamed salmon cooks in minutes with no babysitting. Perfect for busy weeknights.
    • Versatile - Serve it hot, warm, or chilled.
    • Light, Clean & Healthy - Steaming locks in moisture without needing oil or butter.
    • Endlessly Adaptable - Pair it with your favorite sauces or just a squeeze of lemon.

    Follow these easy directions for how to skin salmon at home.

    What You'll Need

    Ingredients for steamed salmon on the counter.

    For the Steamed Salmon

    • Salmon - Wild salmon is the top choice for flavor and nutrition, but it's seasonal and not always easy to find. Good-quality frozen wild salmon is a great alternative. If opting for farmed, look for sustainably raised options.
    • Seasoning - Keep it simple: sea salt, freshly ground black pepper, and a little granulated garlic if you like. The clean flavor of steamed salmon doesn't need much.

    See the recipe card for measurements, salt, and pepper.

    For the Steaming Liquid

    An aromatic steaming liquid gently infuses the salmon with subtle flavor-no marinade needed. Simply combine cold water with any of the following:

    • Fresh Lemon - Sliced or juiced for brightness.
    • Garlic - Lightly crushed cloves add mellow depth.
    • Herbs
      • Fresh: thyme, tarragon, parsley, bay leaves
      • Dried: dill, thyme, Italian seasoning, or Herbs de Provence
    • Aromatics - Add chopped leek, shallot, onion, or sliced fennel (or fennel fronds) for more complexity.
    • Wine (Optional) - A little dry white wine or vermouth adds a touch of acidity and elegance.

    Chef's Tip: Use what you have to create the steaming liquid. Always use lemon, garlic and some herbs, and add the other items if you have them.

    Substitutions and Variations

    What seasonings go well with steamed salmon? There are so many ways to change the flavor depending on your mood or what's in your pantry:

    • Seasoning Blends - Swap the basic salt and pepper for lemon pepper, everything but the bagel seasoning is great, my homemade smoky dry rub, or even a homemade taco seasoning blend for a fun twist.
    • No Wine? No Problem. - To steam salmon without wine, use vegetable broth, water with a generous splash of lemon juice, or a mix of both. You'll need enough liquid to just reach the bottom of the steamer basket.
    • Herb Swaps - If you're out of fresh herbs, substitute 1-2 teaspoons of dried herbs (like dill, thyme, or Italian seasoning) in the steaming liquid for subtle, aromatic flavor.

    Chef's Tip: How to buy salmon. Don't be shy at the fish counter-tell the fishmonger exactly what you want. Don't just take whatever they hand you (especially at today's prices). I always ask for center-cut salmon fillets. They're thicker, more even, and cook more consistently than thinner tail pieces. If what's in the case looks tired (not great), ask if they have any more in the back they can cut fresh for you. It's absolutely okay to be choosy-you're the customer. For the best choices in salmon, check out this salmon buying guide.

    If you love salmon, try this easy smoked salmon dip. It's a reader favorite on my website for good reason!

    How to Steam Salmon

    To get salmon ready for steaming, there's a little easy prep work.

    1) Skin the Salmon (or not)

    Either works, but here's the difference:

    • Skin-on salmon will turn rubbery when steamed (unlike when it's seared or grilled), so it's typically not something you'll want to eat. However, it does peel off easily after steaming if you leave it on.
    • Skinless salmon (deskinned) results in a cleaner, more refined presentation and allows you to remove the bloodline-that darker flesh that can have a stronger, more assertive flavor. I generally remove the skin and bloodline.

    If you prefer skinless fillets but don't want to do it yourself, ask your fishmonger to skin it for you. Or follow my step-by-step photos in this post to remove the salmon skin at home.

    2) Check for Pin Bones

    Before steaming, always check for pin bones-those fine, flexible bones that run through the fillet. Many grocery stores or fish counters remove them for you, but it's worth double-checking.

    Removing pin bones from raw salmon with pliers.

    To find them, gently run your fingers along the top and sides of the salmon. (Tip: slightly damp fingers make it easier to feel the bones.) If you find any, remove them with clean kitchen tweezers or a pair of needle-nose pliers. I keep a pair of small fly fishing pliers in my kitchen just for this-perfect for the job.

    Removing pin bones ensures a smoother texture and a more enjoyable eating experience-especially important if you're serving the salmon cold or flaked into a salad.

    The aromatic steaming liquid to steam salmon with herbs, lemon, and shallots.

    3) Seasoning & Steaming Setup

    Now it's time to season and set up for steaming. First, you'll need a large pot with a tight-fitting lid. I use a 5 ½-quart Le Creuset Dutch oven, but any similar-sized pot works. The key is a snug lid that traps steam efficiently.

    To hold the salmon above the steaming liquid, use a folding stainless steel steaming basket-it's simple, affordable, and fits in most pots. A silicone steamer basket is another great option (just make sure it opens flat). If you have a bamboo steamer or steam oven, those work fine too.

    A stainless stell folding steaming rack set into a pot of aromatic liquid for steaming fish.

    4) Steam Salmon Fillets

    What seasoning goes well with steamed salmon? Start with the basics: sea salt and freshly ground black pepper. I also like to add a touch of granulated garlic. Want to mix it up? Try lemon pepper or an "everything but the bagel" blend for something bolder.

    Salmon filets in a pot with lemon, herbs, shallots, ready for steaming.

    Chef's tip: If you have salmon fillets where there is one thinner end, fold it under to create a more evenly thick piece of fish.

    A folded of raw salmon to make a more even piece for cooking.

    To set up the steamer:

    • Add your steaming liquid ingredients (water, herbs, aromatics, etc.) to the pot.
    • Cover with the lid and bring to a boil over medium-high heat.
    • The water level should just reach the bottom of your steamer basket.

    Once boiling, reduce the heat to medium. Lightly spray the steamer basket with avocado oil spray or another neutral oil to prevent the salmon from sticking. Place the basket into the pot. When steam begins escaping the lid, carefully add the salmon fillets in a single layer.

    How long should you steam salmon?

    Steamed salmon typically takes about 8 minutes, depending on the thickness of the fillets. Thicker cuts may need 9-10 minutes, while thinner fillets could be done in 6-7.

    How do you know when steamed salmon is cooked?

    Salmon is done when:

    • The internal temperature reaches 145°F (per USDA guidelines).
    • The flesh turns a light pinkish-orange color.
    • It's firm to the touch, but not hard or dry.

    Chef's tip on temperature: Steamed salmon is typically done at an internal temperature between 140°F and 145°F. At 140°F, the center stays slightly soft and silky. At 145°F, it's fully opaque and firm, yet still moist. Choose the doneness that feels right for you-there's no one-size-fits-all when it comes to perfectly cooked salmon.

    When salmon is steamed, move it to plates for serving or cooling and refrigerating with a flexible fish spatula.

    Pale peachy colored salmon filets after steaming in the steamer basket.

    Serving Suggestions

    What are some side dishes that go well with steamed salmon? Serve salmon fillets with brown or white rice, or quinoa. For a vegetable, serve it with steamed or roast asparagus, basic broccolini, or simple French green beans.

    This steamed salmon recipe is terrific chilled and served atop a main course salad (like a salmon Caesar), or try steamed salmon in a classic South-of-France salad called a Nicoise (nee-swahz). It's fantastic in summer.

    Close up of a platter of salmon filets with lemon and herbs on a table.

    Sauce Ideas

    You can simply serve steamed salmon with lemon wedges, but there is so much more you can do. Here are sauce ideas for delicious salmon:

    • Quick creamy aioli: Mix together a little mayo, chopped fresh dill, fresh lemon juice, a little Dijon mustard sauce.
    • Creamy Citrus Mango Sauce
    • A dollop of fresh basil pesto (or thinned for a dressing)
    • A tropical pineapple-mango salsa
    • A Greek Tzatziki sauce made with Greek yogurt.
    • Traditional tomato salsa (great in summer).
    • An easy horseradish sauce (see this post for my recipe). Add some chives for color.
    • For an Asian accent, try a toasted sesame oil and soy sauce combination sprinkled with green onions.

    Leftovers and Storage

    Cooked steamed salmon lasts 3 days in the refrigerator, making it a pretty good choice for meal prep. It's just as delicious the next day. Store in an airtight container and be sure to label and date.

    Recipe FAQs

    What is the white stuff on steamed salmon?

    It's a protein called albumin. It's liquid in the flesh and turns white (coagulates) upon cooking. Too much of it means your salmon might be over cooked. A little bit is normal. And it's totally safe to eat.

    Is steamed salmon healthy?

    Absolutely. Salmon is a high quality protein source, 34 grams in 6 ounces of raw weight salmon. Farmed vs. wild vary slightly. Salmon is a great source of heart-healthy omega-3 fats and selenium, important for DNA synthesis, thyroid hormone metabolism, and reproductive health. Plus, it's a rich source of B12. Read this terrific article for more information.

    What's the best way to cook salmon healthy?

    Steaming is one of the healthiest ways to cook a lot of things-including salmon. It doesn't require any added fat or oil, and it keeps the fish incredibly moist and tender. It's also a gentle cooking method that preserves the nutrients and natural flavor of the salmon. Serve it with a sprinkle of fresh chopped herbs herbs, a squeeze of lemon, or your favorite healthy sauce for a clean, satisfying meal.

    Great Sauce Recipes for Steamed Salmon

    Steamed salmon is mild and tender, making it the perfect canvas for bold, flavorful sauces. These are some of my favorites-fresh, vibrant, and easy to make. Whether you're serving your salmon hot or chilled, these sauces bring it to life.

    • A jar of salsa chimichurri of parsley, oregano, olive oil, onion, and vinegar.
      Argentinian Chimichurri Sauce (salsa chimichurri)
    • A bowl of cream Greek Tzatziki with dill and olive oil drizzle with raw veggies and crackers.
      Easy Tzatziki Recipe (Greek Yogurt Sauce)
    • tomatillo salsa verde
      Green Enchilada Sauce with Tomatillos
    • Citrus mango sauce
      Creamy Mango Sauce

    ⭐️Did You Make This Recipe?

    If you make steamed salmon, please add your comment. I appreciate your feedback and enjoy hearing from you. If you loved it, please give it a 5-star rating! They really help other readers.

    📖 Recipe

    Close up of a platter of salmon filets with lemon and herbs on a table.

    Simple Steamed Salmon

    Sally Cameron
    A fast, easy, and healthy recipe. Have dinner on the table in minutes. Serve salmon warm or chilled. Ideas for sauces are in the post with links to recipes.
    4.34 from 12 votes
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 10 minutes mins
    Cook Time 8 minutes mins
    Total Time 18 minutes mins
    Course Main Course, Salmon, Seafood
    Cuisine American
    Servings 4
    Calories 320 kcal

    Equipment

    • Steamer rack
    • Large pot or Dutch Oven

    Ingredients
      

    Steamed Salmon

    • 1 ¼ - 1 ½ pounds salmon filet cut into 4 equal pieces, skinned or not
    • ½ teaspoon sea salt
    • ½ teaspoon ground black pepper
    • ½ teaspoon granulated garlic optional
    • 1 lemon for serving
    • avocado spray

    Steaming Liquid (use all of these or what you have)

    • 3-4 cups water
    • 2 large garlic cloves peeled and crushed
    • ½ bundle fresh Italian parsley long stems trimmed
    • 1 lemon sliced
    • 1 bay leaf
    • 1 cup white wine or white vermouth optional
    • 1 handful fresh thyme sprigs or 2 teaspoons dried thyme
    • ¼ teaspoon sea salt
    • ¼ teaspoon black pepper
    • 1 shallot, sliced or ½ small white onion or leek

    Would you like to save this recipe?

    Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

    Instructions
     

    Prep the Salmon Fillets

    • Cut salmon filet into four equal pieces. Skin the salmon or leave it on for removal after steaming. Sprinkle with salt, pepper and garlic.

    Make the Steaming Liquid

    • Add water and all of the rest of the steaming liquid ingredients to the pot. It should come just to the bottom of your steaming rack. Bring to a boil with lid on, then turn down to a simmer for 5 minutes to infuse a bit.

    Steam Salmon Fillets

    • Spray steamer rack with non-stick spray. Add a few extra lemon slices and herbs to the rack and place the salmon filets on tops.
      Lift the rack into the steaming pot. The liquid level (about 1-inch) should come just to the bottom of the rack.) Steam salmon for about 8 minutes or until salmon reaches 140°F-145ºF internally when measured with a digital thermometer. Timing will depend on the thickness of your salmon. 
      Serve warm or chilled with sauce of choice. Ideas and links below. 

    Notes

    Salmon buying notes: Wild salmon is the best choice but not always available due to seasons (and price). For the best choices in salmon, check out this salmon buying guide.
    Tell the fishmonger what you want. Don't just take what ever they want to give you. I prefer center cut pieces that are thicker and more even to the tail pieces. If what's in the case doesn't look good, asl if they have anymore in the back they can cut for you.
    Steamed salmon skin is rubbery and not appealing to eat, so either skin the salmon before steaming or after steaming. After steaming, the skin will peel write off. Before steaming oyu can trim out the bloodline, which can have a stronger flavor.
    See photos in this post for help skinning salmon. 
    For flavorful sauce ideas, see the photos of ideas at the end of the post. 
     
     

    Nutrition

    Calories: 320kcalCarbohydrates: 5gProtein: 34gFat: 13gSaturated Fat: 2gPolyunsaturated Fat: 5gMonounsaturated Fat: 5gCholesterol: 94mgSodium: 379mgPotassium: 927mgFiber: 1gSugar: 1gVitamin A: 77IUVitamin C: 15mgCalcium: 43mgIron: 2mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    Watermelon Cucumber Juice

    06/22/2018 by Sally Cameron 4 Comments

    watermelon cucumber juice

    Watermelon: the iconic summer fruit turned into a refreshing and hydrating juice. With natural sweetness, watermelon cucumber juice is definitely a summer treat. Skip the bottled juices made from concentrated juice and unhealthy added sweeteners, colors and flavors. Mother Nature does just beautifully on her own.

    watermelon cucumber juice | afoodcentriclife.com

    Nothing Like Fresh Homemade Juice

    While our daily juice routine consists of mostly green vegetable juices with a little low sugar fruit such as green apples and lemons, this watermelon cucumber juice is a wonderful summer treat. Refreshing on a hot summer day. And since yesterday was the first official day of summer, I had to share this recipe with you for your summer enjoyment.

    Watermelon Cucumber Juice

    Watermelon and cucumber are so good for you and delicious when combined. Lime is added for tartness to balance the natural sweetness. It takes 1 mini watermelon, about 5 pounds, plus either 1 English cucumber or 4-5 small Persian cucumbers, and 1 lime (peeled) to make two 18-ounce servings. Your yield will depend on if use just the watermelon flesh or include some of the rind.

    Yes, you can even juice the rind. It has lots of nutrients too. Be sure your watermelon is organic. If juicing the rind, the color will be a little less pink, but it is still packed with nutrition.

    watermelon cucumber juice | afoodcentriclife.com

    Skip the Bottled Stuff

    Shopping recently, I saw a big display of bottled organic watermelon cucumber "cooler" at the store and read the label. The first ingredient was filtered water, the second organic sugar, then juice concentrates, organic flavors and extracts, natural flavors and citric acid as a preservative. The label also stated that it contained 15% juice.

    When you make homemade, its 100% fresh juice with no added sugar or anything else you don't want - just pure refreshing, healthy goodness. If you don't have a juicer, see this link for another recipe that uses a blender.

    watermelon juice | afoodcentriclife.com

    Health Benefits of Watermelon and Cucumber

    Because they are 92%-98% water, watermelons are great for hydration. They contain a significant amount of vitamin A, B6, antioxidants, amino acids and a specific powerful phytonutrient called lycopene.

    Lycopene is why watermelon is red. According to the Fitness Institute of Texas at The University of Texas at Austin, Lycopene has been linked with heart health, bone health, prostate cancer prevention and more. It's also a powerful antioxidant thought to have anti-inflammatory properties. Read the Live Science article here, it's got great information on the health benefits of watermelon.

    About Watermelon and Cucumbers

    A botanical relative of watermelon, cucumbers are another great hydrator, made up of 96% water. No wonder they taste extra good in summertime. Cucumbers may protect our brains, reduce cancer risks, manage stress and support digestive health. Read here for more health benefits of cucumbers.

    Some cucumbers come waxed. To insure they are clean for juicing I wash my produce with Eat Cleaner. It is 99% more effective than water in removing wax, pesticides, plus agricultural and handling residue that can carry bacteria. I've used it for years.

    watermelon cucumber juice \ afoodcentriclife.com
    Jars of watermelon cucumber juice.

    📖 Recipe

    watermelon cucumber juice | afoodcentriclife.com

    Watermelon Cucumber Juice

    Sally Cameron
    Refreshing and hydrating, watermelon cucumber juice has natural sweetness that needs no added sugar or flavors. Mint is a nice addition too. 
    5 from 1 vote
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 10 minutes mins
    Total Time 10 minutes mins
    Course Beverage, Juices
    Cuisine American
    Servings 2 Yield approximately 36 ounces
    Calories 33 kcal

    Equipment

    • Juicer

    Ingredients
      

    • 1 mini watermelon about 5 pounds
    • 1 large English cucumber or 4 Persian cucumbers
    • 1 lime peeled

    Would you like to save this recipe?

    Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

    Instructions
     

    • Wash all produce well. Cut into pieces the size that your juicer brand recommends, and juice. For the watermelon, you can juice the flesh, or the flesh and some or all of the rind. 

    Notes

    A botanical relative of watermelon, cucumbers are another great hydrator, made up of 96% water. No wonder they taste extra good in summertime. Cucumbers may protect our brains, reduce cancer risks, manage stress and support digestive health.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 33kcalCarbohydrates: 9gProtein: 1gFat: 1gSaturated Fat: 1gSodium: 4mgPotassium: 255mgFiber: 2gSugar: 3gVitamin A: 158IUVitamin C: 14mgCalcium: 35mgIron: 1mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    How to Make a Detox Green Juice

    04/25/2018 by Sally Cameron 2 Comments

    Detoxing green juice in a glass with a straw.

    Try this detox green juice when you need a little internal spring cleaning. This vibrant green juice is a powerful combination of dandelion greens, spinach, celery, herbs, green apple, lemon, ginger and cucumbers. Juice some up today and give your body a clean start for a fabulous spring or anytime you need a natural little detox support.

    dandy detox green juice in a glass with straw.

    I have a few green juice recipes on my site, but this one includes dandelion greens and other delicious detox ingredients. Detox green juice is good because green means chlorophyll, and chlorophyll rids the body of environmental toxins and promotes cleansing and detoxing.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why You'll like This Recipe

    • Refreshing taste.
    • Supports and boosts natural detoxing.
    • Easily found ingredients.

    Recipe Ingredients

    Dandelion greens: More than just an annoying garden weed, dandelion greens are edible bitter greens, great for cleansing your liver and kidneys, and full of vitamins A and C, and minerals. Because of their bitterness, start with just a few leaves until you develop a taste for them. The ginger, lemon and apple in this juice help offset the bitter taste. Dandelion is great has great benefits.

    Cucumbers: The phytonutrients in cucumbers provide valuable antioxidant, anti-inflammatory, and anti-cancer benefits as well as hydration.

    Celery: More than diet food, celery is an under-appreciated nutritional powerhouse provides potassium, magnesium, calcium, iron, vitamin C,  plus it's anti-inflammatory and one of the most alkalinizing foods you can eat. Adding celery to your diet is good.

    Cilantro: Beyond guacamole and salsa, cilantro helps cleanse the body of toxic heavy metals, plus it's an incredible source of antioxidants, is naturally calming and has a long history of therapeutic use. Some people hate cilantro, so if you're in that club, use parsley instead and still get great health benefits.

    Green apples: a rich source of beneficial plant compounds called phytochemicals including quercetin, catechin, phloridzin and chlorogenic acid, all of which are strong antioxidants. Antioxidants stimulate bile production, which the liver uses to release toxins. The old adage "an apple a day" has truth behind it!

    Ginger and Lemon: Both add wonderful flavor to fresh juices. Ginger is a natural anti-inflammatory and digestive booster as is lemon, plus lemon is great for cleansing and promotes hydration. Lemon also helps your body's alkaline levels as it turns alkaline when it hits your digestive system.

    For quantities please see recipe card.

    Substitutions and Variations

    • Substitute lime juice for lemon juice.
    • If you can't get green apples, choose another low sugar, tart apple variety. For more on choosing apple varieties, see this site from USApple .
    • Add a little ACV (apple cider vinegar) to increase this juices detoxing ability.
    • If you can't get dandelion greens, swap kale or spinach.

    Apple ginger beet juice is another terrific combination, not to mention a gorgeous ruby color.

    dandy detox green juice |AFoodcentricLife.com

    The Best Juicer

    Drinking fresh vegetable and fruit juices is super beneficial for your health and juicing at home gives you the best nutrition. No additives, no pasteurization, and you control the ingredients (as in all organic).

    To make juice at home, you will need a juicer. The best juicers on the market are slow, cold-press, masticating juicers. They do the best job of extracting all of the goodness from your produce without oxidizing the nutrients.

    To do that, I use a Greenstar juicer from Tribest. Juices last up to 72 hours with minimal nutrient loss. There are many good juicers on the market at all prices levels so find one at your price level.

    The new Shine easy cold-press juicer is terrific. Great for smaller kitchens, kitchens with limited storage, and with an affordable price tag for such a quality juicer.

    Wash Your Produce

    When I get all of my groceries unloaded and into the kitchen, I fill a sink up with Eat Cleaner Food Grade Wash and wash all of the produce at once. No rinsing required.

    Serving Suggestions

    Green juices and all freshly made juices are best soon after making. I love them at room temperature right out of the juicer. With the right juicer, you can make and hold them in the refrigerator to drink within 24-72 hours, which helps you get ahead.

    Recipe FAQs

    Is juicing daily a good habit? Yes. Read this post and decide for yourself.

    What are the ingredients for a detox green juice?

    Green produce ingredients are terrific for a detoxing green juice, such as dandelion, cilantro, cabbage, cucumber, lime, mint, green apple, celery, and ginger are all terrific and taste great in green juice. There are other good ingredients to help you detox but not all will taste great in a juice.

    How do I make a detox green juice at home?

    First you'll need a good juicer. They come in all price ranges. The best at preserving nutrients are slow, cold-press, masticating juicers as the give you the most bang for your buck detox and nutritionally. Buy the right herbs, fruits, vegetables and leafy greens. Wash them well with produce wash when you get home. Store them and get them ready to juice ahead saves time. Buy organic is best. Get some good, inexpensive glass bottle around 18 ounces to hold you juice.

    What are the health benefits of detox green juice?

    Detox green juice supports your body's natural mechanism in eliminating toxins from your liver, reduces inflammation, aids weight loss, gives your skin a healthy boost, improves mental alertness, reduces brain fog, and increase energy. That's a pretty great list of health benefits!

    How often should I drink detox green juice for it to be effective?

    Drinking a detox green juice daily is a good habit with terrific health benefits. If you have any concerns about specific ingredients in a green juice recipe because of certain medications you are taking, be sure to check with your healthcare practitioner before starting detox green juices. Depending on the green detox recipe, some ingredients have higher levels of vitamin K which may alter blood thinning medications. Be safe first.

    Does drinking green juice replace eating green vegetables?

    Absolutely not. Green juices do not replace consuming green vegetables. Juices are additional to a diet with a good amount of healthy green vegetables. Vegetables provide necessary fiber and fullness. Green juices give you extra level of powerful phytonutrients in those green vegetables. You need both!

    More Juice Recipes

    Here are a few more green juice recipe and other healthy juice recipes to try. They all taste great.

    • A glass of bright green cabbage juice on a brown cutting board with vegetable bowl behind.
      Cabbage Juice
    • Glasses of bright green, healthy cucumber, celery vegetables juice.
      Cucumber Celery Juice
    • watermelon cucumber juice
      Watermelon Cucumber Juice
    • carrot celery morning glow juice
      Carrot Ginger Juice Recipe

    ⭐️Did you Make This Recipe?

    If you make this recipe, please add your comment. I appreciate your feedback and enjoy hearing from you. If you loved it, please give it a 5-star rating! They really help other readers.

    📖 Recipe

    spring detox green juice |AFoodcentricLife.com

    Detox Green Juice

    Sally Cameron
    This vibrant green juice is loaded with healing benefits as well as detoxifying capabilities. If you can't find dandelions greens use kale instead or all spinach. 
    5 from 1 vote
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 10 minutes mins
    Cook Time 0 minutes mins
    Total Time 10 minutes mins
    Course Beverage, Juice
    Cuisine American
    Servings 2 16 ounce each
    Calories 109 kcal

    Equipment

    • Electric juicer

    Ingredients
      

    • 6-8 ribs celery
    • 3-4 leaves dandelion greens or more
    • ½ bunch cilantro or parsley
    • 3-4 Persian cucumbers or 1 English cucumber
    • 4 ounces baby spinach 4 big handfuls
    • 1" piece fresh raw unpeeled ginger
    • 1 lemon
    • 1 Granny Smith apple cored

    Would you like to save this recipe?

    Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

    Instructions
     

    • Wash produce well. Chop produce into the appropriate size for your juicer, then juice according to the manufacturers directions. Strain if desired.

    Notes

    If you can't get dandelion greens, swap spinach or kale. 

    Nutrition

    Calories: 109kcalCarbohydrates: 27gProtein: 4gFat: 1gSaturated Fat: 0.2gPolyunsaturated Fat: 0.3gMonounsaturated Fat: 0.1gSodium: 147mgPotassium: 955mgFiber: 7gSugar: 14gVitamin A: 6292IUVitamin C: 56mgCalcium: 142mgIron: 3mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    Green Smoothie Recipe with Mango

    06/25/2013 by Sally Cameron 5 Comments

    Tropical Mango Green Smoothie

    A simple, tropical green smoothie recipe made with mango, baby spinach leaves, chia, and homemade almond milk. Don't let the bright green color throw you. It's delicious! Smoothies are a great way to start the day. They whip up in seconds and are transportable and customizable to each persons tastes and dietary preferences. Delicious and healthy!

    Tropical Mango Green Smoothie

    I've been stuck on my raspberry-banana smoothie for a long time and decided it was time to create some new flavors. With the gift of a half dozen mangoes from the Mango Board, a smoothie was my first thought. Mangoes bring that sweet taste of the tropics to everything. While combining mango with spinach leaves might sound crazy, it makes a terrific smoothie.

    How to Choose a Mango

    To choose a ripe mango, squeeze it gently. it should give slightly like a ripe peach or avocado. Firm but with a slight give. The color of the skin is not the best indicator. If the mango is hard, keep it at room temperature until it is ripe, then refrigerate, but not before. Once refrigerated, a mango will last about 5 days. If they get soft and you don't have time to use them, peel, cube and freeze the flesh so it is not wasted.

    how to cut up a mango

    How To Cut Up a Mango

    Mangoes can be challenging to cut up the first time, so here are a few tips. Mangoes have a large, flat, center seed.

    First, wash the mango. Next, stand the mango with the stem end on the cutting board. Cut a little off center, through the flesh and you will get a large piece of mango, sometimes called a cheek. You may need to test with your knife a time or two to find just the right spot to cut. If you cut too close and hit the seed, just move a ¼″ off and try again.

    how to cut up a mango

    When you have cut the "cheeks" off the seed, cut a grid pattern on the mango with a sharp paring knife. Don't cut through the skin. Then scoop out the cubes with a spoon. Most of what is left is the seed. You might be able to harvest a little more mango flesh off the center piece, but not much.

    For more information (and a video) on how to cut up a mango, check out the National Mango Board site.

    More About Healthy Smoothie Ingredients

    Baby Spinach Leaves

    This green smoothie gets its beautiful bright color from fresh baby spinach leaves. While spinach might sound like a strange thing for a smoothie, it's a great way to get leafy greens in as you start your day. Add about a cup, or a big handful, to your blender. Spinach is super-nutritious and one of the world's healthiest vegetables, rich in vitamins and minerals, plus anti-inflammatory benefits.

    Chia Seeds

    Another addition to this smoothie is chia seed. Chia was eaten by the ancient Aztec Indians for strength. Chia is a source of omega fatty acids and dietary fiber, plus calcium, iron, potassium and protein. The brand I buy is Navitas Naturals. Maker of high quality products, their chia is organic, non-GMO, raw, gluten-free, and vegan. Check out their other fantastic products too. Lots of healthy things to add to your smoothies, and overall, your diet. Superfoods!

    Once your mango is cubed, get out your blender or Vitamix, ready your spinach, almond milk and chia seeds and get ready for a great smoothie!

    Another Great Mango Recipe

    For another recipe idea using mangoes, try this pineapple-mango salsa. It's great on grilled chicken, shrimp and fish.

    green smoothie

    📖 Recipe

    Tropical Mango Green Smoothie

    Green Smoothie Recipe with Mango

    Sally Cameron
    Spinach and mango might sound like a crazy combination, but it makes a tasty and healthy tropical green smoothie. Add chia seed for protein and fiber. Use your favorite protein powder. If you want a frosty cold smoothie, freeze the mango ahead of time. To reduce sugar, use a greenish banana instead of a ripe one.
    5 from 1 vote
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 5 minutes mins
    Total Time 5 minutes mins
    Course Beverage, Breakfast
    Cuisine American
    Servings 1 serving
    Calories 391 kcal

    Equipment

    • blender

    Ingredients
      

    • 10 ounces almond milk preferably homemade
    • 1 big handful baby spinach leaves
    • 1-2 scoops preferred protein powder 
    • ½ cup cubed mango fresh or frozen
    • 2 tablespoons chia seed
    • ½ banana

    Would you like to save this recipe?

    Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

    Instructions
     

    • Place everything in a blender in order given.
    • Process until you reach desired texture.

    Notes

    This green smoothie gets its beautiful bright color from fresh baby spinach leaves. While spinach might sound like a strange thing for a smoothie, it's a great way to get green leafy vegetables in as you start your day. Most people say they can't even taste it!

    Nutrition

    Calories: 391kcalCarbohydrates: 42gProtein: 33gFat: 13gSaturated Fat: 1gCholesterol: 50mgSodium: 464mgPotassium: 854mgFiber: 13gSugar: 21gVitamin A: 6289IUVitamin C: 51mgCalcium: 646mgIron: 5mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    Healthy Granola Recipe

    04/15/2023 by Sally Cameron 6 Comments

    A close up of an open jar of homemade granola with a silver scoop.

    This healthy granola recipe is crazy crunchy, and maple-roasted with real coconut oil-toasty oats, warm cinnamon, and a mix of nuts and seeds for flavor you'll actually crave. It's whole-grain, naturally sweetened, and takes about 10 minutes of prep; the oven does the rest. Use certified gluten-free oats if needed.

    A glass jar of freshly baked granola with a scooper in the top.

    After years of making this easy healthy granola recipe for clients and loved ones-and hearing "this is the best granola ever"-I had to share it with you, too. It tastes amazing, uses real, wholesome ingredients, and proves that healthy homemade granola can be ridiculously good without refined sugar or unhealthy fats like many store-bought brands. Seriously, try this healthy gluten-free granola recipe!

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Healthy Granola Recipe Highlights

    • Healthier ingredients - No refined sugar, high-fructose corn syrup, or poor quality oils.
    • Truly easy - A few minutes of prep and the oven does the rest.
    • Customizable sweetness - Add dried fruit, or skip it for a lower-sugar version.
    • Whole-grain goodness - Rolled oats (GF if needed) deliver fiber, minerals, and that satisfying crunchy bite.
    • Low-sugar granola - Per-serving sugar is lower than many store-bought brands

    For a fun and more portable version of healthy homemade, granola try my chocolate chip granola bites recipe. They are sort of like granola bars but round.

    Ingredients You'll Need

    Ingredients for healthy homemade granola in bowls ready to start baking.
    • Rolled oats - Use old-fashioned rolled oats; gluten-free if needed. Avoid extra-thick or quick-cooking oats for the best crunch.
    • Coconut - Unsweetened shredded coconut. Skip sweetened; it's sticky and overly sugary.
    • Nuts - Chopped walnuts and blanched slivered almonds for crunch, flavor, and healthy fats.
    • Sunflower seeds - Raw and unsalted so you control the seasoning.
    • Flaxseed - Use either whole seeds and grind fresh before mixing or ground flaxseed. Store ground flax in the fridge or freezer.
    • Hemp hearts - Raw shelled hemp seeds (hearts), not powder. Delicate, nutty, and protein-rich.
    • Maple syrup - 100% pure maple, not fake "pancake syrup" for the best flavor and crunch.
    • Fat - Use unrefined extra-virgin coconut oil for its toasty aroma, rich flavor, and a crisp texture. It hardens slightly as it cools, helping the granola set and bind for that signature crunchy coating.
    • Vanilla - Extract or vanilla bean paste; paste adds visible specks and a more pronounced vanilla note.
    • Spices - Cinnamon is classic; try a pinch of Chinese five-spice or pumpkin pie spice for variation.
    • Dried fruit (optional) - For lower sugar, skip. If using, stir in after baking and cooling to keep the fruit soft and the granola crisp. See tips section below.

    Please see the recipe card for measurements and salt.

    Substitutions and Variations

    • Coconut allergy - Swap coconut oil for avocado oil or a healthy neutral oil, and skip the shredded coconut.
    • Swap nuts - Use pecans instead of walnuts.
    • Flavor - Try almond extract instead of vanilla )or a little of both).
    • Add-ins - Try chocolate chips or sugar-free chocolate chips after cooling.

    How to Make Health Homemade Granola

    Pre-heat the oven to 250°F and ready 2 half sheet rimmed baking sheets. If you only have one, you can still make homemade granola, it just needs to bake longer to get crunchy ( up to 3 hours vs 2 hours).

    Ingredients in a glass bowl to mix for granola.
    Mixing wet ingredients with dry ingredients for homemade granola.

    Step 1: In a large mixing bowl, measure out the dry ingredients: oats, nuts and seeds. A kitchen scale makes it easy and fast.

    Step 2: Whisk together the wet ingredients: maple syrup, melted coconut oil, vanilla extract, and your spices of choice, and a pinch of salt. Pour the maple syrup mixture into the dry mix and stir until the oats feel uniformly heavy. A large non-stick silicone spatula makes it easier. Stir really well! There should be no dry areas left.

    Spreading granola mixture onto a baking sheet for baking.

    Step 3: Spread granola mixture evenly onto 2 rimmed baking sheets (no parchment paper) and bake for 2 hours in total until golden brown.

    I use a metal spatula (sometimes called a turner) to loosen the granola from the pan and my hands to mix. The pan is hot but the granola is not too hot for your hands.

    Baked granola cooling on a rack with a metal spatula to stir.

    Step 4: Cool gluten-free granola completely after baking. It crisps more as it cools. Mix in dried fruit if desired. See tips on choosing dried fruit below, or skip it to reduce sugar. It's delicious either way. Store in an airtight container.

    Chef's Tip - Want More Clusters? This recipe bakes into a loose, crunchy granola, if you stir it halfway. If you prefer granola clusters, skip stirring while baking, press the mixture firmly into an even layer on the pan before it goes in the oven, and allow it to cool completely before breaking it apart. For extra binding, mix in 1-2 lightly beaten egg white before baking.

    Tips for Adding Dried Fruit in Granola

    If you have asthma or a sulfite sensitivity, always read labels and choose unsulfured dried fruit (without sulfur dioxide). Sulfur dioxide is a common preservative that helps dried fruit-like apricots-keep their bright color. Sulfite-free apricots are usually brown instead of orange, but they're the safer choice if you're sensitive.

    Examples of dried fruit options for homemade granola.
    • Flavor ideas. - Raisins or currants (classic), tart cherries (bakery vibes), chopped dates (caramel notes), apricots (bright), blueberries (breakfast-y).
    • Add after baking (and cooling) - Stir dried fruit in once the granola is completely cool so the fruit stays soft and the granola stays crisp.
    • Chop for even bites - Cut larger fruits (apricots, figs, dates, cherries) to raisin-size pieces so they distribute evenly.
    • Read labels - Look for unsweetened or apple-juice-sweetened fruit and unsulfured options (common sulfites show up in apricots, pineapple, etc.).
    • Lower-sugar picks - Golden berries and white mulberries are naturally less sweet/tarter than many dried fruits. Brands vary-check the nutrition panel.
    • Start light - A little goes a long way; add just enough for pops of chewy sweetness rather than blanketing the batch.
    Homemade granola with berries and coconut milk pouring into the bowl,

    Serving Suggestions

    • Yogurt topper: Sprinkle over Greek yogurt (or coconut yogurt) for a quick breakfast or build pretty breakfast parfaits with fresh berries.
    • Like cereal: Serve in a bowl with almond milk, coconut milk, or dairy milk-it stays loose and crunchy.
    • Snack attack: Keep a jar on the counter and scoop a small handful for an afternoon pick-me-up.
    • Dessert finish: Dust over frozen yogurt or ice cream; add a few raspberries for color and contrast.
    • Fruit-forward: Skip dried fruit and pair with fresh berries-raspberries, blueberries, strawberries, or blackberries are perfect.
    • Bowls & bakes (optional): Sprinkle on smoothie bowls, baked apples/pears, or roasted stone fruit for a toasty crunch.

    Chef's Note: Homemade gluten-free granola is a terrific gift from the kitchen for a hostess or holiday gift. Package it in cello bags and tie with a ribbon. Another terrific homemade gift? So are these roasted cashews. Alway a hit.

    Breakfast setting with a jar of granola, bowls, and raspberries.

    Recipe FAQs

    Is eating homemade granola healthy?

    Yes - especially when you make it yourself. Homemade granola is healthier than most store-bought versions because you control the ingredients, the amount of sugar, and the type of fat. It's whole-grain, satisfying, and naturally nutrient-dense when made with oats, nuts, and seeds.

    What is the healthiest way to eat granola?

    The quick answer: with yogurt! Yogurt adds protein to balance the carbs in granola. Layer it into breakfast parfaits with berries or other fruit, or enjoy it simply in a bowl with milk. It also makes a great snack eaten out of hand.

    Why isn't my homemade granola crunchy?

    To make granola crunchy, bake it low and slow to dry it out without burning. I bake mine at 250°F for 2-3 hours, which creates that perfectly crisp texture. Stir occasionally, then let it cool completely before storing-it continues to crisp as it cools.

    How do I make granola with clusters?

    This recipe is designed to be loose and crunchy. For granola clusters, use a bit more binder (extra maple + oil or 1 lightly whisked egg white), press firmly on the pan, don't stir, and cool completely before breaking apart.

    More Breakfast Recipes

    From chia pudding to parfaits and waffles and even a nice breakfast casserole for brunch, check out the breakfast category for inspiration.

    • A glass of cream chia coconut pudding topped with blueberries and raspberries with a silver spoon.
      Chia Pudding with Coconut Milk
    • A single yogurt breakfast parfait with layers of fruit, granola, and yogurt.
      How to Make Greek Yogurt Parfaits
    • Close up of crispy golden waffles with blueberries, raspberries, strawberries.
      Gluten Free Waffles (Crisp & Golden)
    • A piece of golden baked breakfast casserole with eggs on a plate with a fork and dollop of sour cream on top.
      Cottage Cheese and Egg Bake

    ⭐️Did You Make This Recipe?

    If you make this easy simple granola recipe, please add your comment. I appreciate your feedback and enjoy hearing from you. If you loved it, please give it a 5-star rating! They really help other readers.

    📖 Recipe

    A close up of an open jar of homemade granola with a silver scoop.

    Healthy Granola Recipe

    Sally Cameron
    Homemade granola is the best! Crunchy, golden, and fresh. For gluten-free purchase gluten-free oats. For dried fruit options see notes below. Skip all fruit if reducing sugar. Yield 2 quarts of granola, or 1 1/34 pounds.
    5 from 2 votes
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 10 minutes mins
    Cook Time 2 hours hrs
    Cooling time 20 minutes mins
    Total Time 2 hours hrs 30 minutes mins
    Course Breakfast, Snack
    Cuisine American
    Servings 16 ½ cup servings (yield 1 ¾ pounds)
    Calories 252 kcal

    Equipment

    • 1-2 Rimmed baking sheets half sheet size
    • digital kitchen scale optional but really helpful

    Ingredients
      

    Dry Ingredients

    • 3 cups traditional rolled oats (gluten-free or not) 12 ounces
    • ¾ cup unsweetened shredded coconut 2 ounces
    • ½ cup chopped walnuts 2 ounces
    • ½ cup blanched slivered almonds 2 ¾ ounces
    • ¼ cup raw sunflower seeds 1 ½ ounces
    • 3 tablespoons ground flax seed
    • 3 tablespoons hemp seed

    Wet Ingredients

    • ½ cup real maple syrup 5.3 ounces
    • ½ cup melted extra virgin coconut oil 4 ounces, or MCT oil
    • 2 teaspoons vanilla extract or 1 teaspoon vanilla paste
    • 1 teaspoon ground cinnamon or Chinese Five Spice
    • ⅛ teaspoon fine sea salt

    Dried Fruit Options (omit to lower sugar)

    • ¼ cup dried cranberries
    • ¼ cup golden berries

    Would you like to save this recipe?

    Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

    Instructions
     

    Mix Granola

    • Pre-heat the oven to 250°F. In a large bowl mix rolled oats, nuts and seeds. In a large measuring cup whisk maple syrup, oil, vanilla and cinnamon until smooth. Pour the maple mixture into the oats mixture and stir until well combined. The oats should feel uniformly heavy and well coated with no dry areas.

    Bake Granola

    • Pour granola between two half sheet sized rimmed baking sheets and bake for 2 hours, until dry and crunchy. It will get crunchier as it cools.
      Note below if you only have one baking sheet.

    Cool and Add Fruit

    • Remove from the oven and cool, then stir in coconut shreds or chips and dried fruit if using. Store in a tightly covered container in the pantry.

    Notes

    If you only have 1 half rimmed baking sheet, it may take up to 3 hours to bake as the granola is not as spread out. Two works better. 
    Larger sheet pan. I have a 30" wide sheet pan and a large oven, so I can get a whole batch on this single pan. If you have a large oven, look for a larger sheet pan that fits vs the standard half-sheet size. I make granola frequently so this works for me, and maybe it will for you too.
    Dried fruit options: besides dried cranberries, try dried cherries, blueberries, golden berries (lower sugar), apricots, goji berries, currants, pitted chopped dates, or raisins. 
    Nutritional note: Made without dried fruit, this granola has 7 grams of sugar per ½ cup serving. With the cranberries and golden berries added, it has 9 grams of sugar per ½ cup serving.

    Nutrition

    Serving: 0.5cupCalories: 252kcalCarbohydrates: 21gProtein: 5gFat: 18gSaturated Fat: 9gPolyunsaturated Fat: 5gMonounsaturated Fat: 3gTrans Fat: 0.001gSodium: 23mgPotassium: 166mgFiber: 4gSugar: 7gVitamin A: 17IUVitamin C: 0.2mgCalcium: 42mgIron: 2mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    Saffron Risotto (Risotto Milanese)

    10/03/2011 by Sally Cameron 2 Comments

    golden risotto Milanese with peas

    Making saffron risotto is like therapy in a pan. Slowly stir hot broth steeped with saffron into Italian short-grain rice until the grains are tender and creamy. A little wine for the pan, a little wine for you. And then you get to eat this creamy classic Italian dish. Here is my favorite, to which I've added peas. All ingredients are easily kept in the pantry. Serve it as a main topped with shrimp, chicken, scallops, meat, or as a side dish. Risotto is simply heavenly. It takes just a little patience but that first bite will make it worthwhile.

    Golden risotto Milanese with saffron and peas in a bowl served as a side dish.

    My favorite risotto recipe and I've been making it for decades. Once you learn the basics of making risotto, you can make many delightful variations. I'm often asked what would be my last meal. My answer? Risotto Milanese with lobster (which I make at the holidays), and a glass of Champagne, but I make this simple risotto weekly in fall and winter.

    Why You'll Love Saffron Risotto

    • If you love rice, you'll love risotto.
    • It's comfort food in a pan; the ultimate rice dish.
    • Ingredients are easily kept in the pantry.
    • There are many variations of risotto.
    • Add a protein, like seared scallops, shrimp, diced chicken, cook sausage, or meat.

    Recipe Ingredients

    This ingredient list reflects risotto in the style of Milan, Italy, called Milanese. It's an incredible Italian rice dish. It's also called Risotto alla Milanese.

    • Chicken broth: This is a good place to use homemade. If you buy your broth, buy low sodium and read labels to get a good quality broth. Look in the freezer section too.
    • Saffron: The king of spices. Saffron is a beautiful red color and looks like threads. It's the most expensive spice in the world, sold in very small amounts. Good thing is you only need a little bit for the recipe. It gives this recipe the beautiful golden color and flavor.
    • Oil: good quality extra virgin olive oil shines in risotto. Here is the olive oil always in my pantry.
    • Onion: Sautéed onion is the savory base for risotto called the soffritto. It's like the Italian mirepoix trio of onion, carrot and celery. For risotto, use just onion. Go with a yellow, brown or white onion.
    • Garlic: A must have for more flavor, cooked with the onion. Use fresh cloves.
    • Rice: For creamy risotto, use the right rice; Italian superfino rices. They have just the right amount of starch. My favorite is this carnaroli rice but arborio works too and is more available in the markets. You can't use standard rice for real risotto.
    • Wine: White wine is the best for this risotto. Use a little mini airline sized bottle, either Sauvignon Blanc or Chardonnay. Wine adds dimension and flavor.
    • Peas: Frozen petite peas work well, and the petites are more tender than regular peas. If it's spring, use fresh peas and blanch them first (cook briefly in boiling salted water). Optional.
    • Parmesan cheese: Get real Parmigiano-Reggiano, the Italian "king of cheeses". It's optional if you are dairy-free, but it adds a rich saltiness and classic savory flavor if you can handle dairy.

    Please see the recipe card for measurements.

    Chef's Tip: Good broth is important for risotto. If you 've never made homemade, try one of these two recipes: long simmered homemade chicken brone broth or a faster version, Instant Pot chicken broth or other pressure cooker. Freeze homemade broth in batches for recipes such as this risotto.

    Substitutions and Variations

    There are almost endless variations of risotto, here are just a few ideas:

    • Skip the peas and use cooked chopped asparagus for an asparagus risotto recipe.
    • Add crisp crumbled bacon for risotto with peas and bacon.
    • Add chopped oil-packed (drained) sun-dried tomatoes.
    • Add a little chopped fennel to the onion when cooking the soffritto.
    • Add mushrooms.
    • Add a protein, like diced cooked chicken, for chicken and pea risotto.
    • If you prefer not to cook with wine, just skip it and continue with the recipe.
    • Add diced cooked ham for a pea and ham risotto.
    • To top with spicy Italian shrimp, make the easy shrimp from this recipe.
    • For a mushroom risotto, skip the saffron and stir in a ¼ or more of this mushroom duxelles recipe. It's devine.

    Recipe Instructions

    Risotto is not hard to cook. Get your prep work done, and with a little patience and stirring, you'll have a wonderful risotto dinner.

    Step 1: Prep and set-up for cooking. Chop the onion and garlic, get the broth heated up on the stove top, and measure out your rice and wine. Place everything near the stove before you start.

    Step 2: Saute the onion in olive oil until soft, then add the garlic and cook briefly. Add the rice and cook for 1-2 minutes until the grains are coated in oil.

    Cooking risotto in a pan, showing when to add more broth.

    Step 3: Add the wine and cook most of it off. Next, start slowly adding simmering broth, stirring gently with a wooden spoon. Add the broth at about ¼ cup to a ⅓ cup pace. You will know when to add more broth when you can draw your spoon across the rice and a trough forms.

    When you're near the end of the broth, stir in the peas. Note - You may not use all 3 cups of broth. Taste the risotto. It should be tender and creamy to the bite. Serve in warmed bowls, with Parmesan if using.

    The Best Pan for Risotto

    A good pan for making risotto (and sauces) is called a saucier. It has sloped sides making it easy to stir the rice. It's a terrific pan to have in your collection. If you don't have such a pan, be sure as you stir your risotto to get into the outer edges of the pan so the grains of rice do not stick. 

    If you have a medium size, 3 ½ quart Le Creuset, its works fine because the sides are not perfectly straight and just a little sloped. Use a wooden spoon when making risotto to treat the beautiful rice grains gently.

    Serving Suggestions

    Serve risotto in low wide soup bowls, pasta bowls, or risotto bowls. Warm them up in a low oven keeps the risotto warm.

    Recipe FAQs

    How is risotto different than rice?

    Risotto is the name of a classic Italian rice dish made with one of several special Italian superfino rices with high starch contents: Arborio, Carnaroli, or Vialone Nano. These rice varieties are higher starch and short to medium grain, and they absorb a lot of broth providing the creamy texture of good risotto.

    Can you use normal rice for risotto rice?

    Purists and risotto-lovers (like me) say no. Some people say a long grain white rice will work, but it's just not the same. Buy the real rice for risotto and you will see why it's so good. Risotto is not made with standard rice.

    Why don't you wash rice for risotto?

    Because you want the starchiness of the rice as it produces the creamy texture of risotto.

    More Recipes

    For more recipes with rice, or making cauliflower rice for a lower carb side dish option check these recipes out. The pork chops make a terrific gravy, and are nice served with rice.

    • A bowl of chicken rice soup with herbs in a white bowl.
      Easy Instant Pot Chicken Rice Soup Recipe
    • brown rice in white bowl
      How to Cook Rice Like Pasta to Reduce Arsenic
    • cauliflower rice
      Cheesy Cauliflower Rice
    • Close up of creamy pork chops with sauce.
      Sour Cream Pork Chops Recipe

    ⭐️Did You Make This Recipe?

    If you make this recipe, please add your comment. I appreciate your feedback and enjoy hearing from you. If you loved it, please give it a 5-star rating! They really help other readers.

    📖 Recipe

    tisotto Milanese | afoodcentriclife.com

    Saffron Risotto

    Sally Cameron
    Risotto is a wonderful comfort food dish. The ingredients may already be in your pantry and fridge. Make it your own: Top with chicken, seared scallops, shrimp or even sliced chicken sausage for a satisfying main course. This recipe doubles for four, it will take longer to cook. 
    5 from 1 vote
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 10 minutes mins
    Cook Time 30 minutes mins
    Total Time 40 minutes mins
    Course Main Course
    Cuisine Italian
    Servings 2
    Calories 565 kcal

    Equipment

    • 3 quart pan preferably a saucier with sloped side

    Ingredients
      

    • 2/12 cups broth: chicken, vegetable, beef, veal, turkey preferably homemade
    • ⅛-1/4 teaspoon saffron threads crushed
    • 2 tablespoons olive oil
    • ½ cup finely chopped onion ½ small
    • 1 large fresh garlic clove finely chopped or zested
    • ½ cup Carnaroli or Arborio rice
    • ⅓ cup dry white wine
    • ⅓ cup   frozen petite peas thawed, optional
    • ⅓ cup grated Parmigiano-Reggiano cheese optional
    • Salt and pepper to taste

    Would you like to save this recipe?

    Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

    Instructions
     

    • Place chicken broth in a small saucepan and bring to a bare simmer. Crush the saffron into the pan and allow it to release its flavor and golden color into the broth.
    • Place a medium pan over medium heat. Heat olive oil then add onion and cook until soft and translucent, stirring with a wooden spoon.  Add the garlic and cook another 60 seconds. Watch your heat and turn down if needed.
    • Add the rice and cook for 1-2 minutes, stirring, until the rice is coated with the oil. Add the wine and cook until it is almost gone. Season with a little salt.
    • Begin adding the hot broth about a ¼ cup or so at a time, stirring the risotto gently with the wooden spoon until the broth is absorbed. Do again with more broth, stirring until almost absorbed. Add more broth when you can draw your spoon through the rice and it holds a line.
      Repeat until most of the broth is incorporated. Towards then end, taste it for texture. The rice should be al dente, soft to the bite. You will feel when it is done. It takes about 25 minutes. Taste and season with additional salt and pepper.

    Notes

    About a good pan for making risotto (and sauces). The best pan has sloped sides making it easy to stir the rice. It's called a saucier. It's a terrific pan to have in your collection, If you don't have such a pan, be sure as you stir your risotto to get into the outer edges of the pan so the grains of rice do not stick. 
    Variations
    If you are not a pea fan, use sliced, cooked asparagus. To make it vegetarian or vegan, use homemade vegetable broth and skip the cheese. 

    Nutrition

    Calories: 565kcalCarbohydrates: 69gProtein: 20gFat: 21gSaturated Fat: 5gCholesterol: 11mgSodium: 380mgPotassium: 530mgFiber: 4gSugar: 5gVitamin A: 315IUVitamin C: 15mgCalcium: 237mgIron: 4mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    Mussels in White Wine (Moules Marinières)

    10/10/2011 by Sally Cameron 5 Comments

    Steamed mussels in a white bowl

    Mussels in white wine, also known as the French classic Moules Marinières, are perfect for a quick weeknight dinner-and just as fun for entertaining. Mussels are budget-friendly, full of flavor, and cook in minutes. Grab a loaf of crusty bread for soaking up that aromatic broth, and keep a soup spoon handy because you'll want every last sip. Never cooked mussels before? I'll show you how easy it is.

    Black shell steamed mussels with red napkin.

    If you've only enjoyed mussels at a restaurant and never made them at home, now is the time. While traditional recipes use only white wine, I sometimes add a splash of the classic French liqueur Pernod for a subtle twist. Prefer to keep it traditional? Just use white wine. And don't buy a big bottle to experiment-grab an airline-size mini bottle at the liquor store.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why You'll Enjoy Mussels in White Wine

    • Easy to make - Mussels cook quickly and are nearly impossible to overthink.
    • Budget-friendly - An impressive dish that's surprisingly inexpensive.
    • They tell you when they're done - Once the shells open, they're ready.
    • Fun to cook - Especially if you've never made mussels at home before.

    Ingredients You'll Need

    • Olive oil - For sautéing the aromatics and building flavor in the broth.
    • Fennel - Fresh fennel adds a light, sweet anise note; save the fronds for garnish.
    • Leek - Use the white and pale green parts only for a gentle, aromatic base.
    • Garlic - Adds that signature punch of flavor.
    • White wine - Use a dry white wine such as Sauvignon Blanc or unoaked Chardonnay.
    • Mussels - Fresh, live mussels; see tips below for buying, cleaning, and storing.
    • Bread - For soaking up the broth-gluten-free or regular, sourdough or artisan.

    Garishes

    • Tomato - Roma tomato as they are meatier.
    • Herbs - Chopped Italian parsley for freshness and color.

    Substitutions and Variations

    • Pernod - A classic French anise liqueur with a lightly sweet licorice-style flavor. It's delicious but strong, so if you use it, think "a splash' in combination with the wine for a subtle twist. If you don't have Pernod, you can substitute Pastis or French anisette.
    • For no alcohol: use vegetable broth with fresh squeezed lemon juice. Another opt-in is Verjus, and unfermented (no-alcohol) grape juice or clam juice. This is the best option for kids too.

    Buying, Storing, and Cleaning Mussels

    Buying Mussels

    Fresh mussels should smell clean and briny, like the ocean-not fishy. Look for mussels sold loose or in netted bags on ice at a good seafood counter. Many mussels will be closed, but a few may be slightly open if they're cold. Give them a minute, then tap or gently squeeze the shell-if it closes, it's alive. Discard any mussels with cracked, chipped, or broken shells, and any that don't close after a minute or two.

    Storing Mussels

    Mussels are best cooked within a day of purchase. When you get home, transfer them to a large bowl and set them over ice (or nest the bowl in a larger bowl of ice). Cover with a damp paper towel or clean kitchen towel and refrigerate until ready to cook. Don't store them sealed in plastic, or they can suffocate and die.

    Cleaning Mussels

    Just before cooking, place the bowl in the sink and rinse the mussels under cold running water. Swirl them around and let them sit briefly to help loosen any grit, then drain. Scrub the shells with a brush and remove any dark, frizzy "beard" (the fibers that anchor them). Pull it off firmly with your fingers; if it's stubborn, use small pliers.

    Chef's Tip - How to Double Mussels Without Overcrowding
    This recipe is written for 2 pounds of mussels (about 2 servings). To serve 4, double the ingredients and cook the mussels loosely piled, not tightly packed. For best results (depending on pot size), cook in two batches (and keep the first warm) or split the mussels between two large pots (2 pounds per pot) so they have room to open and steam properly. A pasta pot works well; you don't need an oversized stockpot. Just use a big pot that holds 2 pounds.

    How to Make Mussels in White WIne

    You'll need a large pot with a tight-fitting lid. How many mussels you can cook at once depends on the size of your pot. If you're cooking for 4 people and want everything ready at the same time, use two large pots and cook 2 pounds per pot. If you have a very large stockpot (about 12 quarts), you can cook all 4 pounds in one pot.

    Prep the Vegetables

    To make things easy, do your prep ahead of time: slice the fennel, leek, and tomato for the broth, and chop the herbs for garnish.

    • Trim the fennel bulb, reserving the fronds for garnish, and thinly slice.
    • Use only the white and pale green parts of the leek. Slice lengthwise, rinse well to remove any grit, then slice thinly.

    How to Cook the Mussels

    Heat a little olive oil in a large pot over medium-low heat. Add the fennel and leek and cook gently until soft and translucent. Add the garlic and cook for one minute.

    Move the pot off the heat, then add the Pernod (if using) and white wine.

    Safety tip: Always add alcohol off the heat-liqueurs have a higher alcohol content and can be flammable.

    Return the pot to the heat, increase to medium, and bring the broth to a boil. Add the cleaned mussels, cover tightly, and cook for about 3 minutes. Peek under the lid to check-most of the mussels should be open.

    Knowing When Mussels Are Done

    Once the shells open, the mussels are done. Give the pot a quick shake, cover, and cook about 1 more minute to allow any remaining closed mussels to open. Turn off the heat and let the pot rest briefly while you get the bowls ready. Serve immediately while hot.

    Steamed mussels in a white bowl.

    Serving Mussels

    Serve mussels in warm bowls with plenty of broth, or spoon them over pasta (or zucchini noodles for a low-carb option). Divide the mussels between bowls and ladle the flavorful juices over the top. Discard any mussels that don't open. Finish with a sprinkle of diced tomato and parsley (or reserved fennel fronds) for garnish.

    Recipe FAQs

    Can I make this recipe without wine?
    Yes. Use vegetable broth and finish with fresh lemon juice for brightness. Verjus or unfermented grape juice are also good substitutes.

    How long do mussels take to cook?
    Mussels cook very quickly-usually 3-5 minutes once covered. As soon as the shells open, they're done.

    How do I know if mussels are fresh?

    Fresh mussels should smell clean and briny (like the ocean) and have intact shells. Many will be closed, but a few may be slightly open if they're cold. Give them a minute, then tap the shell or gently squeeze it-if it closes, it's alive. If it stays open after a minute or two, or has a cracked shell, discard it.

    What do I do with mussels that don't open?

    Discard them. Mussels that don't open during cooking should not be eaten.

    More Easy Seafood Recipes

    Seafood doesn't have to be complicated. Here are a few more quick, reliable recipes to keep in your dinner rotation. Be sure to check out the seafood recipe index.

    • Grilled shrimp on bamboo sticks on a white platter with chimchurri sauce.
      Shrimp Skewers (Grilled or Oven)
    • baked lemon shrimp scampi
      Easy Baked Shrimp Scampi
    • seared scallops with pasta
      Pasta Recipe With Scallops, Tomatoes, and Zucchini
    • Seared salmon
      Simple Stovetop Salmon

    Please Leave a Comment

    If you made mussels in white wine, please leave a comment or ask a question if needed. I love hearing from you and am here to help. Comments and questions help other readers too.

    📖 Recipe

    steamed mussels | AFoodcentriclife.com

    Mussels in White Wine (Moules Marinières)

    Sally Cameron
    Steamed mussels is an inexpensive and easy meal that comes together quickly.  The mussels steam in about three to five minutes. Plan on a pound per person as a main course. To steam four pounds I use two large pots. This recipe doubles easily for four servings or halve it for a single serving. The classic French liqueur Pernod is flavored with star anise and herbs, a wonderful addition to steamed mussels. See tips for buying mussels below. Serve alone or over pasta or zucchini noodles.
    5 from 1 vote
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 15 minutes mins
    Cook Time 7 minutes mins
    Total Time 22 minutes mins
    Course Main Course
    Cuisine French
    Servings 2
    Calories 411 kcal

    Equipment

    • large pot with lid

    Ingredients
      

    • 1-2 tablespoons extra virgin olive oil
    • ½ small fennel bulb save fronds to chop for garnish, diced small
    • ½ medium leek white and pale green parts only, thinly sliced
    • 1 large garlic clove chopped fine
    • 3 ounces dry white wine or 5 ounces if not using Pernod
    • 2 ounces Pernod
    • 2 pounds fresh live mussels scrubbed clean and de-bearded

    Garnishes

    • 1 Roma tomato chopped fine
    • 1 tablespoon fresh chopped Italian parsley
    • 1 small loaf bread to soak up the broth gluten-free or regular

    Would you like to save this recipe?

    Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

    Instructions
     

    • Place a large pot over medium-low heat and add olive oil. When warm, add the fennel and leek. Cook, stirring occasionally, until soft and translucent, about 2 minutes. Do not brown the vegetables. Add the garlic and cook one minute.
    • Move the pan off of the heat and carefully add the wine and Pernod. Place the pan back on the heat and allow broth to come to a boil. Add the mussels, cover with a tight fitting lid and turn heat down to medium. Steam mussels until they have opened, about 3-5 minutes. Check pan at 3 minutes. If they are mostly opened, replace lid, shake the pan and steam 1 minute longer. Turn off heat.
    • To serve, distribute mussels between two warmed bowls, spoon broth over the top and garnish with tomatoes and herbs. Serve with bread to soak up all of the broth.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 411kcalCarbohydrates: 19gProtein: 29gFat: 12gSaturated Fat: 2gCholesterol: 65mgSodium: 702mgPotassium: 1144mgFiber: 3gSugar: 2gVitamin A: 1246IUVitamin C: 36mgCalcium: 114mgIron: 10mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    Easy Coleslaw Recipe and Dressing

    07/18/2022 by Sally Cameron Leave a Comment

    White shallow bowl stilled with green cabbage coleslaw, carrots, and parsley with a light dressing.

    Green cabbage is the star in this easy coleslaw recipe. With just three fresh ingredients and a light, creamy dressing, this homemade slaw is crisp, crunchy, and clean-tasting. If you've written off coleslaw as heavy or gloppy, this fresh version will change your mind. It's a perfect make-ahead side dish, too. Bonus: I've included 7 tasty variations so you'll never get bored with coleslaw.

    Round white bowl of colorful coleslaw with carrots and parsley.

    This easy coleslaw recipe is the classic warm-weather salad for everything on your summer menu, from grilled chicken and seafood to pulled pork, tacos, and burgers. Cabbage is budget-friendly, crisp, and packed with nutrients, and making coleslaw from scratch lets you control the ingredients. No refined sugar, questionable oils, preservatives, or heavy-handed dressing-just fresh, crunchy slaw with clean flavor.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Easy Coleslaw Recipe Highlights

    • Simple ingredients - Just three fresh ingredients plus a light, creamy dressing.
    • Perfect summer side - Serve it with grilled chicken, seafood, pulled pork, tacos, burgers, and more.
    • Make-ahead friendly - Prep the cabbage and carrots ahead, then dress the slaw closer to serving for the best crunch.

    For another terrific summer salad, try this lemony Mediterranean pasta salad with so many good flavors.

    Recipe Ingredients

    Just 3 simple ingredients make the best, easy coleslaw recipe dressed with a creamy coleslaw dressing.

    ingredients to make simple coleslaw, carrots, cabbage, and parsley.
    Coleslaw dressing ingredients in small glass prep bowls on the counter.

    Coleslaw

    • Cabbage: Green cabbage is classi and always available at the store. Skip the bags of coleslaw mix as it's usually not as fresh as homemade, plus bagged stuff carries it's own issues.
    • Carrots: Standard orange carrots add color, crunch, and sweetness.
    • Herbs: Parsley keeps it fresh and simple. Use the Italian parsley for best flavor, or cilantro.

    Coleslaw Dressing

    • Mayonnaise: Use your favorite light tasting mayo. Remember to look in the refrigerated dairy area as well as on the shelf.
    • Sour cream: Either dairy or dairy-free for vegan.
    • Sweetener: Honey, maple syrup, agave syrup, or keto honey with monk fruit all work.
    • Mustard: Whole grain Dijon mustard for flavor and texture but the creamy Dijon works too (or use both).
    • Prepared horseradish: Adds a little kick and flavor complexity.
    • Vinegar: Use apple cider vinegar or white vinegar for a little tang in the coleslaw dressing.
    • Celery seed: A little celery seed adds a great savory flavor undertone.

    Please see the recipe card for measurements and quantities.

    For another classic creamy dressing, try my homemade Caesar salad dressing.

    Substitutions and Variations

    • Add shallot - A little finely chopped shallot adds gentle onion flavor and extra texture.
    • Use more cabbage varieties - Add thinly sliced purple cabbage for color, or Napa cabbage for a softer, lighter texture.
    • Choose your pepper - White pepper blends into the dressing more quietly, while black pepper gives a little speckled look and sharper bite.
    • Add fresh herbs - Tarragon is lovely, mint is refreshing, and dill is terrific with cabbage.

    For another fun and colorful Asian inspired coleslaw salad with a cream almond butter dressing.

    How to Make Coleslaw

    There are two options on cutting cabbage for coleslaw: slice the cabbage by hand with a large chef's knife, or using the slicing blade in a food processor. Let me show you how to make this big green round head more manageable.

    Slicing Cabbage by Hand

    Slicing green cabbage on a light wood cutting board with a chef's knife.

    Trim a thin slice from the core end of the cabbage so it sits flat. Stand the cabbage on the flat end and cut it in half from top to bottom. Cut each half in half again to make quarters, then trim out the core. Lay each quarter flat on a cutting board and slice crosswise into very thin ribbons with a sharp chef's knife.

    Slicing Cabbage With a Food Processor

    A food processor bowl filled with thinly sliced green cabbage.

    Depending on the size of the food processor feed tube, cut the cabbage quarters in half again so they fit into the feed tube. Insert the thin slicing blade, put the cabbage chunks into the feed tube, sliced side down, and process through. If there are any bigger pieces of core, remove them.

    To finish the coleslaw, grate the carrots by hand or in the food processor with the grating blade. Chop the parsley by hand. Add everything to a large bowl and toss together.

    Ingredients for coleslaw dressing ready to be mixed in a bowl.

    Combine all coleslaw dressing ingredients into a bowl.

    creamy salad dressing with a silver whisk in a small glass bow.

    Whisk until smooth and creamy, or use a blender.

    A glass bowl of sliced cabbage, carrots, and herbs waiting for dressing for coleslaw.

    Serving Suggestions

    This easy coleslaw recipe is a crisp, refreshing side for anything barbecued or grilled, from chicken and ribs to seafood. It's terrific with burgers, tucked into tacos, or piled onto a pulled pork sandwich.

    Make it a bowl: Fill a shallow bowl with coleslaw as the base, then top with sliced grilled lemon chicken for an easy low-carb meal. It's versatile, customizable, and easy to change up with the flavor variations below.

    To keep coleslaw healthy, don't over do the dressing. Start by adding less than you think it needs as you can always add more versus over-dressing it.

    Small bowls of colorful coleslaw with an orange fork.

    Make Ahead & Storage

    Coleslaw is a terrific make-ahead recipe. Slice the cabbage, grate the carrots, and chop the fresh herbs up to 1 day ahead, then refrigerate them in an airtight container until ready to serve.

    For the best crunch, toss the vegetables with the dressing just before serving, or up to a few hours ahead.

    Store leftover coleslaw in an airtight container in the refrigerator and enjoy within a few days. The lighter it is dressed, the less likely it is to get soggy.

    Creative Coleslaw Add-Ins and Variations

    Try these fun and tasty variations.

    • Mexican-style coleslaw - Swap cilantro for parsley, add a squeeze of lime juice, and toss in sliced jalapeños. Thinly sliced red or orange bell peppers, radishes, and a pinch of cumin in the dressing are great too.
    • Colorful coleslaw - Add thinly sliced red cabbage plus red and yellow bell peppers for extra crunch and color.
    • Pineapple coleslaw - Add finely chopped pineapple, drained if juicy, plus sliced green onions. Stir a little ginger purée into the dressing, and finish with a sprinkle of shredded coconut for crunch.
    • Middle Eastern-style coleslaw - Skip the Dijon and add rose harissa, ground cumin, and smoked paprika to the dressing.
    • Vegan coleslaw - Use vegan sour cream, egg-free mayonnaise, and maple syrup, agave, or keto syrup.
    • Apple slaw - Add julienned Granny Smith apple for tart crunch.
    • Napa cabbage slaw - Substitute Napa cabbage for half of the green cabbage for a lighter, softer texture.

    More Terrific Salad Recipes

    Looking for more salad recipe ideas? Check out the salad recipe index for lots of tasty options.

    • Gluten-free pasta salad with tomatoes, cucumber, pine nuts, herbs, and more.
      Mediterranean Pasta Salad Recipe
    • Watermelon salad ready to serve with cucumber, feta, basil, shallots.
      Easy Watermelon Basil Salad with Feta Cheese
    • Emerald green snap pea salad with shallot, lemon and mint in a white bowl.
      Sugar Snap Pea Salad With Lemon and Mint
    • Colorful summer salad or burrata cheese, golden peaches, greens, basil, and balsamic dressing.
      Summer Burrata Peach Salad With Prosciutto

    ⭐️Did You Make This Coleslaw?

    If you make this easy coleslaw recipe, please add your comment. I appreciate your feedback and enjoy hearing from you. If you loved it, please give it a 5-star rating! They really help other readers.

    📖 Recipe

    White shallow bowl stilled with green cabbage coleslaw, carrots, and parsley with a light dressing.

    Easy Coleslaw Recipe

    Sally Cameron
    The quintessential, go-with-everything, budget friendly summer salad. Green cabbage is the star. See notes at the end for 7 fun flavor variations.
    5 from 1 vote
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 20 minutes mins
    Cook Time 0 minutes mins
    Total Time 20 minutes mins
    Course Salad, Side Dish
    Cuisine American
    Servings 8
    Calories 87 kcal

    Equipment

    • Food Processor with thin slicing and grating blades optional

    Ingredients
      

    Coleslaw

    • 2 pound head of green cabbage
    • 2 medium orange carrots peeled
    • 1-2 tablespoons finely chopped fresh parsley or cilantro

    Coleslaw Dressing (yield about 1 cup, makes extra)

    • ½ cup your favorite mayo
    • ¼ cup sour cream dairy or vegan
    • 1 tablespoon honey sub maple syrup, agave or keto honey
    • 1 tablespoon whole grain Dijon mustard
    • 1 tablespoon prepared horseradish optional
    • 2 teaspoons apple cider vinegar
    • ½ teaspoon celery seed
    • ¼ teaspoon sea salt
    • ¼ teaspoon pepper ground black or white

    Would you like to save this recipe?

    Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

    Instructions
     

    To shred cabbage by hand

    • Trim a thin slice from the core end of the cabbage so it sits flat. Stand the cabbage on the flat end and cut it in half from top to bottom. Cut each half in half again to make quarters, then trim out the core. Lay each quarter flat on a cutting board and slice crosswise into very thin ribbons with a sharp chef's knife.

    To shred in a food processor

    • Depending on the size of your food processor feed tube, cut the cabbage quarters in half again so they fit. Fit the processor with the thin slicing disc. Place the cabbage pieces in the feed tube, cut-side down, and process. Remove any larger pieces of core.

    Grate carrots, chop parsley

    • Grate the carrots with the shredding disc or a hand grater, and chop the parsley by hand.

    Make the Coleslaw Dressing (Yield 1 cup/makes extra)

    • Place all ingredients in a bowl and whisk until blended or use a blender so it's smooth. Taste is and adjust for more salt, pepper, mustard, etc.

    Notes

    Cabbage yield note - After trimming and core removal, a 2-pound cabbage gives closer to 1½-1¾ pounds usable shredded cabbage, which will still serve 8 people. This recipe halve easily with a half a head. 

    Nutrition

    Calories: 87kcalCarbohydrates: 11gProtein: 2gFat: 5gSaturated Fat: 1gPolyunsaturated Fat: 2gMonounsaturated Fat: 1gTrans Fat: 0.01gCholesterol: 6mgSodium: 246mgPotassium: 227mgFiber: 3gSugar: 7gVitamin A: 2734IUVitamin C: 35mgCalcium: 52mgIron: 1mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    Roasted Beets in Foil (Easy Oven Method)

    10/07/2012 by Sally Cameron 7 Comments

    Colorful red and golden roasted beets in aluminum foil.

    If you've never roasted beets in foil, you're in for a treat. This simple oven method transforms earthy, raw beets into tender, caramelized gems. Roasting them whole in foil locks in their sweetness and color while keeping cleanup easy. Once roasted, the skins slip right off, leaving you with perfectly cooked beets ready for salads, side dishes, or snacking.

    Red and gold beets roasting in aluminum foil with oil.

    Roasting beets in foil is one of the easiest and best ways to cook them. The foil creates a mini steam oven inside the packet, helping the beets cook evenly while intensifying their natural sweetness and keeping them moist. This simple method always delivers tender, flavorful beets and is my favorite way to prepare them. Just one tip: pick up a box of disposable kitchen gloves before you start. They'll save your hands from staining while you peel.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why You'll Love Roasted Beets in Foil

    • Fresher flavor: Oven-roasted beets taste better than the pre-steamed packages.
    • No-mess method: Wrapping them in foil keeps the juices contained and makes cleanup easy.
    • Simple and hands-off: Just wrap, roast, and peel - no fancy tools required.

    Serve roasted beets alongside roast chicken breasts with cashew gravy as a complimentary side dish.

    Ingredients You'll Need

    • Beets: Fresh, raw beets of any color. Beets with the tops still on are the best beets as they are are fresher and have more moisture and flavor than beets with tops removed. I usually buy medium beets in size. Try to buy the approximately the same size so they roast at the same time.
    • Oil: I use extra virgin olive oil, avocado oil, or a healthy neutral oil (but not vegetable oil).

    Please see the recipe card for measurement, salt and pepper.

    Chef's tip: Roasting beets in foil (double layer) prevents beet juices from leaking onto the baking sheet, making cleanup much easier. Timing for roasting beets depends on their size. Larger beets take longer; smaller beets roast faster.

    Add roasted beets in foil to this kale and roast vegetable salad, or make this beet salad with feta cheese.

    How to Roast Beets in Foil

    Pre-heat the oven to 400°F. To prepare to roast beets, trim beet tops leaving about 1 inch of stem then scrub clean under cold water with a vegetable brush. Discard beet greens unless you enjoy them sautéed.

    Red and gold beet in aluminum foil packets drizzled with oil and salt.
    Step 1: Place a double thickness of heavy duty foil on the counter, place whole beets in a single layer, drizzle with oil, sprinkle with salt. 
    Aluminum foil packets on a rimmed baking sheet on the counter.
    Step 2: Wrap beets into a tightly sealed packet and place on a baking sheet. Roast beets in the foil packet for 40-60 minutes, depending on size.
    Roasted beets in foil with a thin metal skewer piercing one to show they are done.
    Step 3: Roasted beets are done when easily pierced through with a thin metal skewer or thin paring knife.
    A gloved hand holding a peeled red beet with a paring knife and a y-vegetable peeler.
    Step 4: Skin beets using a vegetable peeler, a paring knife, or by rubbing of with paper towels while still warm.
    Gloved hand showing a skinned beet rubbed off with paper towels.
    Using paper towels to rub beet skins off.
    An oval bowl with roasted red and gold beets ready to enjoy.
    Roasted beets, skinned and ready to enjoy.

    How to Peel Beets

    Here are the three methods I've used to peel beets. After roasting beets in foil while they are still warm, trim the top of the beet flat, then peel beets by:

    • Rubbing with paper towels until they are smooth.
    • Using a vegetable peeler. I think inexpensive y-peelers do the best job.
    • Scraping the skin off with a sharp paring knife. 

    Beets have high staining power, so handle them with care. Wear a full cover apron (preferably not white!) and have paper towels handy. 

    Disposable food handler gloves are your best friend when working with beets as they prevent your hands from staining. Buy a box on Amazon or at a kitchen supply store. I use gloves often when working with raw ground meat and high stain foods. They are handy for many things.

    Chef's tip on cutting boards: While many people like plastic cutting boards, when working with high stain foods like beets they can stain. I have one I use for photography, but I work on these black Richlite cutting boards. They don't stain, they are available in good sizes as well as custom sizes, are easy to handle, they are durable and knife-friendly.

    A tan plate of roasted gold and deep purple-red beets on lettuce leaves.

    Serving Ideas for Roasted Beets

    • Add to salads: Chopped roasted beets pair beautifully with goat cheese or feta, toasted nuts, and fresh herbs for a colorful, nutrient-rich salad.
    • Serve simply: Enjoy roasted beets as a warm or chilled side dish with a drizzle of extra virgin olive oil, a splash of balsamic vinegar, and chopped herbs such as chives, parsley, or dill.
    • Toss with vinaigrette: Try a French vinaigrette made with olive oil, Dijon mustard, and vinegar. The mustard enhances the earthy sweetness of the beets.
    • Blend into smoothies: For something unexpected, swap banana for beet in this Raspberry Smoothie and add a touch of natural sweetener.
    • Add to grain bowls: Combine roasted beets with quinoa, rice, or farro, along with greens, nuts, and a tangy dressing for a hearty plant-based meal.
    • Make beet hummus: Blend roasted beets into classic hummus for a stunning pink color and subtly sweet flavor.

    Here is another salad idea for using roast beets, my kale salad with roast vegetables.

    Storage Tips

    Cut the cooled beets into quarters (or smaller) and refrigerate them for 4-5 days in an airtight container. It's best to use glass and not plastic as beets have high staining power and the plastic may not come clean.

    For longer storage, slice or dice and freeze on a parchment-lined tray before transferring to a freezer-safe container or bag. Frozen roasted beets will keep well for up to 3 months - perfect for adding to salads, soups, or grain bowls later.

    Recipe FAQs

    Do I need to peel beets before roasting?

    No, you don't need to peel beets before roasting. Simply trim the stems and leaves to about one inch, wash thoroughly, and scrub them clean. Roasting beets in foil loosens the skins naturally, so after roasting, they slip right off with just a paper towel or your gloved hands.

    Are roasted beets healthy?

    Yes! Beets are packed with nutrients - they're a great source of folate, magnesium, potassium, vitamin C, and dietary fiber. You'll often find deep red beets year-round, with golden and candy-striped Chioggia varieties appearing seasonally. Whichever color you choose, roasted beets are a naturally sweet, antioxidant-rich vegetable that supports detoxification and overall health.

    How long does it take to roast beets?

    Cooking time depends on the size of the beets and your oven temperature. Roast whole beets at 400°F, wrapped in a double layer of foil with a drizzle of olive oil and a sprinkle of salt and pepper. Check for doneness around 45 minutes by piercing one with a thin skewer or cake tester-it should slide through easily when fully cooked. Larger beets may need up to 60 minutes, while baby or small beets will cook faster.

    More How-to Recipes

    Love learning kitchen basics and pro techniques? Here are a few step-by-step guides to help you cook with more confidence and ease. Each one includes chef tips and simple methods you can master in your own kitchen.

    • Beautoful orange salmon fillets after skinning, on a wax paper covered tray.
      How to Skin Salmon (Step-by-Step Guide)
    • A glass bowl of perfectly diced tomatoes on a cutting board.
      Easy Steps for How to Dice a Tomato
    • Homemade Mayonnaise| A FoodCentricLife.com
      Homemade Mayonnaise
    • A jar of golden clarified butter on a marble counter with a strainer beside.
      How to Make Clarified Butter

    ⭐️Did You Make This Recipe?

    If you make roasted beets in foil, please add your comment. I appreciate your feedback and enjoy hearing from you. If you loved it, please give it a 5-star rating! They really help other readers.

    📖 Recipe

    Colorful red and golden roasted beets in aluminum foil.

    Roasted Beets in Foil

    Sally Cameron
    Beets become sweet when roasted and are wonderful as a side dish or added to salads.  If you enjoy dairy, roast beets are delicious with goat cheese, orange segments, a sprinkle of pine nuts and a little chopped fresh mint. Serve on their own or atop salad greens or with micro greens.
    5 from 1 vote
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 5 minutes mins
    Cook Time 45 minutes mins
    Total Time 50 minutes mins
    Course Side Dish
    Cuisine American
    Servings 4 to 6 servings
    Calories 91 kcal

    Equipment

    • Foil for roasting
    • Rimmed baking sheet
    • Disposable kitchen gloves
    • Thin metal skewer or cake tester

    Ingredients
      

    • 1 ½ - 2 pounds raw beets with tops about 5 medium beets
    • 2 teaspoons olive oil
    • salt to taste

    Would you like to save this recipe?

    Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

    Instructions
     

    • Pre-heat oven to 400 degrees. Trim off the beet leaves and stems to within 1-inch of the beet. Scrub beets under cold water and dry them with paper towels.
    • Place a double thickness of heavy aluminum foil on the counter, large enough to hold the beets. Place beets in the center, drizzle with oil and a sprinkle of salt and wrap tightly into a foil packet.
      Place packet in the oven and roast until beets are cooked through and tender. Use a thin metal skewer (like a turkey lacer or pins) or a metal cake tester. They should easily pierce through the beets when ready.Test beets at 45 minutes. Continue about 15 minutes longer if needed. Timing will depend on the size of the beets.
    • Remove beet packet from the oven and cool a few minutes. Slice off the top where the stem was. When beets are cool enough to handle, unwrap and peel one of three ways: rub off with paper towels, use a y-vegetable peeler, or a sharp paring knife. Be sure to wear disposable gloves.
      Beets are ready to eat or add to a salad or other recipe. Beets will last 4-5 days, covered, in the refrigerator.

    Notes

    Serving ideas: Add beets to a tossed green salad with goat cheese (skip for vegans). Add orange segments, pine nuts, and chopped mint leaves for more color and flavor. Dress with a light vinaigrette made with olive oil and white Balsamic vinegar or Champagne vinegar.
    To serve beets as a side dish, sprinkle with chopped chives and drizzle with olive oil, salt and pepper.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 91kcalCarbohydrates: 16gProtein: 3gFat: 2gSaturated Fat: 0.3gPolyunsaturated Fat: 0.3gMonounsaturated Fat: 2gSodium: 133mgPotassium: 553mgFiber: 5gSugar: 11gVitamin A: 56IUVitamin C: 8mgCalcium: 27mgIron: 1mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    Gluten-Free Carrot Cake Muffins (dairy-free)

    03/25/2018 by Sally Cameron 4 Comments

    carrot cake muffins

    These gluten free carrot cake muffins deliver light and fluffy muffins that are gluten-free, dairy-free, and grain-free, yet so delicious that no one would guess. Sweetened with maple syrup, not refined sugar, these carrot cake muffins are a hit with everyone. Perfect for breakfast or an afternoon snack, they are super easy to make and last the better part of a week wrapped on the kitchen counter, plus they freeze. You've got to make a batch.

    carrot cake muffin on a silver plate.

    My Aunt Rose made a mean carrot cake, and it's still one of my all-time favorites. But as my diet evolved-shifting toward healthier and gluten-free choices-I found myself baking less. Then I discovered how beautifully almond flour and coconut flour work together. After a few rounds of testing, I created these gluten-free carrot cake muffins that check all the boxes: light, flavorful, naturally sweetened, and incredibly easy to make.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why You'll Love This Recipe

    • A healthier muffin recipe, versus using white flour and white sugar.
    • You can even frost them with cream cheese frosting like cupcakes.
    • Gluten-free, dairy-free, grain-free, but no one would ever guess. They're fantastic.
    • Paleo carrot cake muffins (if you follow paleo).

    For more terrific gluten-free muffins, try this Gluten-free zucchini muffins recipe. 

    Recipe Ingredients

    • Almond flour blend: Use Bob's Red Mill  paleo blend flour, a blend of almond flour and coconut flour.
    • Baking powder: Use aluminum-free baking powder, be sure to check the expiration date.
    • Baking soda: Another leavening agent in baking, check the expiration date.
    • Spices: I blend ground cinnamon, ground ginger, and ground nutmeg.
    • Eggs: For binding and moisture. Large, clean, un-cracked eggs.
    • Oil: I use melted coconut oil . If coconut is a problem, use avocado oil.
    • Maple syrup: Use the real deal, not the fake colored stuff made of corn syrup.
    • Shredded coconut: Finely shredded unsweetened coconut (omit for coconut allergy).
    • Vanilla: Use real vanilla extract or vanilla bean paste.
    • Carrots: Fresh carrots. Use the orange ones. 

    Please see the recipe card for all measurements.

    Another terrific muffin recipe is this one for strawberry muffins with fresh strawberries (gluten-free too).

    Substitutions and Variations

    • Vegetable oil is another option, but not standard grocery store "vegetable" oil. It is so unhealthy and highly processed. Use this clean healthy neutral oil instead. It's what I use for a neutral oil.
    • A nice substitution for all of the individual spices is Chinese Five Spice blend. You still get cinnamon, but the flavor is just a little different, in a nice way.
    • Add ½ cup of chopped walnuts or golden raisins.
    • Use pumpkin pie spice blend. 

    Chef's tip on oil: I don't recommend using standard grocery store vegetable oils (ever), which are typically made from GMO soy, corn, and canola, then processed with high heat and chemicals, bleached and deodorized. Not healthy! Better options with healthy fats are avocado oil, melted coconut oil, or Zero Acre Farms oil-cleaner choices that support both flavor and wellness (not an affiliate link).

    How to Make Carrot Cake Muffins

    Muffin batter in a silver muffin pan for baking.
    1. Pre-heat the oven to 350°F and spray a 12-cup muffin tin (skip the paper liners).
    2. Peel carrots then grate on the large holes on a box grater or food processor with grating disc.
    3. Blend all dry ingredients in a large bowl with a whisk.
    4. Blend wet ingredients, the eggs, oil, syrup, water and vanilla. Whisk until smooth.
    5. Add the dry ingredients to the wet mixture and stir to create muffin batter.
    6. Fold in carrots and coconut. Divide batter evenly between the muffin cups. Sprinkle tops with extra coconut if desired.
    7. Bake muffins about 25 minutes until golden on top and a toothpick comes out clean with moist crumbs.
    8. Cool 10 minutes then remove from the pan and cool completely on wire rack.
    Baked muffins.

    Serving and Storing

    Gluten-free carrot cake muffins are perfect for:

    • Breakfast or brunch with coffee or a smoothie.
    • An afternoon snack with tea or almond milk.
    • Packed into lunchboxes for a naturally sweet treat.
    • Topped with dairy-free cream cheese or a dollop of Greek yogurt for a carrot-cake feel.
    • Warmed and split open with butter.

    Carrot cake muffins last about 4-5 days at room temperature if well wrapped, or you can freeze them for up to 2 months. Be sure to label and date.

    Recipe FAQs

    Do I need to peel the carrots first?

    Yes, it's best to peel carrots. The skin can be a bit tough or bitter and doesn't soften as nicely in baking.

    Can I use pre-shredded carrots?

    You can, but freshly grated carrots have more moisture and blend better into the batter. Pre-shredded carrots are sometimes dry and coarse for muffins.

    How sweet are these muffins?

    They're lightly sweetened with maple syrup, just enough to bring out the natural sweetness of the carrots and spices without being sugary.

    Can I make these without eggs?

    Yes! You can try using flax eggs, a chia egg, or an egg replacer. The texture may be a little softer, but they still bake up nicely.

    Carrot cake muffins cooling on a rack with coffee.

    More Gluten-Free Baking Recipes

    Love to bake? Try some of these terrific treats, all gluten-free, of course.

    • A single layer sweet cherry cake with golden top on white plate.
      Cherry Clafoutis (Easy Fresh Cherry Dessert)
    • A golden slice of lemon olive oil cake, made wit whole almonds, served with berries and glaze.
      Super Moist Lemon Olive Oil Cake Recipe
    • Pumpkin snack cake with chocolate chips.
      Pumpkin Chocolate Chip Cake (Snack Cake)
    • A beautiful lemon tart with piles of piped meringue on top of a cake plate.
      Lemon Meringue Tart Recipe

    Did You Make This Recipe?

    If you make these carrot cake muffins, please add your comment. I appreciate your feedback and enjoy hearing from you. If you loved it, please give it a 5-star rating! They really help other readers.

    📖 Recipe

    carrot cake muffins

    Carrot Cake Muffins (gluten free)

    Sally Cameron
    These light textured, delicious muffins are grain-free, gluten-free, dairy-free, and refined sugar-free, sweetened with maple syrup. They make a great breakfast addition or snack. 
    5 from 3 votes
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 15 minutes mins
    Cook Time 30 minutes mins
    Total Time 45 minutes mins
    Course Breakfast
    Cuisine American
    Servings 12
    Calories 190 kcal

    Ingredients
      

    Dry Ingredients

    • 2 ⅔ cups Bobs Red Mill Paleo Flour Blend 12 ounces
    • 2 ¾ teaspoons aluminum-free baking powder
    • 1 ¾ teaspoons cinnamon or Chinese Five Spice blend
    • 1 ½ teaspoons baking soda
    • ¾ teaspoons ground ginger
    • ¼ teaspoon grated nutmeg
    • ¼ teaspoon sea salt

    Wet Ingredients

    • 4 large eggs
    • ½ cup + 1 tablespoon melted coconut oil avocado oil or neutral oil, note below
    • ½ cup + 1 tablespoon maple syrup
    • ½ cup water
    • 1 ½ teaspoons vanilla extract or vanilla bean paste
    • 1 ¾ cups lightly packed grated carrots 8 ounces
    • ½ cup finely shredded unsweetened coconut + extra for optional topping

    Optional add-ins

    • ½ cup chopped walnuts
    • ½ cup raisins

    Would you like to save this recipe?

    Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

    Instructions
     

    • Pre-heat the oven to 350°F. With a little extra coconut oil or non-stick spray, grease the wells of a 12-cup light colored metal muffin pan. Wash, peel, and grate carrots on the large hole size of a box grater or in a food processor.
    • Add the dry ingredients to a medium bowl, flour, baking powder, cinnamon, baking soda, ginger, nutmeg and salt and whisk well to combine.
      To another bowl add the wet ingredients, the eggs, oil, syrup, water and vanilla. Whisk until smooth and combined.
    • Add the dry ingredients to the wet ingredients and mix well. Fold in the carrots and coconut. Divide batter evenly between the 12 muffin cups. Sprinkle tops with extra coconut if desired.
      Bake muffins approximately 25 minutes, until muffins are golden on top and a toothpick comes out clean with moist crumbs when inserted into the center of the muffin. Timing may vary with your ovens. 
    • When muffins are done, remove pan from the oven and allow muffins to cool 10 minutes in the pan, then gently remove them to a wire rack to cool completely. Muffins will last about 4 days in an airtight container on the countertop.

    Notes

    For extra pretty muffins, garnish the tops with an extra sprinkle of coconut before baking. If you prefer to serve them as cupcakes and plan to frost, skip anything on top before baking. 
    A note on oils:
    Skip vegetable oil in anything! Instead, I suggest healthier options like avocado oil, melted coconut oil, or Zero Acre Farms oil—cleaner choices that support both flavor and wellness. Unfortunately you have to order it online but it's worth it. (not an affiliate link).

    Nutrition

    Calories: 190kcalCarbohydrates: 12gProtein: 3gFat: 14gSaturated Fat: 11gPolyunsaturated Fat: 1gMonounsaturated Fat: 1gTrans Fat: 0.01gCholesterol: 62mgSodium: 297mgPotassium: 146mgFiber: 2gSugar: 8gVitamin A: 3209IUVitamin C: 1mgCalcium: 102mgIron: 1mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    Homemade BBQ Spice Rub

    05/13/2024 by Sally Cameron Leave a Comment

    Savory dry rub for grilling with spices and a little brown sugar.

    This easy homemade BBQ spice rub is my go-to all-purpose seasoning for grilling, smoking, roasting, or even the air fryer. It adds bold, smoky-sweet flavor to chicken, pork, ribs, fish, and veggies-whatever you're cooking. Made from pantry spices, it's easy to mix, easy to love, and far better than store-bought. Plus, you control the ingredients-no preservatives or mystery additives.

    A glass jar of bright brick red colored dry rub spice blend.

    I developed this BBQ spice rub (also called a dry rub) over a decade ago and finally published it for friends who love to grill, and now it's yours too. It truly is all-purpose: sprinkle or rub it generously onto whatever's headed for the grill, smoker, oven, or air fryer. If you're someone who likes to make your own "stuff" and control what goes into your food (like I do), this homemade BBQ spice rub is easy to whip up easily and customizable.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why You'll Love This BBQ Spice Rub

    • You control the flavor - Adjust the salt, heat, and sweetness to suit your needs.
    • Versatile and all-purpose - Great on chicken, pork, seafood, veggies. Use it for grilling, roasting, smoking, or air frying.
    • Clean ingredients - No fillers, preservatives, MSG, or artificial flavors-just pure spices.

    For another homemade spice blend, try my homemade taco seasoning to make ground beef taco filling or for turkey and chicken, try this flavorful turkey rub.

    Ingredients You'll Need

    Spices for a BBQ dry rub on white plates.

    Here is what you need to make this BBQ spice rub. Find spices at most grocery stores and from online spice stores.

    • Smoked paprika: For an earthy, savory, smoky flavor.
    • Granulated garlic: Granulated is coarser in texture than garlic powder, but both are made from pure, dehydrated garlic. For great flavor. Look at the bottle to see what the texture is because the names vary.
    • Brown sugar: For a little caramelization and sweetness. Use either light brown sugar, dark brown sugar, or a coarse brown sugar like turbinado.
    • Ground cumin: For it's earthy, slightly spiced flavor common in spice blends.
    • Ground coriander: A great partner for cumin, with a lightly lemony flavor.
    • Onion powder: Another savory flavor builder.
    • Ancho chili powder: This is pure chili powder, not the blend called chili powder.
    • Ground black pepper: For some heat. Smoked black pepper is good too.
    • Chipotle pepper: For more heat! Made from smoked jalapeno peppers, it adds to the smoky flavor along with the smoked paprika.

    But what about the salt? See my notes below, and please see the recipe card for measurements.

    Instead of plain paprika on top of creamy deviled eggs, use this BBQ spice rub. It's a flavorful garnish.

    Chef's Tip: What's a BBQ Rub?
    A BBQ rub is a dry blend of spices, herbs, and sugar that adds flavor and helps create that crave-worthy crust (or bark) on grilled or smoked meats. A wet rub is simply a dry rub with added moisture-think olive oil, vinegar, beer, bourbon, mustard, mayo, or citrus juice.

    Spice dry rub on a spoon over a jar of the rub.

    Substitutions and Variations

    • If you prefer salt in your BBQ spice rub, add 1-2 tablespoons of kosher salt; 1 for a balanced flavor and 2 for a more salt-forward rub.
    • Substitute regular sweet paprika for smoked paprika.
    • Use a smoked salt, either in the rub recipe or when you salt your meat.
    • To substitute garlic powder (which is finer) for granulated garlic, use ¾ as much.
    • Substitute cayenne pepper for chipotle pepper, and for more heat, add more to your liking but be careful.
    • Add dried herbs such as dried thyme or dried oregano, try 2-3 teaspoons and crush it in your hands before adding.
    • No coriander? Skip it and use a little more cumin.
    • Switch coconut sugar or golden monk fruit blend for the brown sugar.
    • Want it sweeter? Add a little more brown sugar.

    Use this dry rub in place of plain paprika in this easy, creamy smoked salmon dip.

    What About Salt?

    The first ingredient in most dry rubs is salt, and they can be up to 50% salt! And you don't know what kind of salt, the quality, or where it came from.

    While salt is critical for flavor in cooking, I leave the salt out of my BBQ spice rub. Why? For more control. I prefer to salt my meat separately or whatever it is I am preparing. I can also use different kinds of salt. For smoking and my pellet grill, I often use a smoked salt blend.

    Another reason I skip the salt in the dry rub is that many folks are salt-sensitive or on a medically restrictive diet, so this gives them a great, versatile dry rub option. 

    What kind of salt should I add if I want to? Most people use kosher salt for it's coarse and crunchy texture in dry rubs or BBQ spice rubs. You can also use fine pink sea salt BUT please read on...

    My Preferred Salts and Why

    You will find three primary salts in my kitchen: coarse kosher salt, fine pink sea salt, and a coarse or kosher pink sea salt.

    The first is a Mediterranean coarse kosher sea salt for it's texture and clean flavor. It's what I often use for brining and salting water for blanching, boiling, and sometimes salting meat. Other kosher salts I like and use, this kosher salt, widely used by chefs and professional kitchens, and this mined pink kosher salt, nice for a crunchy finish.

    The other salt I use is this fine, clean, pink mined ancient sea salt. These are my workhorse salts.

    My favorite recipes to use BBQ spice rub on? Smoked 3-2-1 baby back ribs and my rotisserie chicken.

    How to Make BBQ Spice Rub

    A glass jar of spices ready to be shaken to make a dry rub.

    Add all of the spices to a jar and shake well, label and store in a cool, dry, dark place for up to 6 months.

    Chef's tip: Where not to store spices? In full light, on top of your stove, beside the stove, or above the range. Heat and light makes the flavors and strength of the spices degrade more quickly.

    Golden grilled chicken breasts done with dry rub just finishing on the grill.

    Ways to Use This Spice Rub

    A rack of baby back ribs coated in dry rub, ready for the grill.

    Use BBQ spice rub recipe on raw proteins, such as chicken, turkey, ribs, pork tenderloin and chops, seafood, burgers and beef. Use them as a finishing seasoning for vegetables, potatoes, and flavoring vinaigrettes, dressings, and marinades. They are multi-purpose and versatile. Try out these recipes!

    • Baby back ribs. Rub the ribs both top and under sides with a generous amount of dry rub. I start the night before to allow the flavors to develop (but you don't have to).
    • Grilled shrimp tacos.
    • Baked bone-in chicken breasts (or pellet grill).
    • Air fryer roasted red potatoes.
    • It's wonderful on buttered popcorn!
    • Use it just about any where you would use paprika.
    • Add it to a marinade with olive oil and citrus juices.
    • Use BBQ spice rub for rotisserie chicken.
    • A jar makes a great gift for your grilling and pellet grill friends!

    The photo below is a dry rub coated whole chicken I put on the rotisserie. Comes out fantastic! The trick to getting the rub to stick is smearing the bird with just a little mayonnaise to start, then coating well with the dry rub.

    Rotisserie chicken coated in dry rub on the grill spit.

    Recipe FAQs

    What is a Dry Rub?

    A dry rub is a blend of dry spices, herbs, sugar, and usually salt used to flavor foods. There is no liquids and no oil like marinades and sauces. You can leave out the salt to control the amount of salt used in a recipe and instead, salt the meat or seafood separately. Dry rubs are super versatile, fun to use, easy to create at home, and give recipes lots of flavor.

    Are there any health concerns with using dry rubs?

    One of the main concern with purchased dry rubs is the level of salt. Many are mostly salt with little else. You've got to read labels. The first few ingredients listed are what the rub is mainly made of, and it often starts with salt. Another concern is preservatives, gluten or other allergens, and ingredients to make rubs flow and not clump. Making dry rubs at home eliminates these challenges.

    Can you use a dry rub on vegetables?

    You can use dry rubs on vegetables too. Use them to season the vegetables after cooking as you would salt or toss, spray, or lightly coat the vegetables with a little oil and toss with the dry rub before cooking. Be careful with high heat as you don't want to burn the spices.

    What are some common mistakes to avoid when using dry rubs?

    Watch the salt levels in rubs so your food is not overly salty. Making dry rubs at home allows you to control or eliminate the amount salt. Also, spices can burn with too high heat. Watch your cooking and grilling temperatures and timing so dry rubbed food does not burn, especially with a direct contact method of cooking.

    Recipes To Try With Dry Rub

    Dry rubs are fun to play with to bring a new dimension of flavors to recipes. Wherever you use a spice blend, experiment with a dry rub.

    • Oven baby back ribs glazed with rich brown hoisin sauce.
      Baby Back Ribs Recipe (Oven Method)
    • spicy grilled shrimp tacos
      Baja Shrimp Tacos (Grill or Stovetop)
    • White bowl of golden browned air fryer red potatoes with rosemary.
      Air Fryer Red Potatoes (or oven roasted)
    • Smoked baby back ribs being sliced on a sheet tray with BBQ sauce.
      3-2-1 Ribs (Smoked Baby Back Ribs Recipe)

    ⭐️Did You Make This Recipe?

    If you make this dry rub, please add your comment. I appreciate your feedback and enjoy hearing from you. If you loved it, please give it a 5-star rating! They really help other readers.

    📖 Recipe

    Savory dry rub for grilling with spices and a little brown sugar.

    BBQ Spice Rub

    Sally Cameron
    Don't buy dry rubs, make your own! I use this on chicken, shrimp, ribs, pork tenderloin, just about anything with delicious results. See notes below for options and substitutions. Doubles easily for a big batch.
    5 from 2 votes
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 5 minutes mins
    Cook Time 0 minutes mins
    0 minutes mins
    Total Time 5 minutes mins
    Course Seasoning
    Cuisine American
    Servings 24 Yield 1 cup/5.7 oz
    Calories 15 kcal

    Ingredients
      

    • 4 ½ tablespoons smoked paprika
    • 3 tablespoons granulated garlic or 1 ½ T. of garlic powder
    • 2 tablespoons brown sugar or coconut sugar or golden monk fruit blend
    • 1 ½ tablespoons ground cumin
    • 1 ½ tablespoons ground coriander
    • 1 tablespoon ancho chili powder
    • 1 tablespoon ground black pepper or smoked black pepper
    • 1 teaspoon onion powder
    • ¼-1/2 teaspoon chipotle powder or cayenne pepper

    Optional: Salt

    • 1 tablespoon kosher salt

    Would you like to save this recipe?

    Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

    Instructions
     

    • Measure all ingredients into a jar with a tight lid and shake hard until well combined. Label and date when you made it and store in a cool dark pantry or cabinet. Will last 4-6 months.

    Notes

    • Like it spicier? Add more chipotle powder, cayenne pepper, or some sharp (hot) paprika.
    • If you use garlic powder instead of granulated garlic, start with half the amount as it is finer. 

    Nutrition

    Serving: 2teaspoonsCalories: 15kcalCarbohydrates: 3gProtein: 1gFat: 0.4gSaturated Fat: 0.1gPolyunsaturated Fat: 0.2gMonounsaturated Fat: 0.1gSodium: 8mgPotassium: 65mgFiber: 1gSugar: 1gVitamin A: 758IUVitamin C: 0.1mgCalcium: 13mgIron: 1mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    Easy Gluten-Free Irish Soda Bread

    02/13/2012 by Sally Cameron 18 Comments

    Golden baked loaf of Irish soda bread, sliced on a white plate.

    Bake up a golden, hearty loaf of this easy gluten-free Irish soda bread-perfect for St. Patrick's Day or any day. If baking bread sounds intimidating, don't worry! This classic yeast-free quick bread requires no kneading or rising time, making it simple enough for anyone to make. Just mix, shape, bake, and enjoy my gluten-free, modern take on traditional soda bread.

    A sliced loaf of Irish soda bread with currants on a cooling rack.

    This gluten free Irish soda bread is a simple, modern take on the classic. It keeps traditional buttermilk for flavor and rise but adds a little of butter and sugar for richness. Currants (or raisins) bring subtle sweetness, making it just as delicious alongside a meal or toasted with butter. With no yeast or complicated steps, it's an easy, foolproof recipe for any level of baker. I'll show you with step-by-step photos.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Gluten-Free Irish Soda Bread Highlights

    • An easy gluten-free soda bread recipe.
    • One bowl, little mess, simple ingredients.
    • A "quick" bread; no yeast to deal with and no kneading of the dough.
    • There's nothing like homemade bread!

    For more ideas St. Patrick's Day recipe ideas, try this savory braised cabbage with leeks and bacon. It's so good!

    Ingredients You'll Need

    The perfect gluten-free alternative to traditional Irish soda bread.

    Irish soda bread ingredients with labels on a counter.
    • Gluten-free flour blend: I use King Arthur Measure for Measure GF blend. You need a little extra for your hands and cutting board. They are based on rice flour vs. cornstarch.
    • Sugar: Use a natural granulated sugar for the soda bread. It's just a small amount and makes a lightly sweet quick bread.
    • Baking powder: Use aluminum-free baking powder and check expiration the date on your can or bag before baking. Baking powder is one leavening agent instead of yeast.
    • Baking soda: Check expiration the date on your can or bag before baking as it's another natural leavening agent for baked goods without yeast.
    • Butter: Use sweet or unsalted butter. Irish butter is good but use what you have.
    • Buttermilk: Buttermilk gives baked goods a light, moist texture. It's natural the acidity reacts with the baking soda and powder to help the bread rise. See substitutions for buttermilk below.
    • Dried fruit: Some recipe use raisins, I prefer tiny currants which are another kind of dried grape. What you'll find at the grocery store are called currants or Zantes currants.

    Please see the recipe card for measurements.

    Chef's tip: If your gluten-free flour blend does not contain xanthan gum, add ½ of a teaspoon to the recipe. It provides elasticity and stickiness to gluten-free doughs and batters (because there is no gluten).

    Substitutions and Variations

    Substitutes for Buttermilk

    If you don't have buttermilk, use dairy milk plus lemon juice to curdle the milk and create the needed acidity. Another option, milk and apple cider vinegar or white vinegar. Other options include sour cream, yogurt, kefir, or rehydrated buttermilk powder (which I now keep on hand in my pantry).

    I've not tested all of these options but the milk and lemon juice or vinegar trick does work. For more information, read here for more about substitutions for buttermilk.

    For dairy-free, use homemade almond milk or homemade cashew milk, still adding the lemon juice and using a plant butter (a cube not a tub). The taste may be a little different as buttermilk as a natural tang.

    Other Substitutes

    • If you are egg sensitive, Irish soda bread can be made with no egg or an egg replacement. Either skip the egg (I used to make it that way) or find ideas for replacing the egg here.
    • To reduce sugar, use a monk fruit blend like this one. I always have a bag in the pantry and it works great to replace sugar, either all of it or even half and half.
    • If you can't find dried currants (tiny raisins), substitute regular raisins, golden raisins, dried cranberries, finely chopped pitted dates, chopped dried cherries or dried blueberries. 

    How to Make Gluten-Free Irish Soda bread

    This dough comes together quickly. If you've never baked bread like this, it's really easy and comes out wonderful. Some Irish soda bread recipes start with 3-4 cups of flour for big loaves. My recipe uses just 2 cups of flour for a smaller loaf that still serves 8-10.

    Step 1: Mix the dry ingredients for soda bread in a bowl.

    Step 1: Mix the dry ingredients together in a medium bowl and stir well to combine.

    Step 2: Mix in the cold butter with a fork or pasty cutter.

    Step 2: Mix in the cold butter with a fork or pastry cutter.

    Step 3: Mix the wet and dry ingredients together.

    Step 3: Step 3: Make a well in the center of the dry ingredients and add the wet ingredients (buttermilk and egg). 

    Step 4: Mixing the dough for Irish soda bread.

    Step 4: Using a fork, gently mix it all together until a sticky dough forms.

    Step 5: Mix in the currants.

    Step 5: Mix in the currants.

    Step 6: Mixing in the currants.s.

    Step 6: Gently mix until a sticky dough forms.

    A round loaf of bread ready for baking..

    Step 7: Shape the dough into a free form round loaf on a floured cutting board. Parchment paper makes it easier to move to the pan.

    Step 8: Lastly, bake the bread in a round cake pan or on a baking sheet, using baking parchment under the dough. Bake at 350°F for 35-40 minutes until the loaf is golden and a cake tester inserted in the center comes out clean and warm. Cool on a wire rack for a few minutes before slicing.

    Chef's Tip: Cutting a shallow cross or X across the top of the bread (called scoring) with a sharp knife before baking the soda bread does two things: it assists baking as the heat reaches the interior of the loaf, and the cross blesses the bread (per Irish tradition). 

    Golden baked loaf of bread with currants, sliced.

    Should I Weigh or Measure Flour?

    My original recipe used whole wheat flour. Going gluten-free, I adapted my recipe and have tested with different GF blends. You can weigh your flour or use standard dry measuring utensils. What's the difference? Different brands of GF flour measure differently. For accuracy, weigh. A digital kitchen scale is an inexpensive buy.

    What if you don't weigh with a scale? The bread will still taste just as delicious, but might be a little more dense depending on what gluten-free all purpose flour you use. Be sure you stir your flour to aerate it before scooping and measuring.

    Serving Suggestions

    What do you eat Irish soda bread with? Keep it simple with soft butter and jam. Enjoy it for breakfast with eggs and fruit. Try it at lunch with soup or a salad, or as an afternoon snack with a cup of tea.

    It makes a nice gift too. I used to bake it for my clients as a seasonal treat. Using a serrated knife for slicing makes it easier.

    Irish soda bread keeps for about 5 days on the counter, well wrapped in a zip bag or other airtight container.

    How to Store

    To store leftover Irish soda bread, store it at room temperature for up to two days wrapped in plastic wrap. For longer storage, wrap it tightly in plastic wrap and use a freezer bag, then reheat before serving.

    A platter of sliced golden Irish soda bread.

    Recipe FAQs

    Why is it called Irish soda bread?

    It's called a soda bread because baking soda is used as the leavening agent instead of yeast and kneading. It's called bread soda in Ireland. Irish soda bread is generally a lightly sweet bread made with butter, egg, and currants or caraway seeds. 

    Is Irish Soda Bread Irish?

    Some reports say there's nothing Irish about this bread, that it's an American invention or at least a corruption of the Irish traditional bread. In Ireland it's considered a basic bread. The link above has a fun article. I think of it having Irish heritage.

    Can I substitute baking powder for baking soda in soda bread?

    No, they are not the same thing. Baking soda reacts with the acidity of buttermilk to leaven the bread. Baking powder is both an acid and a base and you may not get result or flavor.

    More Easy Gluten-Free Baking Recipes

    For another gluten-free baking recipe that uses buttermilk, try this gluten-free cornbread recipe.

    • A single layer sweet cherry cake with golden top on white plate.
      Cherry Clafoutis (Easy Fresh Cherry Dessert)
    • Gluten Free Strawberry Muffins
    • carrot cake muffins
      Gluten-Free Carrot Cake Muffins (dairy-free)
    • Gluten free banana bread
      The Best Gluten Free Banana Bread

    ⭐️Did You Make This Recipe?

    If you make gluten-free Irish soda bread, please comment. I appreciate your feedback and enjoy hearing from you. If you loved it, please give it a 5 star rating! They really help other readers.

    📖 Recipe

    Golden baked loaf of Irish soda bread, sliced on a white plate.

    Gluten-free Irish Soda Bread

    Sally Cameron
    A golden loaf studded with sweet dried currants, Irish soda bread goes together easily in just one bowl. Not just for St. Patrick's Day, this is a nice recipe to have in your file for any time of the year. It's nice served with apricot jam.  
    5 from 1 vote
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 10 minutes mins
    Cook Time 40 minutes mins
    Total Time 50 minutes mins
    Course Breakfast, Side Dish, Snack
    Cuisine American, Irish
    Servings 8
    Calories 215 kcal

    Equipment

    • digital kitchen scale OPTIONAL

    Ingredients
      

    • 2 cups gluten-free flour See notes at the end.
    • ¼ cup natural granulated sugar or monk fruit, or blend the two.
    • 1 ½ teaspoons aluminum free baking powder
    • 1 teaspoon sea salt
    • ¾ teaspoon baking soda
    • 3 tablespoons cold unsalted butter cut into small cubes
    • 1 cup buttermilk see substitutions below
    • ⅔ cup dried currants
    • 1 Large egg

    Would you like to save this recipe?

    Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

    Instructions
     

    Pre-heat oven

    • Pre-heat oven to 350*F degrees. Spray or lightly oil a 9" round cake pan. Line the bottom with a round of baking parchment. Alternatively use baking parchment on a rimmed baking sheet, cookie sheet, or cast iron skillet.

    Mix the Dough

    • Into a medium bowl, measure the flour, sugar, baking powder, salt and baking soda. For accuracy, use a digital scale to weigh the flour or use dry measuring cups (see notes below). Whisk to combine or stir well with a fork. Add the cold butter cubes and with a fork or a pastry blender, mix in until the flour becomes a coarse pebbly mixture.
    • Push dry ingredients around the edge of the bowl and make a well in the center of the bowl. Pour buttermilk into the center, then add egg and whisk with a fork. until combined. Gradually stir the buttermilk and flour mixture together with the fork. The dough will be sticky. Stir in the currants.

    Shape the Loaf

    • Sprinkle your cutting board with a little extra flour to shape the dough. Place the dough onto the floured space and sprinkle the top of the dough with a little extra flour as well, but don't use too much. Shape the dough into a flat, round loaf about ¾ of an inch thick and 7 inches across.

    Bake the Bread

    • Transfer the dough to the cake pan and pat lightly to reshape if needed. It will not come to the edges of the pan. Sprinkle the top with an extra teaspoon of sugar (optional). Bake 35-40 minutes or until golden brown. Remove bread from the oven, cool in the pan 10 minutes then move the loaf to cool on a wire rack. Slice or crosswise or cut into wedges and enjoy.

    Notes

    • For King Arthur's Measure for Measure GF flour, 2 cups = 9 ounces. 
    • For Bob's Red Mill 1:1 GF flour, 1 ¾ cups + 1 tablespoon = 9 ounces. 
    • To measure flour, spoon the flour into the measuring cup and smooth off top of the cup with the flat edge of a table knife or similar tool. Do not scoop the flour from the bag as you'll get more than you need. 
    • Dried fruit options: Currants are widely available but you can substitute dried cranberries, chopped pitted dates, chopped dried cherries or dried blueberries.
    • If you are egg sensitive, this can be made with no egg or an egg replacement. 
     

    Nutrition

    Calories: 215kcalCarbohydrates: 39gProtein: 4gFat: 6gSaturated Fat: 3gPolyunsaturated Fat: 0.4gMonounsaturated Fat: 2gTrans Fat: 0.2gCholesterol: 15mgSodium: 490mgPotassium: 135mgFiber: 4gSugar: 16gVitamin A: 189IUVitamin C: 1mgCalcium: 122mgIron: 1mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    Almond Flour Orange Cake (gluten-free)

    01/12/2010 by Sally Cameron 4 Comments

    orange almond cake

    With a delicate orange flavor and tender texture, this single layer almond flour orange cake is easy to make, and you don't have to boil oranges. Instead of frosting try a light dusting of powered sugar to finish. Orange flavored whipped cream or coconut cream would be good too. To save time make it a day ahead.

    orange almond cake with oranges

    Its is easy to forget that citrus is really a winter crop. With friends coming for dinner who love cake for dessert and my navel orange tree full of fruit, I turned to an old favorite recipe. I can't believe I've been making it for so many years, but now, gluten-free.

    orange almond cake side view
    Orange almond cake with orange slices, side view.

    Almond Flour Orange Cake Ingredients

    To reduce the sugar, use half granular stevia and half natural organic sugar, so 6 tablespoons of sugar and 3 tablespoons of granular stevia because stevia is much sweeter than sugar. Other options include monk fruit blend. For a good gluten-free flour blend try Bobs Red Mill. I grind my almonds in a food processor, although I've used what is called almond flour which are pure, finely ground almonds.

    For your shopping list:

    • Raw almonds 6 ounces, ground
    • Unsalted butter
    • Natural granulated sugar or monk fruit blend
    • Eggs
    • Gluten-free flour blend
    • Oranges for zest and juice
    • Ground coriander
    • Sea salt

    Almond Cake Tool Tips

    Hand mixer: As this recipe is for a single layer cake, the recipe makes a smaller amount of batter than a traditional double layer cake recipe so it is easily made with a hand mixer.

    Springform pan: You will need an 8″ springform pan. Springform pans make a nice addition to your kitchen tool collection. Get one that seals tight with the bottom. Once baked and cooled, release the spring and cakes are easy to remove. Find them at cooking stores and place like Bed Bath and Beyond. Here is one on Amazon.

    Parchment paper: Purchase backing parchment in any grocery store. Find it in the aisle next to the foil and plastic film. That is the heavier style. You can also buy pre-cut rounds and sheets of lighter weight parchment paper at cooking stores and online. Either work for this recipe.

    Fine sieve: For dusting the finished cake with powdered sugar, use a small, fine mesh sieve. Place the sugar in the sieve and shake it across the top of the cake. You can hit it against the side of your hand to get it to sprinkle.

    Orange almond torte | AFoodCentricLife.com

    📖 Recipe

    Orange almond torte | AFoodCentricLife.com

    Almond Flour Orange Cake (gluten-free)

    Sally Cameron
    Lightly sweet and fragrant with fresh orange, this orange almond torte is adapted from Bon Appétit Magazine. Use an all purpose gluten-free flour blend such as Bobs Red Mill.
    5 from 1 vote
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 15 minutes mins
    Cook Time 45 minutes mins
    Total Time 1 hour hr
    Course Breakfast, Dessert, Snack
    Cuisine American
    Servings 8
    Calories 283 kcal

    Equipment

    • 8" springform pan
    • Baking parchment
    • Food processor (to grind almonds) or use almond meal

    Ingredients
      

    • 1 cup raw almonds (6 ounces) or almond meal
    • ½ cup + 1 T unsalted butter at room temperature
    • ¾ cup monk fruit blend or natural granulated sugar
    • 1 large egg
    • 2 large egg yolks
    • ½ cup + 1 T gluten-free flour blend
    • 2 tablespoons orange juice fresh squeezed
    • 1 tablespoon orange zest
    • ½ teaspoon ground coriander
    • 1 pinch sea salt
    • 2 large egg whites at room temperature

    Optional Garnish

    • Powdered sugar for top of cake

    Would you like to save this recipe?

    Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

    Instructions
     

    • Preheat oven to 375°F. Butter an 8-inch springform pan. Cut a circle of parchment (or use a pre-cut round) to fit inside and line the bottom of pan. Butter parchment; dust with flour.
    • Beat ½ cup butter in a large bowl until fluffy. Gradually add sugar, beating until blended. Add egg, then yolks, 1 at a time, beating well after each addition. At low speed, beat in almonds, flour, orange juice, zest, coriander and salt, scraping down sides of bowl occasionally.
    • Using clean dry beaters, beat egg whites in medium bowl until stiff but not dry. Stiff whites will hold a tip straight up when you turn your beaters upside down. Gently fold whites into batter in 2 additions with a flexible spatula. Transfer batter to prepared pan.
    • Bake cake until top is golden and a toothpick or cake tester inserted into the center comes out clean, 35-40 minutes. To be safe, check early as ovens vary. Cool cake in pan on rack. When cool release the spring and remove the cake from the pan.

    Notes

    To reduce sugar, use 6 tablespoons of natural organic sugar and 3 tablespoons of granular stevia or substitute with a monk fruit/erythritol blend per the package directions.
    Adapted long ago from an old issue of Bon Appetit.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 283kcalCarbohydrates: 14gProtein: 8gFat: 23gSaturated Fat: 9gPolyunsaturated Fat: 3gMonounsaturated Fat: 10gTrans Fat: 0.5gCholesterol: 101mgSodium: 31mgPotassium: 173mgFiber: 4gSugar: 2gVitamin A: 476IUVitamin C: 3mgCalcium: 72mgIron: 1mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    Pasta Recipe With Scallops, Tomatoes, and Zucchini

    07/09/2012 by Sally Cameron 7 Comments

    seared scallops with pasta

    Pasta recipe with scallops: golden seared sea scallops tossed with pasta, sweet tomatoes, zucchini, and corn finished simply with good olive oil, lemon, and torn basil. This seared scallops pasta is ready in about 30 minutes and elegant enough for guests, easy enough for a weeknight.

    A colorful bowl of pasta with seared scallops and vegetables with basil leaves.

    For this pasta recipe with scallops I keep things light. Sauté shallot and garlic, add tomatoes, corn and zucchini, toss with your cooked pasta, then top with scallops seared separately so they stay juicy. No heavy sauce-just a drizzle of olive oil, a squeeze of lemon, and fresh basil to brighten the whole dish.

    Pasta Recipe With Scallops Recipe Snapshot

    • Pasta with scallops - restaurant-worthy flavor without the fuss; ready in about 30 minutes. Use sea scallops or bay scallops for a budget-friendly option.
    • Light, fresh finish - no heavy sauce here: a drizzle of olive oil, a squeeze of lemon, and torn basil let the scallops and veggies shine.
    • Flexible & seasonal - swap the zucchini for asparagus or peas, use gluten-free pasta, or make it all zoodles for a lighter version.
    • Weeknight friendly, party-ready - simple to scale and easy to prep ahead; sear the scallops last so they stay juicy and perfectly caramelized.

    Ingredients You'll Need

    • Pasta - Your choice: gluten-free or wheat. Angel hair, linguine, or spaghetti all work well.
    • Scallops - Large fresh sea scallops (buy "dry" scallops that haven't been treated with additives) for the best sear and flavor.
    • Corn - Fresh corn cut from the cob, or frozen thawed kernels for convenience.
    • Tomatoes - Grape or cherry tomatoes (small, sweet varieties work best); halve before using.
    • Zucchini - Small green zucchini for best color and texture; spiralize or slice as directed.
    • Shallot - Thinly sliced shallot adds a sweet, delicate onion flavor-slice into rings or mince, depending on your preference.
    • Garlic - Fresh garlic cloves, chopped or minced for best aroma and flavor.
    • Olive oil - A good extra-virgin olive oil for sautéing and finishing.
    • Deglazing liquid - Dry white wine is my go-to; a light broth or even a splash of lemon water works if you prefer no alcohol.
    • Herbs - Fresh basil torn, and parsley if you like extra brightness at the end.
    • Lemon (optional)- To squeeze over the dish for fresh flavor and brightness.

    Please see the recipe card for measurements, salt and pepper.

    Chef's Tip - Sea Scallops vs. Bay Scallops
    I usually buy medium-large dry sea scallops for the best sear, but if you want a budget-friendly option, sweet bay scallops are excellent. Bay scallops are smaller and cook very quickly-don't try to sear them hard (crusty). Instead, sauté briefly in a little olive oil with garlic, salt, and pepper, finishing with a squeeze of lemon or a splash of white wine for brightness. They truly are a delicious option.

    Substitutions and Variations

    • Vegetable swaps - Peas, baby spinach leaves, thin asparagus pieces, snap peas, extra zucchini.
    • Tomatoes - Swap chopped sun-dried tomatoes for the fresh, adding concentrated flavor. Using roasted cherry tomatoes is good too.
    • Protein swaps: Large shrimp (seared, baked, broiled or grilled) or thinly sliced, cooked chicken breast are good options.

    Buying and Searing Scallops - Quick Guide

    • Smell & appearance: Scallops should smell like the ocean - fresh and briny, not fishy. Avoid any with an off odor.
    • Color - Pink scallops (if you see them) are typically female scallops carrying roe, which gives them a coral color and a richer, sweeter flavor, while white scallops are usually male scallops.
    • Size consistency: Choose scallops that are similar in size so they cook at the same rate.
    • Dry vs. treated: Buy dry (chemical-free) scallops when possible. Ask your fishmonger if they've been treated with phosphates - treated scallops absorb water, look unnaturally white, and won't sear well. You don't want to pay for water weight.
    • Freshness & timing: Use scallops the same day you buy them or no later than the next day.
    • Transport & storage: Ask the fish counter to include an ice pack for the trip home in hot weather. Store scallops in the coldest part of your refrigerator or keep them on a bowl of ice (still packaged) until you're ready to cook.
    • Cooking note: Pat scallops completely dry before cooking for the best crust.

    How to Make Pasta with Scallops

    Bring a pot of water to a boil for pasta and prep your vegetables. Halve the tomatoes, chop the zucchini and cook the corn. If you don't want to use corn, check the veggie swaps above.

    Prep Vegetables

    Chop the zucchini, halve the tomaotes, and cook the corn, if using fresh corn. If using frozen corn, thaw and drain well. Sauté shallot and garlic in a little olive oil, add the vegetables and cook until they are lightly cooked and hot. Keep vegetables warm until your scallops are done.

    Prep Scallops

    Unwrap the scallops and allow them to sit on the counter for 30-45 minutes to get the chill off. Check to see if the abductor muscle is still attached (the "foot"). If it is, remove it. It's chewy and not nice to eat.

    Sear Scallops

    Sprinkle the scallops with kosher or sea salt. Heat the pan over medium to medium high and add two teaspoons olive oil. Place the scallops in a single layer in the pan. Don't crowd them. Allow a golden crust to form.

    Searing scallops in a non-stick until they reach a golden crust.

    This will take a few minutes. Don't disturb the scallops while they are searing. Watch your heat and turn down if needed. You don't want them to burn.

    Finishing searing scallops with a white wine deglaze and placing a lid on top.

    When you get a golden crust, turn them over. Pour in the wine (or broth) and immediately cover with the lid. Turn the heat to low. The scallops will finish cooking in 1-2 minutes, depending on size and thickness. When done they should still be a little translucent in the center. Don't overcook them.

    Chef's Tip - Best Pan for Searing Scallops
    To get a good sear on scallops you need a reliable pan, but they are also delicate. If your nonstick is scratched, worn, or flaking, retire it and replace it - it's not safe to use. A well-seasoned cast-iron skillet is an excellent alternative for a nice crust.

    How to Serve Pasta Recipe with Scallops

    To serve, place pasta and vegetables in a wide shallow bowl and top with scallops. For garish, sprinkle on additional fresh chopped herbs, top with scallops and if desired and little drizzle of good finishing olive oil (a lemon olive oil is nice), and a squeeze of fresh lemon if desired.

    Storage and Reheating

    While this pasta recipe is best served fresh, scallops can be reheated - but be very careful, because they easily become tough and rubbery. Warm them gently over low heat: a quick sauté in a little butter or olive oil for about 30-45 seconds, or a brief covered steam for 60 seconds, just until warmed through. Avoid high heat, long reheating times, or microwaving, which will overcook them and turn them rubbery.

    If you do have leftovers, store the scallops and pasta/vegetables separately in airtight containers. Refrigerate and use scallops within 24 hours - best eaten the next day.

    Recipe FAQs

    How long should I sear scallops?

    Sear one side until a golden crust forms ( 1 ½-2 minutes). Turn the scallops, add a splash of white wine or lemon water, cover with a lid, and finish for about 1 minute - this keeps the crust intact and yields moist, tender scallops.

    Are scallops safe to eat rare?

    Scallops should be opaque in the center and slightly firm. They are not served raw like sashimi in this preparation - cook until just done for best texture. If you over-cook scallops can become rubbery.

    Can I use frozen scallops?

    Yes - thaw them completely overnight in the refrigerator, then pat them totally dry before cooking. Excess moisture prevents a good sear.

    Do I need to remove the side muscle?

    Yes. Peel off the small rectangular side muscle (if present) before cooking - it can be chewy. It is what anchors the scallop inside it's shell.

    Can I swap the scallops for another protein?

    Yes - large shrimp cooked the same way works well. For non-seafood options, thin sliced chicken breast or Italian-style chicken sausage are good swaps.

    More Seafood Recipes

    Love seafood? Here are more dishes to try, all easy and doable for a weeknight or even for weekend company. Check out the fish and seafood recipes index for more inspration.

    • Grilled shrimp on bamboo sticks on a white platter with chimchurri sauce.
      Shrimp Skewers (Grilled or Oven)
    • Crusty topped blackened fish filet on top of coleslaw in a gray bowl.
      Blackened Mahi Mahi (Air Fryer Recipe)
    • baked lemon shrimp scampi
      Easy Baked Shrimp Scampi
    • Close up of a platter of salmon filets with lemon and herbs on a table.
      How to Make Steamed Salmon

    Did You Make This Recipe?

    If you make this pasta recipe with scallops, please let me know how you enjoyed it. I love hearing from you, and your comments help others too. Please consider leaving a start rating.

    📖 Recipe

    seared scallops with pasta | afoodcentriclife.com

    Pasta Recipe With Scallops

    Sally Cameron
    Packed with colorful summer vegetables serve seared scallops over pasta. After a little vegetable prep work, it goes together easily. Toss in thinly sliced basil leaves at the end for wonderful flavor and even more color. You'll need a good nonstick pan to sear the scallops. To save a few minutes, you can use organic frozen sweet corn instead of cooking an ear of fresh corn. Alternatively, serve with steamed brown rice.
    5 from 1 vote
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 10 minutes mins
    Cook Time 20 minutes mins
    Total Time 30 minutes mins
    Course Main Course
    Cuisine Italian
    Servings 4 servings
    Calories 444 kcal

    Equipment

    • Non-stick pan

    Ingredients
      

    • 1 cup cooked corn kernels 2 ears or use frozen thawed
    • 2-3 small zucchini about a pound
    • 1 dry pint grape or cherry tomatoes
    • 1 large shallot
    • 2 tablespoons olive oil divided use
    • 3 large garlic cloves chopped fine
    • 1 pound large sea scallops
    • ⅓ cup dry white wine or broth
    • Salt and pepper to taste
    • 2 handfuls fresh basil leaves torn up
    • 8 ounces pasta of choice angel hair, linguine, or spaghetti
    • 1 tablespoon fresh chopped parsley
    • 1 lemon cut into wedges for squeezing

    Would you like to save this recipe?

    Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

    Instructions
     

    Start pasta water

    • Fill a large pot of water ¾ full, add a little salt, and get it started. While the water is coming to a boil, prep the vegetables. Put wide shallow pasta dishes in a low oven (175°F) or warming drawer. This is optional but nice.

    Prep corn

    • If using fresh corn, bring a pot of water large enough to hold the ears of corn to a boil. Add salt and drop corn into the boiling water. Cook for 3 minutes and remove the corn. When cool enough to handle, cut the kernels off the cob with a sharp knife and set aside.
      If using frozen corn, thaw and drain, no need to cook (as it is already blanched).

    Prep other vegetables

    • For zucchini, trim off the ends, then cut lengthwise into quarters. Cut each quarter into slices about a ½" (1 cm) wide. Set aside. Slice tomatoes in half. Halve the shallot lengthwise, lay flat and slice into thin pieces.

    Cook pasta and vegetables

    • Start the pasta and cook according to package directions.
    • In a large sauté or fry pan over medium heat, add 1 ½ tablespoons of olive oil. When hot add the shallot and cook for 1 minute. Add the garlic and cook for 30 seconds, then add the corn, zucchini, and tomatoes. Cook 5-7 minutes until tomatoes soften and zucchini and corn brown a bit. When done turn off the heat and sprinkle with salt and pepper to season. Keep warm.

    Sear scallops

    • To sear scallops, pat them dry, then season top and bottom with salt and pepper. Heat a non-stick sauté pan over medium heat with half a tablespoon of olive oil. When hot, place the scallops in a flat, single layer in the pan.
      Allow them to cook until a golden brown crust forms, then turn carefully. Pour in the wine, cover with a lid immediately and turn heat to low. Cook scallops about another 1-2 minutes. When done, they will be slightly translucent in the center. Do not over cook them. Depending on size, they will take 5-7 minutes total.

    To serve

    • Portion hot pasta into bowls and top with vegetables, basil and parsley, then scallops. Drizzle with a little extra olive oil ad serve with lemon wedges if desired. Serve immediately.

    Notes

    To serve, place pasta and vegetables in a wide shallow bowl and top with scallops. For garish, sprinkle on additional fresh chopped herbs, top with scallops and if desired and little drizzle of good finishing olive oil (a lemon olive oil is nice).

    Nutrition

    Calories: 444kcalCarbohydrates: 62gProtein: 25gFat: 8gSaturated Fat: 1gPolyunsaturated Fat: 1gMonounsaturated Fat: 4gTrans Fat: 0.01gCholesterol: 27mgSodium: 549mgPotassium: 1010mgFiber: 5gSugar: 10gVitamin A: 1256IUVitamin C: 36mgCalcium: 59mgIron: 2mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    Cherry Clafoutis (Easy Fresh Cherry Dessert)

    06/25/2023 by Sally Cameron 11 Comments

    A single layer sweet cherry cake with golden top on white plate.

    Cherry clafoutis is a rustic French dessert with sweet cherries baked into a soft, tender batter. My version is slightly thicker and more sliceable than traditional custardy clafoutis, landing somewhere between classic cherry clafoutis and a simple cherry cake. It's an easy one-pan summer dessert made with real fresh cherries, no fuss, and no neon cherries in sight. Serve with powdered sugar, vanilla ice cream, or whipped cream.

    A sweet cherry cake on a white plate with a slice on a small plate.

    Instead of pouring a thin batter over whole cherries, I spread a thicker batter into the pan and arrange halved cherries over the top. The result is buttery, tender, fruit-forward, and easy to slice-more like an old-fashioned fruit buckle meets simple country French dessert. Make it gluten-free or with all-purpose flour; I've done both, and it's always a hit that people love, especially topped with vanilla bean ice cream.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Cherry Clafoutis Recipe Snapshot

    • One-pan summer dessert - Simple to make and baked in a single pan.
    • Fresh cherry flavor - Sweet summer cherries are the star.
    • Rustic and sliceable - Softer than cake, sturdier than classic clafoutis.
    • Made from scratch - Real ingredients, easy steps, and no boxed mixes..

    For another fantastic one-pan cake, try this lemon olive oil cake, one of my favorite dessert recipes.

    Ingredients You'll Need

    You'll need a 9" springform pan and some parchment to line it.

    Ingredients for a cherry clafoutis in prep bowls on a kitchen counter.
    • Cherries - Use fresh, sweet cherries for the best flavor. Bing, black cherries, or Rainier cherries all work; choose whichever looks best at the market.
    • Flour - I use King Arthur gluten-free flour blend with xanthan gum for structure and binding. Not gluten-free? All-purpose flour works too; that's how I made this before going gluten-free.
    • Baking powder - Use aluminum-free baking powder to help the clafoutis rise evenly.
    • Butter - Unsalted butter is best for baking. Dairy-free note below.
    • Sugar - Natural cane sugar sweetens the batter without making it overly sweet.
    • Eggs - Large eggs add richness, color, and structure.
    • Almond extract - Almond and cherry are a classic pairing, but vanilla extract works too if preferred.

    Please see the recipe card for measurements.

    Chef's Note: Why a Springform Pan. I bake this cherry clafoutis in a springform pan because it unmolds cleanly and slices beautifully. Traditional French clafoutis is often baked in a ceramic dish or cast iron skillet and served by the spoon. This version is a little more structured, making it easy to cut into wedges for serving.

    Substitutions and Variations

    • Dairy-free - Use unsalted plant-based butter sticks or blocks, such as Miyoko's or Earth Balance. Avoid buttery spreads in tubs, which behave differently in baking. If nut allergies are a concern, read labels carefully, as some plant-based butters contain cashews.
    • Lower sugar - Replace part or all of the cane sugar with a monk fruit blend.
    • For a richer texture - Add 2 tablespoons of heavy cream to the batter. It adds a little extra richness and tenderness.

    For another easy almond flavored cake, try this almond flour orange cake.

    Chef's Tip: Tools for Working With Cherries - Use disposable kitchen gloves to protect hands from the high stain juice of cherries (and a sturdy kitchen apron). The best way to pit cherries for a cherry clafoutis is with an inexpensive cherry pitter. For the best results (in all baking), weigh your flour with a digital kitchen scale. This is especially important with gluten-free flours.

    How to Make a Cherry Clafoutis

    You need a 9" springform pan for your baking pan, and parchment paper, either pieces you can cut or 9" parchment rounds. Buy them online or at a kitchen supply store. Have your butter and eggs at room temperature before starting.

    Pitting dark red cherries on a sheet pan to contain the juices.
    Step 1: Pit cherries
    Adding dry ingredients to a bowl and whisk together.
    Step 2: Sift the flour, baking powder, and salt into a medium bowl. Give them a quick whisk to evenly combine and aerate the mixture.
    Adding soft butter and sugar to a bowl for cake batter.
    Step 3: In a separate bowl, add sugar and soft butter.
    Creaming the butter and sugar together for batter.
    Step 4: With an electric mixer, "cream" the butter and sugar until smooth and fluffy.
    Butter yellow batter in a stainless bowl with beaters.
    Step 5: Add the eggs, extract, and whip into a smooth creamy base with a hand mixer.
    Adding dry ingredients to the batter base for cake batter.
    Step 6: Add the dry ingredients (flour mixture) to the bowl, starting on low speed beat until the batter forms.
    Finished buttery yellow cake batter ready for the baking pan.
    Step 7: Increase to high speed and beat batter until smooth. 2-3 minutes. Add cream now if using.
    Thick cake batter in a cake pan to be spread out with a spatula.
    Step 8: Pour batter batter into the prepared pan. It will be thick.
    Cake batter spread into a springform pan for baking.
    Step 9: Spread the batter evenly in the pan for baking with a flexible spatula.
    Cake batter topped with halved red cherries.
    Step 10: Arrange halved cherries on top of the cake batter. Bake until the top is golden and firm to the touch.
    Baked golden cherry cake on a cooling rack.
    Step 11: After baking, allow the cherry cake to cool for 10 minutes, then release the spring and cool on a wire rack.

    Chef's note: Fresh or frozen cherries? I have not tested a cherry clafoutis with frozen pitted cherries. My concern is all of the extra moisture frozen cherries have. Even when thawed and patted dry in paper towels, they may not work out well in this recipe. If you try it, be sure the cherries are as dry as possible and let me know how it comes out.

    A piece of cherry cake with fork on a plate, topped with ice cream.

    Serving Suggestions

    Serve cherry clafoutis for dessert or even brunch. It needs only a simple finish: a scoop of vanilla ice cream, lightly sweetened whipped cream, sweetened plain Greek yogurt with honey, or a dusting of powdered sugar or powdered monk fruit. Even plain is good!

    If you love cherries like I do, try this healthy cherry smoothie with Greek yogurt.

    Storing

    Store leftovers covered at room temperature for up to 2 days, or refrigerate well wrapped for 3-4 days. The texture will soften a bit in the refrigerator, but it's still delicious.

    More Delicious Dessert Recipes

    Check out the dessert category page for more ideas. If you enjoy baking, try this orange almond cake. It's another one pan easy recipe. If you love frozen desserts, try this nectarine sorbet, refreshing and dairy-free too.

    • Gluten-free brownies with melted chocolate in a square pan after baking.
      Fudgy Gluten-Free Chocolate Brownies
    • A golden slice of lemon olive oil cake, made wit whole almonds, served with berries and glaze.
      Super Moist Lemon Olive Oil Cake Recipe
    • champagne sabayon sauce
      How to Make Sabayon
    • easy lemon mousse
      Lemon Mousse (Light and Airy)

    ⭐️Did You Make This Recipe?

    If you make this Cherry Clafoutis, please add your comment. I love hearing from youand your comments help other readers. Thanks for supporting my site.

    📖 Recipe

    A single layer sweet cherry cake with golden top on white plate.

    Cherry Clafoutis (Easy One-Pan Cherry Cake)

    Sally Cameron
    An easy cherry cake that is a simple country-style dessert. Get your butter and eggs out of the fridge ahead of time. For best results, weigh flour on a kitchen scale for accuracy.
    5 from 2 votes
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 20 minutes mins
    Cook Time 55 minutes mins
    Total Time 1 hour hr 15 minutes mins
    Course Dessert
    Cuisine American
    Servings 8
    Calories 256 kcal

    Equipment

    • 9" springform pan
    • Parchment paper
    • Kitchen gloves optional
    • Cherry pitter tool
    • Electric hand mixer
    • digital kitchen scale

    Ingredients
      

    Cherry Cake

    • Non-stick spray or use the butter wrapper
    • 35-40 large fresh sweet cherries 12 ounces before pitting
    • 1 cup gluten-free flour blend 4.6 ounces
    • 1 teaspoon baking powder aluminum-free
    • 1 pinch sea salt
    • 4 ounces unsalted dairy butter at room temperature, sub plant butter
    • ¾ cup cane sugar or monk fruit blend 6 ounces
    • 2 large eggs
    • 1 teaspoon almond extract or sub vanilla extract
    • 2-3 teaspoons sugar optional for top before baking
    • 2 tablespoons heavy cream optional

    Optional toppings

    • vanilla ice cream
    • lightly sweetened whipped cream

    Would you like to save this recipe?

    Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

    Instructions
     

    Pre-heat Oven, Prepare Pan

    • Position oven rack in the center and pre-heat oven to 350 degrees. Prepare your pan. Spray or butter the bottom of the springform pan and line the bottom with a parchment circle.

    Pit the Cherries

    • Wash, stem and pit the cherries with a cherry pitter tool or a paring knife. Cut the cherries in half, top to bottom.

    Blend dry ingredients

    • Sift the flour, baking powder, and salt into a medium bowl. Give them a quick whisk to evenly combine and aerate the mixture.

    Cream the butter and sugar

    • In a medium bowl, cream the butter and sugar together until light and fluffy with a hand-held electric mixer. Add the eggs and beat until incorporated and the batter is smooth, then add in the almond extract and heavy cream if using. Add in the flour blend. Beat on low speed, increasing speed as batter stiffens, until smooth. Batter will be thick.

    Bake the Cake

    • Scrape batter into the pan and smooth to the edges with a flexible spatula or mini off-set spatula. Starting at the outer edge, place the cherries cut side down on top of the batter completely covering the top. Sprinkle the top with the 2-3 teaspoons of extra sugar if desired.
      Bake cake until golden on top, 45-55 minutes or until a cake tester, toothpick or paring knife inserted in the center comes out clean, and top is lightly golden.

    Cool Cake and Serve

    • Remove cake from the oven and allow to cool 10 minutes. Run a thin paring knife around the inside of the pan edge to free the cake. Pop the spring and remove the sides of the pan. Serve warm or at room temperature, topped with ice cream, whipped cream, or powdered sugar. Cake keeps 2 days well wrapped on the counter or up to 4 days in the refrigerator.

    Notes

    Kitchen gloves - to prevent your hands from getting stained from the cherries, a handy tool for every kitchen.
    The clafoutis can be made a day ahead - Cool completely, return the cake to the pan if removed, and cover the pan tightly with plastic film.
    Baker’s Tip: If using a monk fruit and allulose blend, check the cake 5–10 minutes early, as it may brown more quickly than with regular sugar. You can also reduce the oven temperature to 325°F if your cake browns too fast.
    For a richer texture – Add 2 tablespoons of heavy cream to the batter. It adds a little extra richness and tenderness (optional). 

    Nutrition

    Calories: 256kcalCarbohydrates: 36gProtein: 4gFat: 13gSaturated Fat: 8gPolyunsaturated Fat: 1gMonounsaturated Fat: 4gTrans Fat: 0.5gCholesterol: 77mgSodium: 64mgPotassium: 94mgFiber: 2gSugar: 24gVitamin A: 441IUVitamin C: 2mgCalcium: 61mgIron: 1mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    Roasted Red Bell Pepper Hummus Recipe

    02/06/2024 by Sally Cameron 7 Comments

    A white bowl of roasted red pepper hummus to serve as an appetizer.

    Creamy roasted red bell pepper hummus recipe will make hummus lovers happy. Using pantry staples like roasted red peppers and garbanzo beans, this middle eastern dip makes a great afternoon healthy snack or pre-dinner nibble. Serve it up for game day too with crackers, pita chips, crostini, or raw veggies. Just make some, and make it ahead.

    A bowl of creamy bright orange red pepper hummus with cucumbers and chips.

    Here's a nice twist from regular hummus. Roasted red pepper hummus goes together in a matter of minutes with jarred, roasted red bell peppers, garbanzo beans, tahini, olive oil, and spices for bold flavors. Puree in a food processor and until smooth or use a high-speed blender. Homemade hummus is the best!

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why You'll Like This Recipe

    • Made with pantry items.
    • Easy, goes together quickly.
    • Versatile serving ideas.

    If you love garbanzo beans, try this terrific kale salad with garbanzo beans and a creamy tahini dressing.

    Recipe Ingredients

    This recipe serves about 6 people. If you need a lot of hummus the recipe doubles easily.

    Ingredients for roasted red bell pepper hummus on a counter.
    • Roasted red peppers: The key ingredient. Use jarred, already roasted peppers for speed and the ease of keeping in the pantry, or roast your own peppers. Directions below.
    • Garbanzo beans: Use canned garbanzo beans (aka canned chickpeas) for ease in getting this hummus recipe made. You'll use some of the canned liquid (called aquafaba) for a creamier hummus. It looks like egg whites.
    • Tahini: Sesame seed paste used in traditional hummus for a creamy consistency. and richness. Think of peanut butter made from sesame seeds but it's not sweet, more bitter and earthy.
    • Lemon: Fresh lemon juice brightens the flavor and provides a little liquid to help when pureeing.
    • Extra virgin olive oil: Healthy fat that adds flavor and smoothness to hummus.
    • Ground cumin: One of the most widely used spices in the world. It has a rich, warm, earthy, almost lemony flavor. Buy ground, not seeds, unless you grind you own fresh.
    • Paprika: Use either regular paprika, sharp or hot paprika for the kick (it can be quite hot so go easy,) or my favorite, smoked paprika for a smoky flavor. Can't live without it!
    • Garlic: Fresh garlic cloves work well, but you can use a tube of garlic puree.

    Please see recipe card for quantities.

    Chef's tip: Two ways to use fresh garlic. One, peel the cloves then drop the whole cloves through the food processor feed tube while the machine is running before other ingredients. For super fine garlic that is a paste, use a microplane zester. Works great.

    Substitutions and Variations

    • Substitute sunflower butter (sun butter) for a hummus recipe without tahini.

    To make red pepper hummus spicier, try adding chipotle powder, cayenne pepper, Tabasco sauce, your favorite hot sauce, or another style hot condiment such as harissa when you are pureeing it. If you roast your own red bell peppers, roast 1-2 hot red chili peppers with the bell peppers, seed them, chop fine and puree.

    Want another terrific garbanzo recipe? Try this easy three bean salad with chickpeas, kidney beans, and green beans.

    Recipe Instructions

    There are a few ways to achieve creamy hummus. First, don't throw the canned liquid that they come in away. It's called aquafaba. Adding a little of this liquid to your hummus helps give it that creamy consistency.

    A glass bowl of drained garbanzo beans and their liquid.
    Step 1: Drain the beans through a strainer into a bowl but save the can liquid
    Inside view of a food processor with red peppers, spices, and garlic.
    Step 2: Step 1: Add peppers, spices, garlic, oil, and lemon to the bowl of a food processor.
    Adding chickpeas to a food processor for making hummus.
    Step 3: Step 2: After pureeing peppers add tahini, beans and bean liquid (aquafaba).
    Creamy, bright orange red pepper hummus in a food processor workbowl.
    Step 4: Puree until smooth, taste and adjust taste with more salt if needed.

    How Do I Roast My Own Red Peppers for Hummus?

    If you want to roast your own red bell peppers, there are two main ways:

    • Method one: roast red peppers directly over a medium open flame such as the top of a gas stove (placing them directly on the grate) or barbecue until the skins are blackened and charred. Turn them occasionally to get even black blistering. There will still be a few areas of red when they are done, so don't worry.
    • Method two: heat the broiler to hot, place an oven rack on the second level down from the top. Line a rimmed baking sheet with foil (parchment paper could light on fire). Cut the peppers in half top to bottom and remove the seeds. Lay the pepper halves flat and broil until the skins are blackened and fairly evenly charred. Remove from the oven.

    For both methods, when peppers are well charred, place them in a medium bowl and cover tightly with plastic. This steams the skins off allowing for easier removal.

    When the peppers are cool enough to handle, peel and rub off as much of the blackened skins as possible and remove seeds. It's a bit messy, so wear disposable kitchen gloves if you prefer. The peppers are ready to use.

    If you love roasted red bell peppers, try this sheet pan red pepper soup!

    Serving Suggestions

    A white bowl of roasted red pepper hummus to serve as an appetizer.

    Here's What to Serve With Roasted Red Bell Pepper Hummus

    • Cucumber slices.
    • Raw zucchini "chips" or sticks.
    • Endive leaves (they are great scoopers).
    • Rice crackers or wheat crackers.
    • Pita chips or warm pita bread wedges.

    Roasted red pepper hummus is a terrific appetizer spread to make ahead of time. It lasts for up to 5 days well refrigerated in an airtight container so make a few days ahead of time.

    What Else Can You do With Red Pepper Hummus?

    • Make a Mediterranean turkey wrap spreading red pepper hummus onto tortillas, add turkey and salad greens.
    • Use for a delicious sandwich spread on whole grain or gluten-free bread.
    • Toss with hot pasta noodles.
    • Packs easily for lunch at school or the office in a to-go, airtight container.
    • Use a dollop to top roast fish or chicken.
    • Use as a sauce for chicken, fish, or vegetarian tacos.
    • Use it as part of a beautiful Mediterranean mezze platter when friends are coming over.
    Creamy red pepper hummus on a cracker.

    More Hummus and Dips

    Ready to party? There are lots of terrific dips and spreads for snacking, sharing, and enjoying. The nice thing is they are all easy to make. Check out the appetizers and snacks page for more ideas!

    • Close up of creamy basil and avocado dip in white bowl.
      Avocado Dip with Yogurt and Fresh Basil
    • Easy Green Goddess Dip (and Dressing)
    • Creamy salmon dip on an appetizer tray with crackers and cucumber chips.
      The Best Smoked Salmon Dip Recipe
    • Golden Mediterranean hummus in a bowl sprinkled with olive oil, za'atar, and garbanzo beans.
      Homemade Hummus Without Tahini

    ⭐️Did you Make This?

    If you make this recipe, please comment and let me know, and if you loved it, please give it a 5 star rating! They really help other readers.

    📖 Recipe

    A white bowl of roasted red pepper hummus to serve as an appetizer.

    Roasted Red Pepper Hummus

    Sally Cameron
    Bright orange with a smoky, creamy taste, this roasted red bell pepper hummus goes together in minutes with a food processor. Serve with cool cucumber slices and raw veggies, brown rice crackers or whole wheat pita wedges. It lasts 5 days in the refrigerator. Doubles easily for a crowd.
    5 from 1 vote
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 15 minutes mins
    Total Time 15 minutes mins
    Course Appetizer, Snack
    Cuisine Middle Eastern
    Servings 6 servings (yield 2 cups)
    Calories 50 kcal

    Ingredients
      

    • 1 15-ounce can garbanzo beans
    • 2 tablespoons aquafaba (the can liquid from the beans) save when you drain the can
    • 1 6-ounce jar roasted red peppers drained and chopped
    • 1 lemon juiced
    • 2 tablespoons olive oil
    • 1-2 garlic cloves peeled and zested or finely chopped
    • 1 teaspoon smoked paprika or regular paprika
    • 1 teaspoon ground cumin
    • ¼ teaspoon sea salt
    • ¼ teaspoon ground black pepper

    Would you like to save this recipe?

    Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

    Instructions
     

    • Pour canned garbanzo beans through a strainer over a bowl to save the canned liquid (aquafaba). Drain and roughly chop the peppers. For garlic cloves, either chop finely by hand or zest with a microplane before adding to the food processor, or drop them first into the food processor with the blade running through the feed tube to chop.
      Add beans, peppers and all of the rest of the ingredients to a food processor. Puree until smooth and creamy. Taste and adjust seasoning to your preference.

    Notes

    To roast your own red bell peppers, its takes about 2 large or 3 small peppers:
    Method 1: Roast whole directly over the flame of a gas stove (place them right on the grate), turning until mostly black, blistered and charred. Place in a medium bowl and cover tightly with plastic wrap. When cool enough to handle, peel of as much skin as possible the use in recipe. 
    Method 2: Cut peppers in half top to bottom and remove the seeds. Place cut side down on a foil lined baked sheet and broil until charred and blackened. Remove skin as noted above.
    Ways to enjoy this hummus:
    • Spread onto a brown rice or whole wheat tortilla, add turkey and greens and make a Mediterranean turkey wrap
    • Use for a sandwich on whole grain or gluten-free bread
    • Toss with hot pasta noodles
    • Packs easily for lunch at school or the office
    • Use a dollop to top roast fish or chicken
    • Use as a sauce for chicken, fish or vegetarian tacos
    Serve with cucumber slices, carrot sticks, raw zucchini sticks, cracker, pita wedges, or pita chips.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 50kcalCarbohydrates: 2gProtein: 0.4gFat: 5gSaturated Fat: 1gPolyunsaturated Fat: 1gMonounsaturated Fat: 3gSodium: 101mgPotassium: 42mgFiber: 1gSugar: 0.5gVitamin A: 174IUVitamin C: 10mgCalcium: 10mgIron: 0.4mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    Easy Blender Lemon Chicken Marinade

    08/11/2023 by Sally Cameron 12 Comments

    Platter of grilled chicken breasts with herbs.

    Your go-to summer chicken marinade is about to get even better. This easy lemon chicken marinade blends fresh lemon, garlic, Dijon, olive oil, and herbs into a bright, flavorful sauce that does double duty as both a marinade and a finishing drizzle for grilled chicken. Make it in minutes in the blender, marinate your chicken, then brush on a little clean marinade after grilling for extra flavor. It's simple, fresh, and perfect for an easy summer dinner.

    White platter of grilled chicken breasts with lemon and herbs.

    Marinades are meant to add flavor to meat and poultry, but too often they fall short. Not this lemon chicken marinade. Fresh lemon, herbs, and garlic bring bright, bold flavor, while Dijon mustard helps create a creamy, emulsified marinade that clings beautifully to the chicken. For the best flavor, brush the grilled chicken with a little clean marinade right after it comes off the grill, and serve extra on the side as a sauce. It's simple, but it makes the flavor pop.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Lemon Chicken Marinade Recipe Highlights

    • Use it three ways - As a lemon chicken marinade, a finishing sauce, or a bright dressing.
    • beyond chicken - Try it with shrimp, fish, or chicken skewers.
    • Grill indoors or out - Cook on an outdoor grill or inside with a grill pan.
    • Great for skewers - Marinate chicken chunks, thread onto skewers, and grill.

    For another chicken marinade recipe, try these baked teriyaki chicken thighs with homemade teriyaki sauce.

    Recipe Ingredients

    Simple ingredients, flavorful chicken.

    Ingredients for lemon chicken marinade and grilled chicken breasts.

    Lemon Marinade Ingredients

    • Oil: Extra virgin olive oil is best for lemon chicken marinade. It adds nice flavor.
    • Acidic component: Fresh lemon juice for the best flavor.
    • Herbs: Start fresh parsley and add another fresh herb of choice to the mix; thyme, dill, rosemary, mint, cilantro, basil, and oregano are all tasty.
    • Garlic: Use fresh garlic cloves, zested fine to blend in easily.
    • Mustard: Mustard naturally emulsifies marinade and Dijon gives it a little tang. Use a smooth Dijon for great flavor.
    • Honey: Just a little sweetness to temper the tart lemon flavor. For zero-sugar use this sugar-free honey (it's what I use).

    For Grilled Chicken

    • Chicken: Boneless, skinless chicken breasts work beautifully and are so easy. Boneless chicken thighs work too if you like dark meat. If you prefer chicken tenderloins (chicken tenders), marinate and grill using a grill basket so they don't fall through the grates. They cook quickly.

    Please see the recipe card for measurements, salt and pepper.

    Here's a great way to use these lemon chicken breasts, to top a Caesar pasta salad. It's a family-pleasing entree salad.

    Chef's Tip: Buying chicken. Buy raw chicken by weight, not pieces, as chicken breasts really vary in size. Depending on your appetites, figure 6-8 ounces per person. Leftovers are great, do don't worry about cooking extra. Use it for a terrific leftover chicken salad for the next day's lunch with extra lemon chicken marinade as salad dressing.

    Substitutions and Variations

    • Vary the fresh herbs that you choose.
    • Fresh herbs really work the best in this lemon chicken marinade, but dried or part dried can be substituted. For example, start with 1 tablespoons of fresh chopped Italian parsley as it's usually available, then add approximately a ½ teaspoon of 1 dried herb to the mix, then blend and taste. Allow the dried herbs time to rehydrate before using.
    • Use all fresh oregano and mint and make it more of a Greek chicken marinade.
    • Substitute ½ teaspoon garlic powder or granulated garlic for 2 fresh garlic cloves.
    • Make it a lime chicken marinade with fresh squeezed lime juice or a combination or lime juice and lemon juice.

    For another delicious marinade option, use my homemade Italian dressing recipe.

    Recipe instructions

    Lemon vinaigrette ingredients in a jar, not blended.
    Step 1: Add the marinade ingredients to a blender container.
    Lemon chicken marinade with herbs blended until creamy.
    Step 2: Blend marinade for a few seconds until creamy and smooth.
    Raw boneless skinless chicken breasts in a casserole dish.
    Step 3: Gently pound chicken breasts to a more even size at the thicker end.
    Boneless chicken breasts marinating in a white casserole dish.
    Step 4: Add part (not all) of the lemon marinade to the chicken, turning to coat well in a baking dish.
    Grilled chicken breasts on the grill, with nice grill marks.

    Step 5: Marinate chicken 60 minutes on the kitchen counter, indoors. Yes, this is food safe to do. Get the grill ready, drain off marinade and grill chicken on a pre-heated grill until done, approximately 12-15 minutes in total depending on the heat of your grill and the thickness of the chicken breasts.

    As soon as you pull the chicken breasts off the grill, brush them (use a pastry brush) with fresh lemon chicken marinade to add flavor and moisture for juicy chicken.

    How to Pound Chicken Breasts

    Why pound chicken breasts? Because you won't get a dry or undercooked thicker end. Chicken breasts grill more evenly giving you much better results. No more dry chicken.

    Place between layers of plastic wrap, in a zip bag, or directly on a cutting board, smooth side up. Pound boneless, skinless chicken breasts to a more even thickness focusing on the thicker end when pounding. Don't pound so hard as to tear the meat.

    For pounding, use a handy buy-it-once in your life meat pounder tool, or the flat bottom of a small heavy skillet. You'll get better control with the meat pounder.

    Platter of grilled chicken breasts with herbs and grilled lemon halves.

    Tips for Perfect Grilled Chicken Breasts

    • Be sure the grill grates are clean and oiled before starting.
    • To get perfect grill marks, use the 10:00-2:00 rule. Start the pieces angled at 10:00, then rotate the piece to 2:00 after grill marks have formed. You can also just go one direction and not turn them.
    • Start grilling on the top or presentation side (rounded side) for great grill marks, then turn and finish for a few minutes, about 11-13 minutes in total depending on the heat of your grill. I grill mine for about 8 minutes on the top and another 3-4 on the flip side.
    • Chicken is done at an internal temperature of 165°F, so grill just a few degrees short and pull them off the grill. The temperature will rise after taking off the grill and chicken stays moist.

    For another chicken cutlet recipe, try these air fryer chicken cutlets. Dinner made in minutes.

    Serving Suggestions

    As the lemon chicken marinade intentionally makes extra, serve grilled chicken breasts with fresh marinade as the sauce. It's delicious! Here are a few great sides for lemon chicken marinade and grilled chicken breasts:

    • Sweet corn succotash with bacon (or without)
    • Healthy homemade coleslaw (lightly creamy)
    • Baby Dutch yellow potatoes
    • This easy, no-cook 3-bean salad.
    • Simple 5 minute green beans

    Extra garlic lemon chicken marinade works beautifully as a salad dressing or to dress grilled vegetables, like this grilled zucchini, another terrific side dish for grilled chicken breasts.

    For the perfect dessert, serve this easy lemon posset. Make it in minutes!

    Lemon chicken marinade with herbs blended until creamy.

    Recipe FAQs

    Does marinating chicken make any difference?

    Marinating chicken adds flavor. According to Harold McGee, world renowned authority and award winning author on the chemistry of food and cooking, "today meats are marinated primarily to flavor them and to make them more moist and tender". The acid in marinades does weaken muscle tissue and increase its ability to retain moisture, but marinades penetrate slowly, and not much in the case of chicken.

    Longer marinating time is not the answer, as chicken can get a mushy texture and from the acid in the citrus juice. Long marinate times generally do you (or your chicken) no good. Where marinating imparts more flavor is when cooking thin slices of meat, as in sliced skirt steak or chicken for stir fry.

    All that being said, I pound my chicken breasts to a more even thickness, marinate for 1 hour, and finish it with clean marinade immediately after grilling. It's moist, juicy, and delicious.

    How long should you marinate chicken?

    For boneless, skinless chicken, 60 minutes is enough time to impart flavor and a little moisture. It's food-safe to marinate chicken on an indoor kitchen counter if the temperature is under 90°F for up to an hour: for longer, refrigerate. Most kitchens are not near that temperature. You really don't need to marinate chicken any longer anyway.

    What are the 3 main ingredients when marinating?

    Oil, acid, and flavorings such as garlic and herbs are the basics for a good marinade.

    More Recipes With Lemon

    Do you love lemon? Me too! Try a few of these lemon recipes. And if you have an ice cream maker, try this delicious homemade lemon ice cream for a real summer treat.

    • creamy tahini salad dressing
      Creamy Lemon Tahini Salad Dressing
    • A golden slice of lemon olive oil cake, made wit whole almonds, served with berries and glaze.
      Super Moist Lemon Olive Oil Cake Recipe
    • lemon thyme brussels sprouts
      Sautéed Brussels Sprouts with Lemon and Thyme
    • Gluten-free pasta salad with tomatoes, cucumber, pine nuts, herbs, and more.
      Mediterranean Pasta Salad Recipe

    ⭐️Did you Make This Recipe?

    If you make this recipe, please add your comment. I appreciate your feedback and enjoy hearing from you. If you loved it, please give it a 5-star rating! They really help other readers.

    📖 Recipe

    Platter of grilled chicken breasts with herbs.

    Lemon Chicken Marinade

    Sally Cameron
    It works as both a marinade for the raw chicken and a sauce to finish the grilled chicken at serving. Serve with grilled vegetables. Marinade yield is 1 cup; half for marinade and half to use as sauce after grilling. Recipe doubles easily.
    5 from 5 votes
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 10 minutes mins
    Cook Time 20 minutes mins
    Marinate time 1 hour hr
    Total Time 1 hour hr 30 minutes mins
    Course Main Course
    Cuisine American
    Servings 4
    Calories 527 kcal

    Equipment

    • blender
    • Grill or barbecue
    • Mini blender great size for dressings
    • Microplane zester

    Ingredients
      

    Lemon chicken marinade (yield 1 cup)

    • ⅔ cup extra virgin olive oil
    • ⅓ cup freshly squeezed lemon juice 2 large lemons
    • 2 tablespoons chopped fresh herbs of choice parsley, mint, dill, rosemary, thyme
    • 2 teaspoons smooth Dijon mustard
    • 1-2 teaspoons honey or no-sugar honey
    • 2 large garlic cloves finely chopped or zested
    • ½ teaspoon sea salt
    • ¼ teaspoon black pepper

    Chicken

    • 1 ½ - 2 pounds boneless skinless chicken breasts

    Would you like to save this recipe?

    Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

    Instructions
     

    Make the marinade (makes extra)

    • Add all marinade ingredients to a blender and blend about 20 seconds until smooth and emulsified.

    Trim and prep the chicken

    • Place chicken breasts in a heavy duty zip style plastic bag smooth side up. Using a meat pounder, pound the thicker end of the chicken breasts to make them thinner and more even in thickness. Pound chicken firmly but not so hard that you tear the meat. Larger chicken breasts take more pounding than smaller ones.

    Marinate the chicken

    • Pour about 4-5 tablespoons of marinade or a little more into the zip bag and seal the bag pressing the air out. Refrigerate chicken 1 hour at room temperature or refrigerated. You can also marinate them in a flat casserole dish, turning to coat them well.

    Grill the chicken breasts

    • Before grilling, drain off marinade and discard. Place on a plastic film or parchment covered quarter sheet pan to transport to the grill.
    • Grill chicken until done, about 12-14 minutes depending on your grill and how thick the chicken is. Using a digital thermometer to test for temperature, pull chicken off the grill at 160 degrees. It will rise to the perfect 165° and stay juicy. Brush or drizzle with fresh lemon chicken marinade for added flavor and serve more on the side.
      Leftover chicken keeps up to 4 days in the refrigerator in an airtight container, remember to label and date. Makes great chicken salad the next day.

    Notes

    Grilling Tips: 
    For a gas grill or pellet grill, heat grill on high until hot then clean the grates with a stiff grill brush. Turn the heat down to medium. Brush the grill grates with tongs and a wad of folded paper towels dipped in a little high heat oil to help prevent sticking. Place chicken breasts on the grill, smooth side down first.
    To get restaurant-worthy grill marks, think 10:00 and 2:00 like the positions on a clock. Start chicken breasts with one end pointed at 10 and allow the marks to develop, then move to 2 and you’ll get perfect grill marks. After a few minutes when the chicken is golden, turn the chicken breasts over and complete grilling on the other side.
    Nutritional calculation notes: As you don't consume all of the marinade at once, it is difficult to accurately calculate the numbers. Approximately half the marinade is used for the chicken then discarded, the other half used to finish and at serving. 
    Marinade per 2 tablespoons: 164 kcals, 18 gr fat, 1 carb, 0 protein.
    Chicken breast per 6 ounce servings: 185 kcals, 2 gr fat, 0 carbs, 39 protein. 

    Nutrition

    Serving: 2tablespoonsCalories: 527kcalCarbohydrates: 4gProtein: 36gFat: 41gSaturated Fat: 6gPolyunsaturated Fat: 4gMonounsaturated Fat: 28gTrans Fat: 0.02gCholesterol: 109mgSodium: 518mgPotassium: 674mgFiber: 0.3gSugar: 2gVitamin A: 223IUVitamin C: 13mgCalcium: 18mgIron: 1mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!
    • « Previous Page
    • 1
    • …
    • 5
    • 6
    • 7
    • 8
    • 9
    • 10
    • Next Page »
    Chef Sally Cameron of aFoodcentricLife.com in her kitchen.

    Welcome! I'm Sally, a professionally trained chef, former personal chef and caterer, lover of fresh healthy food, and sharing it with others.

    More about me →

    Best Summer Recipes

    • Sliced of golden pound cake with strawberries and a small bowl of whipped cream.
      Gluten Free Pound Cake with Cream Cheese
    • A glass jar of deep red homemade bbq sauce.
      Gluten-Free BBQ Sauce Recipe
    • BBQ glazed smoked pork tenderloin sliced on a gray platter for serving.
      Smoked Pork Tenderloin (pellet grill)
    • A bowl of slow cooker pinto beans topped with jalapeno slices, cilantro, and chopped white onion.
      Crock Pot Pinto Beans

    More Recipe Ideas

    • Grilled chicken kabobs glazed with hoisin sauce on a baking sheet.
      Grilled Hoisin Chicken Skewers
    • Broccoli bacon salad
      Crunchy Broccoli Salad with Bacon
    • Gluten-free pasta salad with tomatoes, cucumber, pine nuts, herbs, and more.
      Mediterranean Pasta Salad Recipe
    • Sliced flank steak on a cutting board with flank steak marinade in a small bowl.
      Carne Asada Marinade (for Grilled Steak)

    Best Summer Recipes -->

    Footer

    as seen on

    Logos of Featured Publications

    About

    • Privacy Policy
    • Disclaimer
    • Terms & Conditions
    • Accessibility policy

    Newsletter

    • Sign Up! for emails and recipes.

    Menu

    • Home
    • About
    • Contact
    • Facebook
    • Instagram
    • Pinterest

    As an Amazon Associate I earn from qualifying purchases.

    Copyright © 2026 aFoodcentricLife.com

    Rate This Recipe

    Your vote:




    A rating is required
    A name is required
    An email is required